PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL - hardingeservice.comhardingeservice.com/usr/T-Series CQ-DQ-EQ/M A... · G71...

PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL

T-42T-51T-65

Multi-Tasking CNC LathesEquipped with a

Fanuc 31i-T Control

Revised: March 20, 2015

Original Instructions

Manual No. M-504A Litho in U.S.A.Part No. M A-0009500-0504 February, 2012

TP7878B

- NOTE -

Damage resulting from misuse, negligence, or accident is not covered by theHardinge Machine Warranty.

Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

This manual covers the programming of Hardinge T-42, T-51, and T-65Multi-Tasking CNC lathes equipped with a Fanuc 31i-T control.

In no event will Hardinge Inc. be responsible for indirect or consequentialdamage resulting from the use or application of the information in this manual.

Reproduction of this manual in whole or in part, without written permission ofHardinge Inc., is prohibited.

CONVENTIONS USED IN MANUALS

DANGER

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in death orserious injury.

WARNING

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in deathor serious injury.

CAUTION

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minoror moderate injury.

NOTICE

NOTICE indicates a situation that, if not avoided, could result in damage to the ma-chine, tooling, or workpiece.

- NOTES -

Notes contain supplemental information.

© 2012, Hardinge Inc. M-504A

Table of Contents

Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

Machine Description and Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii

Machine Electrical Operating Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii

General Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix

Safety Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi

CHAPTER 1 - PART PROGRAM LANGUAGE

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Programming the Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Data Word Formats and Minimum / Maximum Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

T-42 Lathes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2T-51 and T-65 Lathes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Axis Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Special Programming Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Programming Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Programming Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Off-Line Programming Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Keyboard Programming Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Program Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Decimal Point Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Data Word Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12O Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12N Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12G Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

G00 Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13G01 Linear Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13G02 Clockwise Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14G03 Counter-Clockwise Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14G04 Dwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14G10 Offset Value Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15G17 Work Plane Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15G18 Work Plane Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15G19 Work Plane Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15G20 Inch Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15G21 Metric Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16G22 Stored Stroke Limit Check ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16G23 Stored Stroke Limit Check OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16G28 Return to Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17G31 Skip Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17G32 Threadcutting (Constant Lead) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18G34 Variable Lead Threadcutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18G40 Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19G41 Tool Nose Radius Compensation - Workpiece Right of Tool . . . . . . . 1-19G42 Tool Nose Radius Compensation - Workpiece Left of Tool . . . . . . . . 1-19G50 Maximum RPM Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19G65 Macro Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20G70 Automatic Finishing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20G71 Automatic Turning Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20G72 Automatic Facing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

M-504A i

G73 Automatic Pattern Repeat Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21G74 Automatic Drilling Cycle (Constant Depth Increments) . . . . . . . . . . 1-21G75 Automatic Grooving Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21G76 Automatic Threading Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21G80 Cancel Machining Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22G83 Z Axis Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22G84 Right-Hand Z Axis Tapping Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22G85 Z Axis Boring Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22G87 X Axis Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23G88 Right-Hand X Axis Tapping Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23G89 X Axis Boring Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23G90 Canned Turning Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23G92 Canned Threading Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24G94 Canned Facing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24G96 Constant Surface Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24G97 Direct RPM Programming (Constant Surface Speed Cancel) . . . . . . . 1-25G98 Inches / Millimeter per Minute Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25G99 Inches / Millimeter per Revolution Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25G107 Cylindrical Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25G112 Polar Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25G113 Cancel Polar Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

X Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26U Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27Z Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28W Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29Y Word [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30V Word [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31E Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31A Word [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32B Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32C Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32H Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32I Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32J Word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32K Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33

Circular Interpolation (G02 / G03). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33Variable Lead Threading (G34) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33

R Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33Linear Interpolation (G01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33Circular Interpolation (G02 / G03). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G41 / G42) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33Defining Tapers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33

P Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34Machining Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34Subprogram Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34Tool Offsets and Work Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34Spindle Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35

Q Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35F Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36S Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37T Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38

ii M-504A

M Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41M00 Program Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41M01 Optional Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41M03 Main Spindle Forward. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41M04 Main Spindle Reverse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41M05 Main Spindle Stop / Coolant OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41M07 Sub-Spindle Phase Synchronization with Main Spindle [Option] . . . . . 1-41M08 Coolant ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42M09 Coolant OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42M10 High Pressure Coolant ON [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42M11 High Pressure Coolant OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42M12 Turret Coolant OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42M13 Main Spindle Forward / Coolant ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42M14 Main Spindle Reverse / Coolant ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42M15 Thru-Spindle Coolant ON, Main Spindle [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43M16 Thru-Spindle Coolant OFF, Main Spindle [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43M20 Speed Arrival Check ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43M21 Main Spindle Collet / Chuck Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43M22 Main Spindle Collet / Chuck Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43M23 Main Spindle Contouring Mode ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43M24 Main Spindle Contouring Mode OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43M25 Main Spindle Part Catcher Retract [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43M26 Main Spindle Part Catcher Extend [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44M27 Main Spindle Internal Chucking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44M28 Main Spindle External Chucking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44M29 Rigid Tapping Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44M30 End of Program, Auto Door Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44M32 Spindle Synchronization [Option]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44M33 Sub-Spindle Forward [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44M34 Sub-Spindle Reverse [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44M35 Sub-Spindle Stop [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45M36 Air Blast ON [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45M37 Air Blast OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45M38 Auto Door Open [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45M42 No Corner Rounding - Exact Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45M43 Corner Rounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45M44 Enable Turret Bi-Directional Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45M45 Disable Turret Bi-Directional Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45M46 Sub-Spindle Air Blast ON [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45M47 Sub-Spindle Air Blast OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45M48 Enable Feedrate and Spindle Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46M49 Disable Feedrate and Spindle Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46M51 Live Tool Rotational Direction Command [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46M52 Live Tool Rotational Direction Command [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46M53 Live Tool Rotational Direction Command / Coolant ON [Option] . . . . . 1-46M54 Live Tool Rotational Direction Command / Coolant ON [Option] . . . . . 1-46M55 Live Tool Stop / Coolant OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47M56 Sub-Spindle Collet / Chuck Open [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47M57 Sub-Spindle Collet / Chuck Close [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47M58 Feed Bar Stock [Option]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47M59 Cancel Feed Bar Stock [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47M60 Speed Arrival Check OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47

M-504A iii

M61 Bar Change [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47M62 Activate C Axis Spindle Synchronization [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47M63 Cancel C Axis Spindle Synchronization [Option]. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47M64 Spindle Feedback from Main Spindle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48M65 Spindle Feedback from Sub-Spindle [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48M66 Spindle Feedback from Live Tooling [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48M68 Sub-Spindle External Chucking Mode [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48M69 Sub-Spindle Internal Chucking Mode [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48M70 Orient Commands to Sub-Spindle [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49M71 Orient Commands to Main Spindle [Option]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49M72 Chamfer OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49M73 Chamfer ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49M76 Sub-Spindle Drive OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49M77 Sub-Spindle Drive Low Torque [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49M78 Sub-Spindle Drive Normal Torque [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49M80 Check Part Missing [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49M81 Check Part Present [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49M82 E Axis Torque Control Mode ON (Tailstock Programming) . . . . . . . . 1-50M83 E Axis Position Control Mode ON (Tailstock Programming) . . . . . . . 1-50M87 Tailstock Brake ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50M88 Tailstock Brake OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50M90 Part Probe ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50M97 Part Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50M98 Subprogram Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50M99 Subprogram End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50M200 Main Spindle Brake ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51M201 Main Spindle Brake OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51M202 Sub-Spindle Brake ON [Option]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51M203 Sub-Spindle Brake OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51M206 Disable Main Spindle Draw Bar Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51M207 Enable Main Spindle Draw Bar Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51M208 Disable Sub-Spindle Draw Bar Check [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51M209 Enable Sub-Spindle Draw Bar Check [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51M215 Thru-Spindle Coolant ON, Sub-Spindle [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52M216 Thru-Spindle Coolant OFF, Sub-Spindle [Option]. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52M221 Part Catcher Slide Extend [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52M222 Part Catcher Slide Retract [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52M223 Sub-Spindle Contouring Mode ON [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52M224 Sub-Spindle Contouring Mode OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52M225 Sub-Spindle Part Catcher Arm Rotate Out [Option]. . . . . . . . . . . 1-53M226 Sub-Spindle Part Catcher Arm Rotate In [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53M227 Sub-Spindle Part Catcher Gripper Close [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53M228 Sub-Spindle Part Catcher Gripper Open [Option]. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53M258 Chip Conveyor ON [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53M259 Chip Conveyor OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53M300 Series M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53

Diameter Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54

General Program Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55Main Spindle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55Sub-Spindle Operation [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56

iv M-504A

CHAPTER 2 - TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Tool Orientation Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Activating Tool Nose Radius Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Entering and Exiting the Workpiece with Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active . . 2-7

Switching G41/G42 Code with Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active . . . . . . . 2-8

Axis Reversals with Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Modes in Which Tool Nose Radius Compensation is Not Performed. . . . . . . . . 2-10

Multiple Repetitive Cycles with Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active . . . . . . . 2-10

Canned Cycles with Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11G90 Canned Turning Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11G94 Canned Facing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Tool Moved Away from the Workpiece with Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active . 2-12

Tool Nose Radius Compensation Related Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Deactivating Tool Nose Radius Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Tool Nose Radius Compensation Programming Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

CHAPTER 3 - LINEAR AND CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION

Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Absolute and Incremental Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Linear Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Insert Chamfer or Corner Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Insert Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Insert Corner Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Alarm Messages for Insert Chamfer/Insert Corner Radius . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Circular Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6G02 Clockwise Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6G03 Counter-Clockwise Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Programming Notes for Circular Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

CHAPTER 4 - WORK SHIFT AND TOOL OFFSETS

Work Shift. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Macro Variable Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storing Work Shift Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Loading the Macro Variables from the Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Loading a Work Shift Offset from the Macro Variable Registers . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Tooling and Tool Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Tooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Top Plate Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Left Hand/Right Hand Tooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Tool Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Tool Nose Radius Value and Orientation Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Storing Tool Offsets from the Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Activating Tool Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Canceling Tool Offsets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

M-504A v

CHAPTER 5 - WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM

How the Control Positions the Slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Rectangular Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Coordinate System Reference Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Machine Zero Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Turret Axis Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Turret Reference Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Sub-Spindle or Tailstock Axis Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Sub-Spindle or Tailstock Reference Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Position Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Machine Position Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Absolute Position Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

CHAPTER 6 - MACHINING CYCLES

G90 Canned Turning Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Example 1: G90 Straight Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Example 2: G90 Taper Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

G71/G70 Automatic Multiple Repetitive Rough and Finish Turning. . . . . . . . . . 6-4G71/G70 Standard Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Example 3: G71/G70 Standard Turning Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5G71 Standard Turning Programming Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

G71/G70 Pocket Turning [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Example 4: G71/G70 Pocket Turning Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9G71 Pocket Turning Programming Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

G94 Canned Facing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Example 5: G94 Straight Facing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Example 6: G94 Taper Facing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

G72/G70 Automatic Multiple Repetitive Rough and Finish Facing . . . . . . . . . . 6-14Example 7: G72/G70 Facing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14G72 Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

G73/G70 Automatic Rough and Finish Pattern Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18Example 8: G73/G70 Pattern Repeat Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18G73 Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

G70 Automatic Finishing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22G70 Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

Automatic Drilling Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23G74 Constant Depth Increment Automatic Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

Block Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23Q Word Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25G74 Automatic Drilling Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

Variable Depth Increment Automatic Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27Block Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27Data Word Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27Positioning the Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

Main Spindle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29Sub-Spindle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

Calculating the Drill Pass Increments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29Macro 9136 without Optional Z Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

Sample Part Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30Example 1: Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30Example 2: Sub-Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31

vi M-504A

Macro 9136 with Optional Z Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32Main Spindle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32Sub-Spindle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32Sample Part Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32Example 3: Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33Example 4: Sub-Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34

G75 Automatic Grooving Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35Block Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35P and Q Word Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36Tool Movement Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36G75 Automatic Grooving Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38

Polygon Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40Spindle Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40

Program Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40Manual Data Input Keyboard Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40

G Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41Block Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41Crowning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42Selecting the Cutter and Speed Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43Sample Program Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

Main Spindle Program Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44Sub-Spindle Program Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45

Canceling Polygon Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45

CHAPTER 7 - THREADING CYCLES

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Single Block Threadcutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Establishing a Start Point for Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

G32 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Example 1: G32 Straight Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Example 2: G32 Tapered Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

G92 Canned Threading Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Example 3: G92 Straight Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Example 4: G92 Tapered Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Plunge Infeed Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Compound Infeed Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

G76 Automatic Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Block Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Example 5: G76 Straight Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Example 6: G76 Tapered Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13G76 Parameter Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14G76 Execution Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15G76 Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

G34 Variable Lead Threadcutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

Left-Hand Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Tapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19Sample Program Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

M-504A vii

Rigid Tapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21Rigid Tapping with Standard Tooling (Non-Live Tooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

Program Formats for Standard Tooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22Turret at the Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22Turret at the Sub-Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

Rigid Tapping with Live Tooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23Program Formats for Live Tooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

End-Working Attachment at the Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23Cross-Working Attachment at the Main Spindle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24End-Working Attachment at the Sub-Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25Cross-Working Attachment at the Sub-Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

Thread Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27Conventional Milling and Climb Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27General Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27Work Plane Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27Internal Thread Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

Variable Definitions and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28Programming Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

Basic Tool Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28Sample Program Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

External Thread Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31Variable Definitions and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31Basic Tool Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

CHAPTER 8 - G80 SERIES CYCLES

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Canceling Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Spindle Orient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

General Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Drilling Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3G83 Face Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Data Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Tool Movement in the G83 Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Single Pass Drilling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Peck Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6High Speed Peck Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

G83 Sample Program Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8G87 Side Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9


Tool Movement in the G87 Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Single Pass Drilling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Peck Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12High Speed Peck Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

G87 Sample Program Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

viii M-504A

Tapping Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15G84 Right-Hand Face Tapping Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15


Tool Movement in the G84 Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17G84 Sample Program Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

G88 Right-Hand Side Tapping Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19Data Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19


Boring Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23G85 Face Boring Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23



G89 Side Boring Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27Data Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27


CHAPTER 9 - MISCELLANEOUS

Constant Surface Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Subprogram Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Safe Index Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Main Spindle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Sub-Spindle Operation [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Subprogram Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Main Spindle Safe Index Subprogram O1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Sub-Spindle Safe Index Subprogram O2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Subprogram Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Main Spindle Safe Index Subprogram O1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Sub-Spindle Safe Index Subprogram O2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Hardinge Permanent Macro Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Macro 9112: Safe Tool Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Macro 9136: Variable Depth Increment Automatic Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . 9-10Macro 9150: Collet Dwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Recommended Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Setting the Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

M-504A ix

Tailstock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Data Word Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Tailstock Programming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Example 1: Workpiece Held in Collet/Chuck, Live Center in Tailstock . . . . . 9-14Example 2: Machining Between Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Tailstock Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Sub-Spindle Part Catcher [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17M Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Programming Sequence for Unloading a Workpiece. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

English / Metric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Spare M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

CHAPTER 10 - TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Tool Life Measurement Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1Number of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1Amount of Machining Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Tool Life Management Program Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Bar Feed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Tool Life Management Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Program Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Data Word Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

P Word - Tool Group Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4L Word - Tool Life Value Data Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4T Word - Turret Station and Offset Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Sample Tool Life Management Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Part Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Tool Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Sample Part Program Structure using Tool Life Management . . . . . . . . . 10-6Combining Tool Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

x M-504A

CHAPTER 11 - LIVE TOOLING AND SPINDLE ORIENT

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Live Tooling M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Determining Rotational Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

C Axis Spindle Orient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4Programming C Axis Spindle Orient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

Absolute Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4Incremental Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

B Axis Spindle Orient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5Spindle Orient M Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5Programming B Axis Spindle Orient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

Direction of Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Determining Spindle Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Live Tooling Programming Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7Using C Axis Spindle Orient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7Using B Axis Spindle Orient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Deactivating Live Tooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Live Tooling Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Sample Live Tooling Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10Tool Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10Sample Program using C Axis Spindle Orient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

CHAPTER 12 - POLAR AND CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION

Data Word Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Polar Coordinate Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

Main Spindle Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3Sub-Spindle Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3Defining X, C, and A Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

Polar Coordinate Interpolation Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5Program Format for Polar Coordinate Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6Tool Nose Radius Compensation and Circular Interpolation used withG112 Polar Coordinate Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7

Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7Sub-Spindle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8

Program Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9Example 1: Square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10Example 2: Hexagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12Example 3: Triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14Example 4: Tongue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16Example 5: Radius Diamond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18

Cylindrical Interpolation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20Program Format for Cylindrical Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21Cylindrical Interpolation Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22Tool Nose Radius Compensation and Circular Interpolation used withG107 Cylindrical Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23


M-504A xi

Programming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25Example 6: Lettering on Part Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25Example 7: Rectangle Etched on Part Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27Example 8: Rectangle with Corner Radius. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29Example 9: Worm Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31

C Axis Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33

CHAPTER 13 - BLUEPRINT PROGRAMMING

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Angle Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Blueprint Programming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2Example 1: Two Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3Example 2: Three Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Example 3: Three Points with a Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6Example 4: Three Points with a Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8Example 5: Four Points with Two Radii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10Example 6: Four Points with Two Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13Example 7: Four Points with One Radius and Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16Example 8: Four Points with One Chamfer and Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Blueprint Programming Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22

Blueprint Programming Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23

CHAPTER 14 - SUB-SPINDLE [Option]

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Travel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Programming Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2E Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

E Axis Position Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2X/U Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Z/W Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3


Sub-Spindle / Tool Holder Clearance Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

Sub-Spindle G Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5G02 / G03 Circular Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5G41 / G42 Tool Nose Radius Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Sub-Spindle M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6M07 Sub-Spindle Phase Synchronization with Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6M32 Sub-Spindle Synchronization with Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6M33 Sub-Spindle Forward. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7M34 Sub-Spindle Reverse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7M35 Sub-Spindle Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7M46 Sub-Spindle Air Blast ON [Option]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7M47 Sub-Spindle Air Blast OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7M56 Sub-Spindle Collet / Chuck Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7M57 Sub-Spindle Collet / Chuck Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7

xii M-504A

M62 Activate C Axis Spindle Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7M63 Cancel C Axis Spindle Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7M68 External Chucking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8M69 Internal Chucking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8M76 Sub-Spindle Drive OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8M77 Sub-Spindle Drive Low Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8M78 Sub-Spindle Drive Normal Torque. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8M215 Thru-Spindle Coolant ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8M216 Thru-Spindle Coolant OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8

Sub-Spindle Work Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9

Tool Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10Tool Geometry Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10Tool Wear Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10

X Axis Tool Wear Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10Z Axis Tool Wear Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10

Spindle Synchronization Sample Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11Sample Program using Standard Collets or Pull Back Systems . . . . . . . . . 14-11Sample Program using Dead Length Collets or Chucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12

Workpiece Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13Transferring from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14

Bar Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14Spindle Clearance Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14Dead Length Collet Not Installed in Sub-Spindle Collet . . . . . . . . . . 14-15Dead Length Collet Installed in Sub-Spindle Collet . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17

Slug Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18Transferring from Sub-Spindle to Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20

Sub-Spindle Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22Basic Sequence of Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23Sub-Spindle Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26

CHAPTER 15 - BASIC Y AXIS PROGRAMMING

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Y Axis Programming Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2Main Spindle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2Sub-Spindle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3

Machining on the Diameter of the Workpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4Sample Program 1 - Drilling Offset Holes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4

Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4Sample Program 2 - Milling a Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6

G Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6

Machining the End of the Workpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8Sample Program 3 - Drilling Offset Holes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8

Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8Sample Program 4 - Milling a Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10

G Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10

M-504A xiii

APPENDIX ONE

Turret Travel SpecificationsX and Z Axes

T-42 LatheBMT 45 Turret Top Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-1Hardinge Turret Top Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-2

T-51 and T-65 LathesBMT 55 Turret Top Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-3Hardinge Turret Top Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-4

Y Axis [Option]T-42 Lathe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-5T-51 and T-65 Lathes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-6

Tailstock Travel SpecificationsT-42 Lathe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-7T-51 and T-65 Lathes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-7

Sub-Spindle Travel SpecificationsT-42 Lathe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-8T-51 and T-65 Lathes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-8

Work EnvelopesT-42 Lathe

Equipped with Tailstock and BMT 45 Turret Top Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-9Equipped with Tailstock and Hardinge Turret Top Plate . . . . . . . . . . . A1-10Equipped with Sub-Spindle and BMT 45 Turret Top Plate . . . . . . . . . . A1-11Equipped with Sub-Spindle and Hardinge Turret Top Plate . . . . . . . . . . A1-12

T-51 and T-65 LathesEquipped with Tailstock and BMT 55 Turret Top Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-13Equipped with Tailstock and Hardinge Turret Top Plate . . . . . . . . . . . A1-14Equipped with Sub-Spindle and BMT 55 Turret Top Plate . . . . . . . . . . A1-15Equipped with Sub-Spindle and Hardinge Turret Top Plate . . . . . . . . . . A1-16

Turret Top Plate Distance to WaycoverT-42 Lathe

BMT 45 Turret Top Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-17Hardinge Turret Top Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-18

T-51 and T-65 LathesBMT 55 Turret Top Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-19Hardinge Turret Top Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-20

Sample Tooling LayoutsT-42 Lathe

BMT 45 Turret Top Plate with Static and Live Tooling . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-21Hardinge Turret Top Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-22

T-51 and T-65 LathesBMT 55 Turret Top Plate with Static and Live Tooling . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-23Hardinge Turret Top Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-24

xiv M-504A

Spindle Power and Torque CurvesMain Spindle

T-42 and T-42 Big-Bore Lathes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-25T-51 Lathe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-26T-65 Lathe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-27

Sub-Spindle (All Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-28Live Tooling

T-42 Lathe with BMT 45 Turret Top Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-29T-51 and T-65 Lathes with BMT 55 Turret Top Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-30

APPENDIX TWO

G Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-1

M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-3

DOCUMENT REVISION RECORD

M-504A xv

- NOTES -

xvi M-504A

OFFICES

Global Headquarters

United States Hardinge Inc.One Hardinge DriveElmira, NY 14902-1507 USATelephone: 607-734-2281web site: www.hardinge.com

Hardinge Subsidiaries

England Jones & Shipman Hardinge Ltd.Murrayfield RoadLeicesterLE3 1UW EnglandTelephone: +44 (0)116 2013000website: www.hardinge.co.ukemail: [email protected]: www.jonesshipman.comemail: [email protected]

Germany Hardinge GmbHFichtenhain A 13 cD-47807 KrefeldGermanyTelephone: (49) 2151 496490

Switzerland L. Kellenberger & Co. AGHeiligkreuzstrasse 28PostfachCh-9009 St. GallenSwitzerlandTelephone: 41 071 242 91 11website: www.kellenberger.netemail: [email protected]

China Hardinge Machine (Shanghai) Co. Ltd.Hardinge China LimitedNo.1388 East Kang Qiao RoadPudong , Shanghai 201319Telephone : 0086 21 38108686web site: www.hardinge.com.cn

Taiwan Hardinge Taiwan Precision Machinery Ltd.4 Tzu Chiang 3rd RoadNan Tou City540 Taiwan, R.O.C.Telephone: 886-49-226-0536

M-504A xvii

MACHINE DESCRIPTIONAND INTENDED USE

Applicable Machines: T-42, T-51, and T-65 Lathes

These lathes are numerically controlled machine tools designed to shape cold metal by the appli-cation of a cutting tool and rotating workpiece capable of performing two or more machining pro-cesses (e.g. turning, facing, drilling, grooving and boring) at one set-up of a workpiece andincorporating the following features:

• Select and change tools from a turret.

• Change the position of the turret relative to the spindle clamped workpiece.

• Select and apply spindle speeds and axis feeds.

• Control auxiliary services (e.g. coolant flow).

• Tailstock provides added support when machining long parts and reduces part deflection.

• Optional sub-spindle provides capability of back side tuning.

• Optional live tooling provides milling capabilities.

These lathes are designed to machine non-hazardous metals only.

Non-hazardous materials such as Tools Steels, Aluminum, and Brass may be machined.

DO NOT machine any flammable, explosive, toxic, or radioactive material.

DO NOT machine any material that produces a hazardous residue, dust, or gas.

DO NOT use any flammable, explosive, or toxic cutting fluids.

In all cases, if in doubt about the content of the material that you wish to machine, contact the mate-rial supplier.

MACHINE ELECTRICAL OPERATING RANGE

Ambient Temperature Range: +5° C to +40° C.

Humidity Range: Up to 40% at a maximum temperature of +40° C.

Altitude: Up to 1000 meters above sea level (minimum)

xviii M-504A

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

CHEMICAL WARNING

Current laws and regulations require that information regarding chemicals used withthis equipment be supplied to you. Refer to the applicable section of the MaterialSafety Data Sheets supplied with your machine when handling, storing, or disposingof chemicals.

BAR FEED WARNING

Machine should only be used with a bar feed approved by Hardinge Inc.

SPINDLE TOOLING WARNINGS

Hardinge HQC (Quick-Change) collets MUST NOT be used in applications wherethe spindle is rotating without a bar or workpiece in the collet. Rotating the spindlewithout a bar or workpiece in the collet can result in the collet head being expelledfrom the spindle.

DO NOT exceed the maximum jaw chuck size, as specified in the Operator's Manual(M-505).

DO NOT exceed the maximum draw bar force rating of the jaw chuck.DO NOT exceed the maximum rpm rating of the jaw chuck.Refer to the manual supplied with the jaw chuck.

Failure to comply with these warnings can result in serious injury or death.

ENTRAPMENT WARNING

DO NOT climb into the machine guard! You may become entrapped.

Due to the compact size of the Hardinge lathes and the provision of side accessdoors to allow servicing of the machine, it is not necessary to climb into the machineguard.

In the unlikely event that this warning is ignored and the main access door is closed,the door will latch shut and cannot be opened from the inside. Another person mustrelease the door lock. Refer to the Operator's Manual (M-505) for information on re-leasing the door lock.

MAIN COOLANT GUARD WARNING

The guards provided with the machine are intended to minimize the risks ofworkpiece ejection and not to eliminate them completely.

INTERLOCKED ACCESS PANEL CAUTION

Opening an interlocked access panel while the machine is cutting a part will forcethe control into a dual check speed or position alarm, which can destroy theworkpiece and/or tooling.

M-504A xix

TURRET TOP PLATE ALIGNMENT CAUTION (Live Tool Machines Only)

Check the alignment of the turret top plate with the live tool drive shaft in the eventthat any of the following events have occurred:

• Static tool breakage

• Live tool breakage

• Live tool torque limiter trip

• Machine crash

Refer to the maintenance manual (M-506) for information on checking the alignmentof the turret top plate.

HIGH PRESSURE COOLANT CAUTION

Do not use a high pressure coolant system that can exceed 1000 psi [69 bar]. Dam-age to the machine will result.

xx M-504A

SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONS

Your Hardinge machine is designed and built for maximum ease and safety of operation. However,some previously accepted shop practices may not reflect current safety regulations and procedures,and should be re-examined to insure compliance with the current safety and health standards.

Hardinge Inc. recommends that all shop supervisors, maintenance personnel, and machine tooloperators be advised of the importance of safe maintenance, setup, and operation of Hardinge equip-ment. Our recommendations are described below. READ THESE SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONSBEFORE PROCEEDING ANY FURTHER.

Read the appropriate manual or instructions before attempting operation or maintenance of themachine. Make certain that you understand all instructions.

Don’t allow the operation or repair of equipment by untrained personnel.

Consult your supervisor when in doubt as to the correct way to do a job.

Wear safety glasses and proper foot protection at all times. When necessary, wear respirator,helmet, gloves, and ear muffs or plugs.

Don’t operate equipment unless proper maintenance has been regularly performed and theequipment is known to be in good working order.

Warning or instruction tags are mounted on the machine for your safety and information. Do notremove them. If a tag comes off, re-attach the tag at the original position.

Replace any warning or instruction tag if it becomes unreadable. Refer to the maintenancemanual for tag identification.

Don’t alter the machine to bypass any interlock, overload, disconnect, or other safety device.

Don’t operate equipment if unusual or excessive heat, noise, smoke, or vibration occurs. Reportany excessive or unusual vibration, sounds, smoke, or heat as well as any damaged parts.

Reduce spindle speed if vibration occurs. Bar stock straightness will have an effect on vibrationand balance of the spindle system.

Machining an unbalanced workpiece may create an ejection hazard. Minimize the risk by coun-ter-balancing or machining at reduced speeds.

Never operate the machine spindle without a work-holding device if the draw tube is in the spin-dle.

Tighten all draw tube screws before beginning spindle operation.

Make certain that the equipment is properly grounded. Consult National Electric Code and alllocal codes.

Disconnect main electrical power before attempting repair or maintenance.

M-504A xxi

Allow only authorized personnel to have access to enclosures containing electrical equipment.

Don’t reach into any control or power case area unless electrical power is OFF.

Don’t touch electrical equipment when hands are wet or when standing on a wet surface.

Replace blown fuses with fuses of the same size and type as originally furnished.

Ascertain and correct the cause of a control alarm before restarting the machine.

Keep the area around the machine well lighted, dry, and free of obstructions.

Keep chemical and flammable material away from electrical or operating equipment.

Keep chips clear of the work area.

Don’t use a toxic or flammable substance as a solvent cleaner or coolant.

Make certain that proper guarding is in place and that all doors are closed and secured.

To remove or replace the collet closer it is necessary to remove the guard door at the left endof the machine. Make certain that the guard door is in place before starting the machine.

Don’t open guard doors while any machine component is in motion.

Make sure chucks, closers, fixture plates, and all other spindle-mounted work-holding devicesare properly mounted and secured before starting the machine.

Make certain all tools are securely clamped in position before starting the machine.

Remove any loose parts or tools left on machine or in the work area before operating the ma-chine. Always check the machine and work area for loose tools and parts especially after workhas been completed by maintenance personnel.

Remove chuck wrenches before starting the machine.

Before pressing the cycle start push button, make certain that proper functions are pro-grammed and that all controls are set in the desired modes.

Know where all Emergency Stop push buttons are located in case of an emergency.

Check the lubrication oil level and the status of the indicator lights before operating the ma-chine.

Make certain that all guards are in good condition and are functioning properly before operatingthe machine.

Inspect all safety devices and guards to make certain that they are in good condition and arefunctioning properly before the cycle is started.

DO NOT power up the machine until the guard door vision panel has been inspected and deter-mined to be in satisfactory condition. Failure to inspect the vision panel can result in unsafe op-erating conditions.

xxii M-504A

Check the position of the tool top plate before pressing the Cycle Start push button.

Check the position of any load/unload automation before pressing the Cycle Start push button.

Check setup, tooling, and security of the workpiece if the machine has been OFF for any lengthof time.

Dry cycle a new setup to check for programming errors.

Make certain that you are clear of any “pinch point” created by moving slides before starting themachine.

Don’t operate any equipment while any part of the body is in the proximity of a potentially haz-ardous area.

Don’t remove chips with hands. Use a hook or similar device and make certain that all machinemovements have ceased.

Be careful of sharp edges when handling a newly machined workpiece.

Don’t remove or load a workpiece while any part of the machine is in motion.

Don’t operate any machine while wearing rings, watches, jewelry, loose clothing, neckties, orlong hair not contained by a net or shop cap.

Don’t operate any machine while under the influence of drugs and/or alcohol.

Don’t adjust tooling or coolant hoses while the machine is running.

Don’t leave tools, workpieces or other loose items where they can come in contact with a mov-ing component of the machine.

Don’t check finishes or dimensions of workpiece near running spindle or moving slides.

Don’t jog spindle in either direction when checking threads with a thread gauge.

Don’t attempt to brake or slow the machine with hands or any improvised device.

Any machine modification must be reviewed by Hardinge Inc. before implementation.

Use caution around exposed mechanisms and tooling especially when setting up. Be careful ofsharp edges on tools.

Don’t use worn or defective hand tools. Use the proper size and type for the job being per-formed.

Use only a soft-faced hammer on tooling and fixtures.

Don’t use worn or broken tooling on machine.

Make certain that all tool mounting surfaces are clean before mounting tools.

M-504A xxiii

Inspect all chucking devices daily to make certain that they are in good operating condition. Re-place any defective chuck before operating the machine.

Hardinge high speed spindles are balanced to an ISO G1.0 standard. High speed spindles re-quire a work-holding device balanced to G2.5 or better.

Use maximum allowable gripping pressure on the chuck. Consider weight, shape, and balanceof the workpiece. Check the workpiece for distortion.

Use lighter than normal feedrates and depth of cut when machining a workpiece diameter thatis larger than the gripping diameter.

Don’t exceed the rated capacity of the machine or tooling.

Don’t leave the machine unattended while it is operating.

Don’t clean the machine with an air hose.

Keep tote pans a safe distance from the machine. Don’t overfill the tote pans.

Don’t let stock project past the back end of the collet closer or machine spindle without beingadequately covered and properly supported.

Follow each bar feed manufacturer’s guidelines. For performance and safe application, sizeand use feed tube bushings, pushers, and spindle liners according to bar feed information.

Make certain that any bar feed mechanism is properly aligned with the spindle. If the bar feed isa floor-mounted type, it must be securely bolted to the floor.

During high speed applications, the bar stock must be contained within the collet closer and abar feed not be used. Hardinge Inc. recommends using a bar loader for feeding bar stock dur-ing high speed applications. Bar loaders feed the entire piece of bar stock into the spindle; then,the pusher is disengaged from the bar stock.

Unless otherwise noted, all operating and maintenance procedures are to be performed by oneperson. To avoid injury to yourself and others, be sure that all personnel are clear of the ma-chine when opening or closing the coolant guard door and any access covers.

Because there are so many things that either cannot be done or must not be done when usingthe machine, that is impossible to cover all of them in the documentation. Assume that some-thing is impossible unless the manual specifically states that it can be done.

FOR YOUR PROTECTION - WORK SAFELY

xxiv M-504A

- NOTES -

M-504A xxv

- NOTES -

xxvi M-504A

CHAPTER 1 - PART PROGRAM LANGUAGE

INTRODUCTION

A part program is an ordered set of instructions which define slide and spindle motion as well asauxiliary functions. These instructions are written in a part program language consisting of a series ofdata blocks. Each data block contains adequate information for the machine tool to perform one ormore machine functions.

A data block consists of one or more data words, which are treated together as a unit. Each dataword consists of a word address followed by a numerical value. A word address is a letter which speci-fies the meaning of the data word.

The value of the number that follows the word address has a format which specifies the number ofcharacters the word contains as well as the range these values must fall within. These formats arelisted in the tables beginning on page 1-2.

PROGRAMMING THE CONTROL

Programming Hardinge lathes requires an understanding of the machine, tooling, and control.

Extreme care must be exercised when writing a part program since all machine movements will beexecuted as programmed. A miscalculation or selection of an incorrect function can result in anincorrect motion.

The basic unit for part program input is the “BLOCK”. Normally, one line or block of information rep-resents one describable operation or several describable operations that are independent of eachother. (For example, axis movement and spindle speed changes are independent operations whichmay be programmed in the same block.) A block may contain any or all of the following:

1. Slash code (/)

2. Sequence number (N Function)

3. Preparatory Functions (G Functions)

4. Axis Movement Instructions (E, X or U, Y or V, and Z or W Functions)

5. Feedrate Command (F Function)

6. Spindle Speed Command (S Function)

7. Turret Station (T Function)

8. Miscellaneous Functions (M Functions)

A block MUST contain a valid End of Block character.

M-504A 1-1

DATA WORD FORMATS AND MINIMUM / MAXIMUM VALUES

T-42 Lathes

- NOTE -

Refer to the table definitions listed on page 1-3.

Function(Word)

PreparatoryCommands

INCH MODE (G20) METRIC MODE (G21)

Format Minimum Maximum Format Minimum Maximum

O (Program #)

N (Block #)

G (Command)

M (Command)

P (Block #)

P (Dwell)

Q (Block #)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

O4

N4

G3

M3

P4

P8

Q4

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

8999

9999

999

899

9999

99999999

9999

O4

N4

G3

M3

P4

P8

Q4

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

8999

9999

999

899

9999

99999999

9999

E (Coordinate)1

E (Coordinate)2

E (Coordinate)3

E (Coordinate)4

U (Coordinate)

U (Dwell)

V (Coordinate)

W (Coordinate)

X (Coordinate)5

X (Coordinate)6

X (Dwell)

Y (Coordinate)7

Z (Coordinate)8

Z (Coordinate)9

Z (Coordinate)10

Z (Coordinate)11

G00, G01

G00, G01

G00, G01

G00, G01

G00, G01, G02, G03

G04

G00, G01, G02, G03

G00, G01, G02, G03

G00, G01, G02, G03

G00, G01, G02, G03

G04

G00, G01, G02, G03

G00, G01, G02, G03

G00, G01, G02, G03

G00, G01, G02, G03

G00, G01, G02, G03

E±2.5

E±2.5

E±2.5

E±2.5

U±2.5

U5.3

V±2.5

W±2.5

X±2.5

X±2.5

X5.3

Y±1.5

Z±2.5

Z±2.5

Z±2.5

Z±2.5

0.00001

0.00001

0.00001

0.00001

0.00001

0.001

0.00001

0.00001

0.00001

0.00001

0.001

0.00001

0.00001

0.00001

0.00001

0.00001

16.50500

15.55500

19.30500

18.35500

-

99999.999

-

-

16.53600

14.89600

99999.999

2.25100

16.50500

15.55500

14.86500

13.91500

E±3.4

E±3.4

E±3.4

E±3.4

U±3.4

U5.3

V±3.4

W±3.4

X±3.4

X±3.4

X5.3

Y±2.4

Z±3.4

Z±3.4

Z±3.4

Z±3.4

0.0001

0.0001

0.0001

0.0001

0.0001

0.001

0.0001

0.0001

0.0001

0.0001

0.001

0.0001

0.0001

0.0001

0.0001

0.0001

419.2270

395.0970

490.3470

466.2170

-

99999.999

-

-

420.0144

378.3584

99999.999

57.1754

419.2270

395.0970

377.5710

353.4410

X (Tool Offset)

X (Wear Offset)

X (Zero Offset)

Y (Tool Offset)7

Y (Wear Offset)7

Z (Tool Offset)

Z (Wear Offset)

Z (Zero Offset)

G10

G10

G10

G10

G10

G10

G10

G10

X±2.5

X±0.5

X±2.5

Y±2.5

Y±0.5

Z±2.5

Z±0.5

Z±2.5

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

-

0.50000

-

-

0.50000

-

0.50000

-

X±3.4

X±2.4

X±3.4

Y±3.4

Y±2.4

Z±3.4

Z±2.4

Z±3.4

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

-

12.7000

-

-

12.7000

-

12.7000

-

I (Circ. Interp.)

J (Circ. Interp.)

K (Circ. Interp.)

K (Lead Change)

G02, G03

G02, G03

G02, G03

G34

I±3.5

J 3.5

K±3.5

K±1.6

0.

0.

0.

0.000001

999.99999

999.99999

999.99999

9.999999

I±4.4

J 4.4

K±4.4

K±3.4

0.

0.

0.

0.0001

9999.9999

9999.9999

9999.9999

500.0000

F (per min)

F (per rev)

F (Thread Lead)

G98

G99

G32, G33, G34

F3.2

F1.6

F1.6

0.01

0.000001

0.000001

150.00

9.999999

9.999999

F4.1

F3.4

F3.4

1.

0.0001

0.0001

3810.0

500.0000

500.0000

B (Spindle Orient)

C (C-Axis)12, 13

A (C-Axis)14

-

-

-

B3

C±5.3

A±5.3

0.

0.

0.

359

99999.999

99999.999

B3

C±5.3

A±5.3

0.

0.

0.

359

99999.999

99999.999

1-2 M-504A

Function(Word)

PreparatoryCommands



S (Spindle RPM)12

S (Spindle RPM)13

S (Spindle RPM)14

S (Live Tooling)15

S (Surface Speed)

G50, G97

G50, G97

G50, G97

G97

G96

S4

S4

S4

S4

S4

0

0

0

0

1

6000

5000

6000

8000

9999

S4

S4

S4

S4

S4

0

0

0

0

1

6000

5000

6000

8000

9999

T (Tool Function)5

T (Tool Function)6

-

-

T4

T4

0

0

3299

1299

T4

T4

0

0

3299

1299

,A (Angle)

,C (Chamfer)

R (Radius)

,R (Radius)

G00, G01

G01

G02, G03

G01

,A3.5

,C2.5

R2.5

,R2.5

0.00001

0.00001

-

0.00001

359.99999

-

-

-

,A3.4

,C3.4

R3.4

,R3.4

0.0001

0.0001

-

0.0001

359.0000

-

-

-

TABLE DEFINITIONS, T-42 LATHE

1. Machine with sub-spindle and 16C main spindle.

2. Machine with sub-spindle and 20C main spindle.

3. Machine with tailstock and 16C main spindle.

4. Machine with tailstock and 20C main spindle.

5. BMT 45 turret top plate.

6. Hardinge turret top plate.

7. Optional Y axis.

8. Machine with BMT 45 turret top plate and 16C main spindle.

9. Machine with BMT 45 turret top plate and 20C main spindle.

10. Machine with Hardinge turret top plate and 16C main spindle.

11. Machine with Hardinge turret top plate and 20C main spindle.

12. 16C main spindle.

13. 20C main spindle.

14. Optional sub-spindle.

15. Live tooling (standard feature with BMT 45 turret top plate).

M-504A 1-3

T-51 and T-65 Lathes

- NOTE -

Refer to the table definitions listed on page 1-5.

Function(Word)

PreparatoryCommands



O (Program #)

N (Block #)

G (Command)

M (Command)

P (Block #)

P (Dwell)

Q (Block #)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

O4

N4

G3

M3

P4

P8

Q4

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

8999

9999

999

899

9999

99999999

9999

O4

N4

G3

M3

P4

P8

Q4

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

8999

9999

999

899

9999

99999999

9999

E (Coordinate)1

E (Coordinate)2

U (Coordinate)

U (Dwell)

V (Coordinate)

W (Coordinate)

X (Coordinate)3

X (Coordinate)4

X (Dwell)

Y (Coordinate)5

Z (Coordinate)3

Z (Coordinate)4

G00, G01

G00, G01

G00, G01, G02, G03

G04

G00, G01, G02, G03

G00, G01, G02, G03

G00, G01, G02, G03

G00, G01, G02, G03

G04

G00, G01, G02, G03

G00, G01, G02, G03

G00, G01, G02, G03

E±2.5

E±2.5

U±2.5

U5.3

V±2.5

W±2.5

X±2.5

X±2.5

X5.3

Y±1.5

Z±2.5

Z±2.5

0.00001

0.00001

0.00001

0.001

0.00001

0.00001

0.00001

0.00001

0.001

0.00001

0.00001

0.00001

25.7500

29.40000

-

99999.999

-

-

20.02000

17.77000

99999.999

2.50000

25.50000

23.86000

E±3.4

E±3.4

U±3.4

U5.3

V±3.4

W±3.4

X±3.4

X±3.4

X5.3

Y±2.4

Z±3.4

Z±3.4

0.0001

0.0001

0.0001

0.001

0.0001

0.0001

0.0001

0.0001

0.001

0.0001

0.0001

0.0001

654.0500

746.760

-

99999.999

-

-

508.5080

451.3580

99999.999

63.5000

647.7000

606.0440

X (Tool Offset)

X (Wear Offset)

X (Zero Offset)

Y (Tool Offset)5

Y (Wear Offset)5

Z (Tool Offset)

Z (Wear Offset)

Z (Zero Offset)

G10

G10

G10

G10

G10

G10

G10

G10

X±2.5

X±0.5

X±2.5

Y±2.5

Y±0.5

Z±2.5

Z±0.5

Z±2.5

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

-

0.50000

-

-

0.50000

-

0.50000

-

X±3.4

X±2.4

X±3.4

Y±3.4

Y±2.4

Z±3.4

Z±2.4

Z±3.4

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

-

12.7000

-

-

12.7000

-

12.7000

-

I (Circ. Interp.)

J (Circ. Interp.)

K (Circ. Interp.)

K (Lead Change)

G02, G03

G02, G03

G02, G03

G34

I±3.5

J 3.5

K±3.5

K±1.6

0.

0.

0.

0.000001

999.99999

999.99999

999.99999

9.999999

I±4.4

J 4.4

K±4.4

K±3.4

0.

0.

0.

0.0001

9999.9999

9999.9999

9999.9999

500.0000

F (per min)

F (per rev)

F (Thread Lead)

G98

G99

G32, G33, G34

F3.2

F1.6

F1.6

0.01

0.000001

0.000001

150.00

9.999999

9.999999

F5.0

F3.4

F3.4

1.

0.0001

0.0001

3810.0

500.0000

500.0000

B (Spindle Orient)

C (C-Axis)6

A (C-Axis)7

-

-

-

B3

C±5.3

A±5.3

0.

0.

0.

359

99999.999

99999.999

B3

C±5.3

A±5.3

0.

0.

0.

359

99999.999

99999.999

S (Spindle RPM)8

S (Spindle RPM)9

S (Spindle RPM)10

S (Live Tooling)11

S (Surface Speed)

G50, G97

G50, G97

G50, G97

G97

G96

S4

S4

S4

S4

S4

0

0

0

0

1

5000

4000

5000

8000

9999

S4

S4

S4

S4

S4

0

0

0

0

1

5000

4000

5000

8000

9999

1-4 M-504A

Function(Word)

PreparatoryCommands



T (Tool Function)3

T (Tool Function)4

-

-

T4

T4

0

0

2499

1299

T4

T4

0

0

2499

1299

,A (Angle)

,C (Chamfer)

R (Radius)

,R (Radius)

G00, G01

G01

G02, G03

G01

,A3.5

,C2.5

R2.5

,R2.5

0.00001

0.00001

-

0.00001

359.99999

-

-

-

,A3.4

,C3.4

R3.4

,R3.4

0.0001

0.0001

-

0.0001

359.0000

-

-

-

TABLE DEFINITIONS, T-51 AND T-65 LATHES

1. Machine with sub-spindle.

2. Machine with tailstock.

3. Machine with BMT 55 turret top plate.

4. Machine with Hardinge turret top plate.

5. Optional Y axis.

6. Main spindle.


8. Main spindle, T-51 lathe.

9. Main spindle, T-65 lathe.


11. Live tooling (standard feature with BMT 55 turret top plate).

M-504A 1-5

AXIS DEFINITIONS

Refer to Figures 1.1 and 1.2.

A AXIS (Optional Sub-Spindle)

Radial motion around the spindle centerline.

C AXIS (Main Spindle)

Radial motion around the spindle centerline.

E AXIS (Tailstock / Optional Sub-Spindle)

Linear motion parallel to the spindle centerline and parallel to the machine bed.

X AXIS (Machine Cross Slide)

Linear motion parallel to the spindle face and parallel to the machine bed.

Y AXIS (Turret) [Option]

Linear turret motion parallel to the spindle face and perpendicular to the machine bed.

Z AXIS (Machine Carriage)

Linear motion parallel to the spindle centerline and parallel to the machine bed.

1-6 M-504A

Figure 1.1 - E, X, and Z Axis Definitions

TI5662A

Turret

Main SpindleTailstock

orSub-Spindle

+X

-X

+Z-Z

+E-E

-C +C +A -A

Sub-Spindle Viewedfrom Main Spindle

Main Spindle Viewedfrom Tailstock/Sub-Spindle

M-504A 1-7

Figure 1.2 - X and Y Axis Definitions(Viewed from the Tailstock/Sub-Spindle End of the Machine)

+X

TI5660

-X

+Y

-Y

Mac

hine

Bed

SpindleCenterline

SPECIAL PROGRAMMING CHARACTERS

An End of Record character (%) should be the first and last character in a program which is to be up-loaded to the machine control through the RS-232 serial port. If multiple programs are to be loadedfrom a single punched tape, punch the End of Record character after the last program on the tape. TheEnd of Record character will be followed by an End of Block character.

The End of Block character must be used after the last character in each data block of a part pro-gram that is to be loaded into the memory of the control. If the End of Block character is omitted from apart program data block, the control will consider the next block to be part of the block missing the Endof Block. This may cause undesirable machine behavior.

The End of Block character is a Carriage Return character in EIA (RS-224-B) format and a LineFeed character in ASCII (ISO) (RS-358-B) format. When programming from the keyboard, use theEnd of Block key. This character will be displayed as a semicolon (;) on the control display screen.

Operator messages and comments can be included in a part program loaded from tape, providedthey are enclosed in parentheses. Any legal ASCII character can be used when writing a comment.

The Block Skip (/) code inserted at the beginning of a data block will cause that block of data to beignored by the control when Block Skip is activated by the machine operator. When Block Skip is notactive, the data block will be executed.

PROGRAMMING FORMAT

Programs to be executed by the control consist of alpha-numeric words that the control recognizesas specific commands. These words consist of one letter addresses and the designated numbers forthat address. Words within a block may follow any convenient sequence. However, Hardinge recom-mends the following sequence:

/, N, G, X, Z, U, W, B, C, I, J, K, P, Q, R, A, F, S, T, M

The control system is configured to provide .00001 inch [.0001 mm] programming resolution.

This causes specific data word formats to be applied to the associated values. These formats arelisted in the tables beginning on page 1-2. These numbers indicate the maximum number of places al-lowed to the right and left of the decimal point.

A plus sign need not be entered since the control assumes plus if no sign is entered. A minus signMUST be programmed, if needed.

Refer to page 1-55 for the general program formats. The safe index subprograms shown in the pro-gram formats are described in Chapter 9 of this manual.

1-8 M-504A

PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE

Off-Line Programming Sequence

1. Enter an End of Record character (%).

2. Enter program ID code and program number. All programs are identified by the letter “O” infront of the part program ID number and may have 4 place ID numbers (1 - 8999). Programnumbers 9000 through 9999 are reserved for macro programs. The program ID code andprogram number are followed by a valid End of Block character.

3. Enter the program.

4. End of Program command (M30) in the last data block. All data blocks must end with a validEnd of Block character.

5. Enter an End of Record character (%).

Keyboard Programming Sequence

Refer to the operator’s manual (M-505) for information on entering programs from the controlkeyboard.

M-504A 1-9

PROGRAM NUMBER

Part programs stored in the control memory must be assigned a part program number. The pro-gram numbers are used by the control to identify the various programs and subprograms which arestored in the control memory.

The program number MUST be identified by the letter “O” followed by the program identificationnumber. It is not necessary to program the leading zeros as these are automatically inserted by thecontrol, when needed. The program number must be on the first line of the program. It may be pro-grammed on a line by itself or it may be the first entry in the first data block.

The part program numbers range from 1 to 8999. However, the following restrictions must be ob-served when assigning program numbers:

1. Alpha and other miscellaneous characters (such as dashes) are not allowed.

2. Program numbers 9000 through 9999 are reserved for permanent macro programs. Thesenumbers cannot be assigned to other part programs or macros.

- NOTE -

When entering a program from the keyboard, if the program identification number isomitted, the active part program will be edited according to the data entered whenthe Insert key is pressed. If one of the 9000 series permanent macro programs is ac-tive and no program number is entered, the first program data block will be rejectedand the message “Write Protect” will be displayed on the control display screen.

When a tape which does not contain a program identification number is loaded into memory, thecontrol will automatically assign the first programmed sequence number as the program number.

Any attempt to store programs having numbers already stored in program memory will cause themessage “Already Exists” to be displayed on the control display screen. This message indicates thatthe program identification number has already been assigned.

1-10 M-504A

DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING

A decimal point should be used with the following address words: A, C, E, F, I, K, R, U, W, X, and Z.If a decimal point is programmed in a word in which a decimal point is not allowed or if two or more dec-imal points appear in any one data word, an error message will be displayed.

Values with or without decimal points may be commanded in the same data block.

Trailing zeros need not be programmed when using decimal point programming.

If no decimal point is programmed, the control uses the appropriate data word format to insert lead-ing zeros and properly position the decimal point.

Example

In Inch mode, the format for the Z word is ±2.5 . If Z4. is programmed, the control willassume Z4.00000 .

NOTICE

The programmer must make certain all decimal points are correctly positioned toprevent undesirable machine behavior.

This assumed decimal point is an important concept to keep in mind. There can be a great deal ofdifference between values with and without decimal points.

Example

The command “X2.” sends the cross slide to coordinate X2.00000; however, the com-mand “X2" (no decimal point) sends the cross slide to X.00002 . Be sure the decimalpoint is programmed when allowed.

Besides specifying the location of the assumed decimal point, the word address format also indi-cates the maximum number of digits which can appear to the left and right of the decimal point.

M-504A 1-11

DATA WORD DESCRIPTIONS

O WORD

The O word is used as the letter address for part program numbers and must precede the part pro-gram identification number. Refer to “Program Number”, on page 1-10.

N WORD

The N word provides a sequence number consisting of the letter “N” and up to four digits (0000 -9999). It is not required to have a sequence number in any block. When used, they may be placed any-where in the block; however, it is customary to program them as the first word in the block, exceptwhen a Block Delete (/) is programmed. Block Delete codes, when programmed, will be the first char-acter in a block.

The N word does not affect machine operation. However, it does give operators a valuable refer-ence should they wish to relate an operation being performed to the program manuscript.

The numbering sequence can begin with any number, such as N0001. It is recommended that theprogrammer assign sequence numbers in intervals of five or ten so that additional blocks can be in-serted into the program if necessary. This eliminates the necessity of reassigning sequence numbersafter blocks are added to the program. The only exception to this recommendation is that the blockstarting each operation be assigned the number of the turret station to be used for that operation. Forexample, when using turret station #6, N6 will be the block number to start the operation.

Leading zeros may be omitted.

G WORD

The G word is a preparatory command which sets up the control for a specific type of operation. Ithas the word format G3, with a range of 00 to 999. Certain G codes are default codes and are automat-ically activated by the control under the following conditions:

1. Machine Power-up

2. Reading an End of Program Code (M30)

3. Control Reset

4. Emergency Stop

The G codes are of two types:

1. Non-modal G codes are effective only in the block in which they are programmed.

2. Modal G codes remain effective until replaced by another G code in the same group.

The chart in Appendix Two lists the G codes that are used with the control by groups.

Only one G code from each group is permitted in a data block. If more than one G code from a groupis programmed in a data block from the keyboard or tape, the last of the conflicting G codes entered inthe data block will be the active G code.

G codes containing a leading zero may be programmed without the zero.

Example: G01 may be programmed as G1

1-12 M-504A

G00 Positioning(Group 1 G Code)

This positioning command generates linear motion on one or more axes (E, X, Y, or Z) from the cur-rent position to the programmed end points at a rate determined by the Rapid Override switch.

The rapid traverse rates are listed below, as inches per minute [millimeters per minute].

AxisRapid Traverse Rate

T-42 Lathe T-51 and T-65 Lathes

E 1500 [38100] 1500 [38100]

X 945 [24000] 1100 [27940]

Y 236 [6000] 375 [9525]

Z 1200 [30480] 1500 [38100]

- NOTE -

The E axis cannot be commanded incrementally.

Axis motion can be expressed as E, X, Y, and Z for absolute moves or U, V, and W for incrementalmoves.

A programmed feedrate (F Function) in a G00 block is ignored by the control.

When the turret is programmed to move on more than one axis, the axes execute a vectorial moveat a traverse rate that is determined by the rapid traverse rate for each of the programmed axes. Whena G00 positioning move is programmed and the Rapid Override switch is set to 100%, both axes willmove at maximum traverse.

The G00 command is modal. A programmed G00 command will cancel any currently active Group1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G00 command.

G01 Linear Interpolation(Group 1 G Code)

Linear Interpolation generates linear motion on one or more axes (E, X, Y, or Z) from the current po-sition to the programmed end points at a rate specified by a feedrate command in the same block or byan active feedrate from a preceding block. The programmed feedrate is directly affected by theFeedrate Override switch.

- NOTE -

The E axis cannot be commanded incrementally.

Axis motion can be expressed as E, X, Y, and Z for absolute moves or U, V, and W for incrementalmoves. When multiple axes are programmed for a taper cut, the control will compensate the axisfeedrates to produce a vectorial velocity equal to the programmed feedrate. That is, when both axesare programmed, a vectorial move is generated.


M-504A 1-13

G02 Clockwise Arc(Group 1 G Code)

The arc direction is determined by the rotational direction of the cutting tool when looking down-ward at the plan view of the workpiece.

The G02 command is used with I and K words (arc center offset) or R word (radius) to provide thenecessary qualifying dimensions of the arc.


Refer to “Circular Interpolation”, in Chapter 3.

G03 Counter-Clockwise Arc(Group 1 G Code)

The arc direction is determined by the rotational direction of the cutting tool when looking down-ward at the plan view of the workpiece.

The G03 command is used with I and K words (arc center offset) or R word (radius) to provide thenecessary qualifying dimensions of the arc.



G04 Dwell(Group 0 G Code)

A dwell command must be programmed with a X, U, or P word to specify the duration of the dwell inseconds. The range of dwell is .001 to 99999.999 seconds Refer to the tables beginning on page 1-2for data word formats.

The G04 Preparatory Command and its associated X, U, or P word must be programmed togetherin a data block that does not generate axis motion.

- NOTE -

Decimal point programming cannot be used when the P word is used to specify thedwell period. The P word specifies dwell in milliseconds. Leading zero suppressionformat must be used.

DWELL IN SECONDS:

A dwell of 2.5 seconds may be programmed in any of the following ways:

G04 X2.5G04 U2.5G04 P2500

The dwell code is non-modal and does not change the status of any modal condition of the control.Following the dwell, the operating mode reverts to the same status as before the dwell. The previousfeedrate is reinstated.

1-14 M-504A

G10 Offset Value Setting(Group 0 G Code)

The G10 command permits entering the Work Shift Offset and Tool Offsets with the part program oras a separate program instead of entering the offset(s) individually from the Manual Data Inputkeyboard.

When offsets are entered as a separate program, this program must be executed prior to part pro-gram execution to insert the offset values into the offset registers.

As many offsets as needed may be entered from a separate tape. The G10 preparatory commandis non-modal and must be programmed in each offset entry block.

Refer to Chapter 4 for additional information.

G17 Work Plane Selection(Group 16 G Code)

The G17 command is used during C axis programming to select the X,C plane as the active workplane. Refer to Chapter 12 for additional information.


The G18 command is used during C axis programming to select the X,Z plane as the active workplane. Refer to Chapter 12 for additional information.


The G19 command is used during C axis programming to select the Z,C plane as the active workplane. Refer to Chapter 12 for additional information.

G20 Inch Data Input(Group 6 G Code)

- NOTE -

It is recommended that all programs written with inch dimensions have the G20 codeat the beginning of the program to ensure the correct format is active in case thepreviously executed program was in metric mode.

Inch mode allows the programmer to program in inch units. The command is modal and can be can-celed only by a G21 (metric mode) command. Pressing the Reset key has no affect on G20. If G20 isactive when power is turned OFF, it will be active when power is restored. G20 must be programmedin a block by itself.

M-504A 1-15

G21 Metric Data Input(Group 6 G Code)

- NOTE -

It is recommended that all programs written with metric dimensions have the G21code at the beginning of the program to ensure the correct format is active in casethe previously executed program was in inch mode.

Metric mode allows the programmer to program in metric units. The command is modal and can becanceled only by a G20 (inch mode) command. Pressing the Reset key has no affect on G21. If G21 isactive when power is turned OFF, It will be active when power is restored. G21 must be programmedin a block by itself.

G22 Stored Stroke Limit Check ON(Group 9 G Code)

With G22 active, stored stroke limit #2 is active. G22 is active at power-up regardless of whether itwas active when the power was turned OFF. However, a control reset will not return the control to G22if G23 is active when the control reset is performed.

- NOTE -

Stored stroke limit #1 is active even if G22 is inactive.

When parameter 1300, bit 1, is set to “0", the tool is prohibited from entering the area established bythese stored stroke limits.

When parameter 1300, bit 1, is set to “1", the tool is prohibited from exiting the area established bythese stored stroke limits.

G23 Stored Stroke Limit Check OFF(Group 9 G Code)

With G23 active, stored stroke limit #2 is inactive. The tool is free to move within the rectangular ar-eas established by these limits.

- NOTE -

Stored stroke limit #1 is active even if G23 is active.

1-16 M-504A

G28 Return to Reference Position(Group 0 G Code)

NOTICE

Tool offsets and tool nose radius compensation should be canceled BEFORE com-manding G28.

- NOTE -

Refer to the illustrations in Appendix One for the turret reference positions.

The Y axis command is only effective on machines equipped with the optional Y axis feature on theturret.

The G28 command performs an automatic return of the turret to the reference position for one ormore axes. The move can be through an intermediate position or directly to the reference position.The move is performed at rapid traverse for each axis commanded.

Move Directly to the Reference Position:

G28 U0. ; Move the turret to the X axis reference positionorG28 V0. ; Move the turret to the Y axis reference positionorG28 W0. ; Move the turret to the Z axis reference positionorG28 U0. V0. W0. ; Move the turret to the X, Y, and Z axis reference positions

Move through an Intermediate Position:

G28 X4. Z12. ; Move the turret to X4. Z12., then to the X and Z axis referencepositions

G31 Skip Function(Group 0 G Code)

The G31 command allows the programmer to command linear interpolation (similar to G01) withthe added capability of responding to an external skip signal.

If no skip signal is detected, program execution occurs as if G01 has been commanded.

If a skip signal is detected, program execution immediately moves to the next data block. The cur-rently being executed is not completed.

G31 is non-modal and must be programmed each time it is to be effective.

M-504A 1-17

G32 Threadcutting (Constant Lead)(Group 1 G Code)

The G32 threadcutting command is used when the programmer wishes to maintain complete con-trol over the depth of each cutting pass.

Threading may be done in either, or both the X and Z axes. The length of the thread is determinedby the distance command for X and/or Z. If a linear thread is to be cut, it requires programming oneaxis. If a tapered thread is to be cut, it requires both the X and Z axes to be programmed.

The lead command is entered as an F word whose value is determined by the distance betweeneach thread.

Refer to the tables beginning on page 1-2 for data word formats.

Example

The command “G32 W-6. F.05" will result in a linear thread cutting pass 6 inches longwith a .05 inch lead.

The Feedrate Override switch is not effective during the threading pass unless it is set to 0%. Set-ting the Feedrate Override switch to 0% during a threading pass will stop X and Z axis motion. TheFeedrate Override switch is active during the return pass. The Emergency Stop push button and Re-set key are active during the threading pass.


Refer to Chapter 7 for information on threading cycles.

G34 Variable Lead Threadcutting(Group 1 G Code)

The G34 variable lead threadcutting command is used if thread lead is to increase or decrease.

Threading may be done in either, or both the X and Z axes. The length of the thread is determinedby the distance command for X and/or Z. If a linear thread is to be cut, it requires programming oneaxis. If a tapered thread is to be cut, it requires both the X and Z axes to be programmed.

The lead command is entered as an F word whose value is determined by the distance betweeneach thread.

The K word specifies the rate per revolution at which the lead increases or decreases. A positive (+)K causes an increasing lead and a negative (-) K causes a decreasing lead.


The Feedrate Override switch is not effective during the threading pass unless set to 0%. Settingthe Feedrate Override switch to 0% during a threading pass will stop X and Z axis motion. TheFeedrate Override switch is active during the return pass. The Emergency Stop push button and Re-set key are active during the threading pass.


Refer to Chapter 7 for information on threading cycles.

1-18 M-504A

G40 Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation(Group 7 G Code)

Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G41/G42) is canceled by a programmed G40. If G40 is pro-grammed in a block by itself, tool compensation is canceled. If the G40 block contains an axis move,tool compensation is canceled; then, the programmed move occurs without compensation. Tool NoseRadius Compensation will be canceled when the Emergency Stop push button or the Reset key ispressed.


G41 Tool Nose Radius Compensation - Workpiece Right of Tool(Group 7 G Code)

Tool Nose Radius Compensation with the workpiece to the right of the tool is established by pro-gramming G41. Imagine the operator sitting on the tool facing in the direction of the tool motion. If theworkpiece is to the right of the operator, the correct code is G41. G41 may be programmed with orwithout position data in the same data block.


G42 Tool Nose Radius Compensation - Workpiece Left of Tool(Group 7 G Code)

Tool Nose Radius Compensation with the workpiece to the left of the tool is established by pro-gramming G42. Imagine the operator sitting on the tool facing in the direction of the tool motion. If theworkpiece is to the left of the operator, the correct code is G42. G42 may be programmed with or with-out position data in the same data block.


G50 Maximum RPM Limit(Group 0 G Code)

The G50 command is used with Constant Surface Speed to establish a spindle rpm limit. The fol-lowing example establishes a spindle speed limit of 4000 rpm.

Example: G50 S4000;

A Control OFF cancels a G50 rpm limit.

Refer to Chapter 9 for additional information on Constant Surface Speed.

M-504A 1-19

G65 Macro Call(Group 0 G Code)

To activate a particular macro and have it executed from the current slide position, program the fol-lowing macro call command:

G65 P_____ ;

Where: G65 = Macro Call CommandP = Macro Program Number

The G65 command is non-modal. After the G65 command block is executed, G65 mode is deacti-vated.

Refer to Chapter 9 for additional information on the G65 Macro Call command.

G70 Automatic Finishing Cycle(Group 0 G Code)

The G70 command is used in conjunction with canned roughing cycles G71, G72, or G73 to specifythe section of the workpiece to be finish contoured. The G70 data block specifies the first and lastblock in the part program controlling the section to be finish contoured. Refer to the following sectionsfor additional information:

G71 Automatic Turning Cycle, in Chapter 6

G72 Automatic Facing Cycle, in Chapter 6

G73 Automatic Pattern Repeat Cycle, in Chapter 6

G71 Automatic Turning Cycle(Group 0 G Code)

The G71 canned cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program rough contouring ofa workpiece with multiple turning passes. This automatic cycle is usually used in conjunction with theG70 Auto Finishing Cycle. The G71 blocks specify the amount of stock to be removed on each rough-ing pass, the amount of stock to be left for finish contouring, and the first and last block in the part pro-gram controlling the rough contouring.

Refer to Chapter 6 for additional information on the G71 Automatic Turning Cycle.

G72 Automatic Facing Cycle(Group 0 G Code)

The G72 canned cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program rough contouring ofa workpiece with multiple facing passes. This automatic cycle is usually used in conjunction with theG70 Auto Finishing Cycle. The G72 blocks specify the amount of stock to be removed on each rough-ing pass, the amount of stock to be left for finish contouring, and the first and last block in the part pro-gram controlling the rough contouring.

Refer to Chapter 6 for additional information G72 Automatic Facing Cycle.

1-20 M-504A

G73 Automatic Pattern Repeat Cycle(Group 0 G Code)

The G73 canned cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program rough contouringrepeatedly cutting a fixed pattern (contour). This automatic cycle is usually used in conjunction withthe G70 Auto Finishing Cycle. The G73 blocks specify the incremental distance between the first andlast roughing pass, the number of roughing passes, and the first and last block in the part programcontrolling the rough contouring.

Refer to Chapter 6 for additional information on the G73 Automatic Pattern Repeat Cycle.

G74 Automatic Drilling Cycle (Constant Depth Increments)(Group 0 G Code)

The G74 command activates an automatic drilling cycle that uses constant depth increments. Inthe G74 block, the programmer specifies the hole depth, size of depth increment, and drilling feedrate.The G74 command is non-modal, it is effective only in the block in which it is programmed.

Refer to Chapter 6 for additional information on the G74 Constant Depth Increment Automatic Drill-ing Cycle.

G75 Automatic Grooving Cycle(Group 0 G Code)

The G75 command activates an automatic grooving cycle that uses constant depth increments. Allinformation for the G75 Auto grooving Cycle is programmed in two data blocks. The G75 command isnon-modal; it is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed.

Refer to Chapter 6 for additional information on the G75 Automatic Grooving Cycle.

G76 Automatic Threading Cycle(Group 0 G Code)

The G76 Automatic Threading Cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program multi-ple threading passes with two blocks of information instead of programming four blocks per threadingpass. The G76 command is non-modal and is canceled when the threading cycle is completed.Straight and tapered threads using plunge or compound infeed can be programmed.


The Feed Hold push button is not active during the threading pass.

Refer to Chapter 7 for additional information on the G76 Automatic Threading Cycle.

M-504A 1-21

G80 Cancel Machining Cycle(Group 10 G Code)

The G80 command is used to cancel the following cycles:

G83 Z Axis Drilling Cycle

G84 Z Axis Tapping Cycle

G85 Z Axis Boring Cycle

G87 X Axis Drilling Cycle

G88 X Axis Tapping Cycle

G89 X Axis Boring Cycle

Refer to Chapter 8 for additional information on the G80 command.

G83 Z Axis Drilling Cycle(Group 10 G Code)

The G83 command is used to activate either a single pass drill cycle or a peck drill cycle that usesconstant depth increments to drill parallel with the spindle centerline. When drilling is completed, thetool will retract to the start point of the drilling cycle. The retract move will be performed at rapid tra-verse rate. The G83 cycle is programmed in one data block. G83 remains effective until canceled byanother Group 10 G code or a Group 1 G code.

Refer to Chapter 8 for additional information on the G83 Z Axis Drilling Cycle.

G84 Right-Hand Z Axis Tapping Cycle(Group 10 G Code)

The G84 command activates a right-hand tapping cycle to tap parallel with the spindle centerline.When the tapping is completed, the spindle will reverse direction and the tap will feed back to the Rpoint and rapid to the start point of the tapping cycle. The G84 cycle is programmed in one data block.G84 remains effective until canceled by another Group 10 G code or a Group 1 G code.

Refer to Chapter 8 for additional information on the G84 Right-Hand Z Axis Tapping Cycle.

G85 Z Axis Boring Cycle(Group 10 G Code)

The G85 command activates a boring cycle to bore parallel with the spindle centerline. After theboring tool reaches the programmed depth, the tool will continue to rotate and retract at the pro-grammed feedrate to the return point specified by the R word. The tool will then rapid to the start pointof the boring cycle. The G85 cycle is programmed in one data block. G85 remains effective until can-celed by another Group 9 G code or a Group 1 G code.

Refer to Chapter 8 for additional information on the G85 Z Axis Boring Cycle.

1-22 M-504A

G87 X Axis Drilling Cycle(Group 10 G Code)

The G87 command is used to activate either a single pass drill cycle or a peck drill cycle that usesconstant depth increments to drill perpendicular to the spindle centerline. When drilling is completed,the tool will retract to the start point of the drilling cycle. The retract move will be performed at rapid tra-verse rate. The G87 cycle is programmed in one data block. G87 remains effective until canceled byanother Group 10 G code or a Group 1 G code.

Refer to Chapter 8 for additional information on the G87 X Axis Drilling Cycle.

G88 Right-Hand X Axis Tapping Cycle(Group 10 G Code)

The G88 command activates a right-hand tapping cycle to tap perpendicular to the spindle center-line. When the tapping is completed, the spindle will reverse direction and the tap will feed back to theR point and rapid to the start point of the tapping cycle. The G88 cycle is programmed in one datablock. G88 remains effective until canceled by another Group 10 G code or a Group 1 G code.

Refer to Chapter 8 for additional information on the G88 Right-Hand X Axis Tapping Cycle.

G89 X Axis Boring Cycle(Group 10 G Code)

The G89 command activates a boring cycle to bore perpendicular with the spindle centerline. Afterthe boring tool reaches the programmed depth, the tool will continue to rotate and retract at the pro-grammed feedrate to the return point specified by the R word. The tool will then rapid to the start pointof the boring cycle. The G89 cycle is programmed in one data block. G89 remains effective until can-celed by another Group 10 G code or a Group 1 G code.

Refer to Chapter 8 for additional information on the G89 X Axis Boring Cycle.

G90 Canned Turning Cycle(Group 1 G Code)

The G90 Canned Turning Cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program multipleturning passes by specifying only the depth of cut in each data block after the G90 block. Straight or ta-pered turn operations may be performed. The G90 command is modal. A programmed G90 commandwill cancel any currently active Group 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G90command. G90 can also be canceled by a control OFF or Reset. The Spindle Increase Override andDecrease Override push buttons, Feedrate Override switch, and Feed Hold push button are active.

Refer to Chapter 6 for additional information on the G90 Canned Turning Cycle.

M-504A 1-23

G92 Canned Threading Cycle(Group 1 G Code)

The G92 Canned Threading Cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program multiplethreading passes by specifying only the depth of cut in each data block after the G92 block. Straight ortapered threads may be cut in this mode. Compound infeeding is not possible in this mode. The G92command is modal. A programmed G92 command will cancel any currently active Group 1 G code.Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G92 command. G92 can also be canceled by a controlOFF or Reset. The Feed Hold push button is not active during the threading pass, but is active duringthe return pass.


Refer to Chapter 7 for additional information on the G92 Canned Threading Cycle.

G94 Canned Facing Cycle(Group 1 G Code)

The G94 Canned Facing Cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program multiplefacing passes by specifying only the depth of cut in each data block after the G94 block. Straight or ta-pered facing operations may be performed. The G94 command is modal. A programmed G94 com-mand will cancel any currently active Group 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an activeG94 command. G94 can also be canceled by a control OFF or Reset. The Feedrate Override switchand Feed Hold push button are active.

Refer to Chapter 6 for additional information on the G94 Canned Facing Cycle.

G96 Constant Surface Speed(Group 2 G Code)

The G96 mode allows programming the speed of the workpiece with respect to the tool point di-rectly in surface feet per minute in inch mode (G20) and surface meters per minute in metric mode(G21). Constant Surface Speed is a function of the spindle speed range and the programmed con-stant surface speed (S word). The control automatically adjusts the spindle speed within its range tomaintain the constant surface speed as the cutting radius varies. Refer to “G50 Maximum RPM Limit”for limiting spindle rpm while using G96 programming. G96 is canceled by G97. If a new spindle speedis not programmed, the spindle will remain at the speed that was active when Constant Surface Speedwas canceled.

Refer to Chapter 9 for additional information on Constant Surface Speed.

1-24 M-504A

G97 Direct RPM Programming (Constant Surface Speed Cancel)(Group 2 G Code)

G97 allows the programmer to program spindle speeds directly in revolutions per minute. WhenG97 cancels G96, the spindle speed in rpm equals the speed at which the spindle was turning whenConstant Surface Speed was canceled. If a different spindle speed is desired, an S word specifyingthe new spindle speed should be programmed in the same block as the G97 command. The S wordformat for direct rpm programming is S4.0

G98 Inches / Millimeter per Minute Feedrate(Group 5 G Code)

The feedrate (F word) is programmed directly in inches/mm per minute. The feedrate remains un-changed until reprogrammed. Refer to the tables beginning on page 1-2 for data word formats.

When entering G98 mode, a new feedrate should be programmed. G98 is modal and cancels G99.The decimal point must be programmed. The following examples are written for inch mode (G20):

Example 1: F100 results in a feedrate of 1.00 inches per minute.

Example 2: F100. results in a feedrate of 100.00 inches per minute.

G99 Inches / Millimeter per Revolution Feedrate(Group 5 G Code)

This is the power-up or reset state. The feedrate (F word) is programmed directly in inches/mm perrevolution. The feedrate remains unchanged until reprogrammed. Refer to the tables beginning onpage 1-2 for data word formats.

The last active spindle (main spindle, sub-spindle, or live tool spindle) will be used for controllinginch [millimeter] per revolution feedrates.

The maximum programmable feedrates are 9.999999 inches/revolution and 500.0000 millime-ters/revolution. When entering G99 mode, a new feedrate should be programmed. G99 is modal andcancels G98.

G107 Cylindrical Interpolation(Group 0 G Code)

The G107 command activates cylindrical interpolation for C Axis programming. Refer to Chapter12 for additional information.

G112 Polar Interpolation(Group 21 G Code)

The G112 command activates polar interpolation for C Axis programming. Refer to Chapter 12 foradditional information.

G113 Cancel Polar Interpolation(Group 21 G Code)

The G113 command cancels polar interpolation. Refer to Chapter 12 for additional information.

M-504A 1-25

X WORD

NOTICE

Programming an X axis move without the correct Tool or Zero Offset active couldcause the tool to strike a spindle or workpiece.

The X word is a DIAMETER DIMENSION for the machine cross slide. It is measured relative to thespindle centerline and is written with an X followed by a plus or minus sign. The plus sign may be omit-ted because the control assumes plus (+) if no sign is programmed. The X command establishes theabsolute position of a turret top plate reference location in relation to the spindle centerline aftermovement has been completed.

- NOTE -

Refer to Appendix One for travel specifications.

Only one X command is permitted in a data block. If more than one X command is programmed in adata block, the control will act on the X command programmed closest to the End of Block character.


X is positive when the turret reference point is programmed to move to a position behind the spindlecenterline. X is negative when the turret reference point is programmed to move to a position in front ofthe spindle centerline. X axis programming resolution is discussed under “Diameter Programming”,page 1-54.

With no tool offset active and no work shift (zero offset) active, all programmed motions will be thefinal position of the turret reference point in relation to the spindle centerline. The position will be dis-played as a diameter whose center is on the spindle centerline. When X axis tool offsets are activatedby an offset command (T word), the programmed position will be modified according to the offset.

Example:

A command of X2.5 will cause the control to position the cross slide with the turret refer-ence point 1.25 inches behind the spindle centerline.

A work shift (zero offset) can be used to establish a work coordinate system in which X0 does notcoincide with the spindle centerline. If X0 for the work coordinate system used is not on the spindlecenterline, all programmed motions will be relative to the X0 established by the work shift. Refer toChapter 4 for information regarding the work shift.

The X word is also used to give a time factor to a “Dwell” command (G04). Refer to “G04 Dwell”,page 1-14.

1-26 M-504A

U WORD

NOTICE

Programming a U axis move without the correct Tool Offset or Zero Offset activecould cause the tool to strike a spindle or workpiece.

The U command establishes the incremental move of the cross slide position in relation to the cur-rent cross slide location.

Only one U command is permitted in a data block. If more than one U command is programmed in adata block, the control will act on the U command programmed closest to the End of Block character.


U is positive when the cross slide is programmed to move toward the back of the machine. U is neg-ative when the cross slide is programmed to move toward the front of the machine.

Example:

A command of U2.5 will cause the control to position the cross slide 1.25 inches in the+X direction from the previous position on the X axis.

The U word is also used to give a time factor to a “Dwell” command (G04). Refer to “G04 Dwell”,page 1-14.

M-504A 1-27

Z WORD

NOTICE

Programming a Z axis move without the correct Tool Offset or Zero Offset activecould cause the tool to strike a spindle or workpiece.

The Z word is a distance command for the machine carriage. It is measured relative to the mainspindle face and is written with a Z followed by a plus (+) or minus (-) sign. The plus sign may be omit-ted because the control assumes plus (+) if no sign is programmed.

- NOTE -

Refer to Appendix One for travel specifications.

Only one Z command is permitted in a data block. If more than one Z command is programmed in adata block, the control will act on the Z command programmed closest to the End of Block character.


Assuming tool offsets are inactive, Z is positive when the turret reference point is programmed tothe right of Z0 on the Machine Work Coordinate System. Z is negative when the turret reference pointis programmed to the left of Z0 on the Machine Work Coordinate System.

With no tool offset active and no work shift (zero offset) active, all programmed Z axis movementswill be the final position of the turret reference position in relation to the main spindle face. Since allcarriage movement must take place to the right of the headstock, all movements regardless of direc-tion will be plus (+). When a tool offset and/or a zero offset are active, the programmed position will bemodified accordingly.

Example:

A command of “Z5.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the carriage withthe turret reference position 5 inches from the main spindle face.

A command of “Z9.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the carriage withthe turret reference position 9 inches from the main spindle face.

A work shift (zero offset) is used to establish a work coordinate system in which Z0 does not coin-cide with the main spindle face. If Z0 for the work coordinate system used is not the main spindle face,all programmed Z axis movements will be relative to the Z0 established by the work shift. A positive Zvalue describes a coordinate point to the right of the Z0 point. A negative Z value describes a coordi-nate point to the left of the Z0 point.

1-28 M-504A

W WORD

NOTICE

Programming a W axis move without the correct Tool Offset or Zero Offset activecould cause the tool to strike a spindle or workpiece.

The W command establishes the incremental move of the carriage in relation to the current car-riage location.

Only one W command is permitted in a data block. If more than one W command is programmed ina data block, the control will act on the W command programmed closest to the End of Block charac-ter.


W is positive when the carriage is programmed to move away from the main spindle face. W is neg-ative when the carriage is programmed to move toward the main spindle face.

Example:

A command of “W5.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the carriage 5inches in the +Z direction from the previous position on the Z axis. A command of “W-5.”with a feedrate will cause the control to position the carriage 5 inches in the -Z directionfrom the previous position on the Z axis.

M-504A 1-29

Y WORD [Option]

NOTICE

Programming a Y axis move without the correct Tool Offset or Zero Offset activecould cause the tool to strike the workpiece.

The Y axis option allows off-center machining at the spindle(s).

The Y word is an absolute distance command for the turret. The Y coordinate is measured relativeto the spindle centerline and is written with a Y followed by a plus (+) or minus (-) sign. The plus signmay be omitted because the control assumes plus (+) if no sign is programmed.

- NOTE -

Refer to Appendix One for Y axis travel specifications.

Only one Y command is permitted in a data block. If more than one Y command is programmed in adata block, the control will act on the Y command programmed closest to the End of Block character.


Y is positive when the reference point is programmed above the spindle centerline. Y is negativewhen the reference point is programmed below the spindle centerline. Refer to Figure 1.2, page 1-7.

With no tool offset active and no work shift (zero offset) active, all programmed Y axis movementswill be the final position of the turret reference point in relation to the spindle centerline.

Example:

A command of “Y1.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the turret with thereference point 1 inch above the spindle centerline. A command of “Y-1.” with a feedratewill cause the control to position the turret with the reference point 1 inch below thespindle centerline.

1-30 M-504A

V WORD [Option]

NOTICE

Programming a V axis move without the correct Tool Offset or Zero Offset activecould cause the tool to strike the workpiece.

The V command establishes the incremental move of the turret on the Y axis. This incrementalmove is in relation to the current turret location on the Y axis.

Only one V command is permitted in a data block. If more than one V command is programmed in adata block, the control will act on the V command programmed closest to the End of Block character.


V is positive when the turret is programmed to move away from the machine base. V is negativewhen the turret is programmed to move toward the machine base.

Example:

A command of “V1.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the turret 1 inch inthe +Y direction from the previous position on the Y axis. A command of “V-1.” with afeedrate will cause the control to position the turret 1 inch in the -Y direction from theprevious position on the Y axis.

E WORD

- NOTE -

When machining on the sub-spindle, it is recommended that the sub-spindle be lo-cated at the E axis reference position.

There is no incremental movement command for the E axis. Refer to Appendix Onefor travel specifications.

The E word is a absolute distance command for the tailstock or sub-spindle. It is measured relativeto the main spindle face and is written with a E followed by a plus (+) or minus (-) sign. The plus signmay be omitted because the control assumes plus (+) if no sign is programmed.

Only one E command is permitted in a data block. If more than one E command is programmed in adata block, the control will act on the E command programmed closest to the End of Block character.


M-504A 1-31

A WORD [Option]

The A word is an absolute C axis command for the optional sub-spindle. The C axis feature pro-vides the programmer with the following machining capabilities:

- Live Tooling with Spindle Orient- Polar Coordinate Interpolation (face milling)- Cylindrical Interpolation (contoured milling on the O.D.)

Refer to Chapters 11 and 12 for additional information.

B WORD

The B word is a spindle orient command. The spindle is stopped in relation to the spindle 0 (zero)degree mark. Refer to Chapter 11 for additional information.

C WORD

The C word is an absolute C axis command for the main spindle. The C axis feature provides theprogrammer with the following machining capabilities:



H WORD

The H word is an incremental C axis command. The C axis feature provides the programmer withthe following machining capabilities:



I WORD

The I word is used during Circular Interpolation (G02/G03). The I word is a signed value defining thedistance on the X axis from the start point of an arc to the arc center. The sign is a result of the coordi-nate direction from the start point to the arc center.



J WORD

The J word is used during Circular Interpolation (G02/G03). The J word is a signed value definingthe distance on the Y axis from the start point of an arc to the arc center. The sign is a result of the coor-dinate direction from the start point to the arc center.



1-32 M-504A

K WORD

The K word is used during Circular Interpolation and Variable Lead Threadcutting.

Circular Interpolation (G02 / G03)

The K word is used during Circular Interpolation (G02/G03). The K word is a signed value definingthe distance on the Z axis from the start point of an arc to the arc center. The sign is a result of the coor-dinate direction from the start point to the arc center.



Variable Lead Threading (G34)

The K word specifies the change in thread lead per spindle revolution. The value is positive for anincreasing lead and negative for a decreasing lead.


Refer to “Variable Lead Threadcutting”, in Chapter 7.

R WORD

Linear Interpolation (G01)

When Linear Interpolation (G01) is active, “,R” defines the numerical values of a corner radius be-tween any linear (G01) moves. Refer to the tables beginning on page 1-2 for data word formats.

Refer to “Insert Chamfer or Corner Radius”, in Chapter 3.

Circular Interpolation (G02 / G03)

When Circular Interpolation (G02 or G03) is active, R defines the numerical value of a radius con-necting two points. Refer to the tables beginning on page 1-2 for data word formats. Refer to “CircularInterpolation”, in Chapter 3.

Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G41 / G42)

When Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G41 or G42) is active, R defines the numerical value ofthe tool nose radius. Values are stored in the Tool Offset Tables and are activated by a T command.Refer to the tables beginning on page 1-2 for data word formats. Refer to Chapter 2 for additionalinformation.

Defining Tapers

When used with the following cycles, the R word defines the amount of taper when a tapered turn-ing, threading, or facing cycle is executed:

G76 Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle, Chapter 7

G90 Canned Turning Cycle, Chapter 6

G92 Canned Threading Cycle, Chapter 7

G94 Canned Facing Cycle, Chapter 6

M-504A 1-33

P WORD

- NOTE -

Decimal point programming cannot be used with the P word. Leading zero suppres-sion must be used.

Refer to the tables beginning on page 1-2 for the data word format.

The P word is used in the following functions:

G04 Dwell, page 1-14

G70 Automatic Finishing Cycle, in Chapter 6

G71 Multiple Repetitive Rough Turning Cycle, in Chapter 6

G72 Multiple Repetitive Rough Facing Cycle, in Chapter 6

G73 Rough Pattern Repeat Cycle, in Chapter 6

G80 Series Cycles, Chapter 8

Subprogram Calling, in Chapter 9

Program Entry of Tool Offsets, in Chapter 4

Program Entry of Work Shift, in Chapter 4

Spindle Selection

Machining Cycles

When used with the G71, G72, and G73 cycles, the P word specifies the sequence number of thefirst block in the program section that controls the workpiece area being rough contoured. When usedwith the G70 cycle, the P word specifies the sequence number of the first block in the program sectionthat controls the workpiece area being finish contoured.

Subprogram Calling

When used with subprogram calling, the P word appears in the M98 calling block of the main partprogram and specifies the program number of the subprogram to be called.

Tool Offsets and Work Shift

When used with program entry of tool offsets or work shift offsets, the P word specifies the offsetnumber and has the following numerical ranges:

P00 when used with Work shift Offset

P01 to P99 when used with tool wear offsets

P10001 to P10099 when used with tool geometry offsets

Refer to Chapter 4 for information on storing tool offsets and work shift in memory.

1-34 M-504A

Spindle Selection

When used for spindle selection, the P word is used to specify which spindle will be commanded bya programmed S word (spindle speed). Once the P word has been programmed to select a spindle, itis not necessary to program the P word again unless a different spindle is to be commanded.

When used for spindle selection, the data word format is P1.

Spindle selection is assigned as follows:

P1 = Main SpindleP2 = Sub-Spindle [Option]P3 = Live Tooling (BMT turret top plates only)

Programming Format: S____ P_ ;

Q WORD

The Q word is used in the following functions:

G70 Automatic Finishing Cycle, Chapter 6

G71 Multiple Repetitive Rough Turning Cycle, Chapter 6

G72 Multiple Repetitive Rough Facing Cycle, Chapter 6

G73 Rough Pattern Repeat Cycle, Chapter 6

G83/G87 Drilling Cycles, in Chapter 8

Program Entry of Tool Offsets, Chapter 4

Programming the Tailstock, Chapter 9

When used with the G71, G72, and G73 cycles, the Q word specifies the Sequence Number of thelast block in the program section that controls the workpiece area being rough contoured. When usedwith the G70 cycle, the Q word specifies the sequence number of the last block in the program sectionthat controls the workpiece area being finish contoured. The data word format is Q4. Leading zerosmay be omitted.

When used with the G83 and G87 cycles, the Q word specifies the depth of each drilling pass dur-ing a peck drill operation. Refer to Chapter 8 for additional information.

When tool geometry offsets are entered by tape, the Q word specifies the tool tip orientation num-ber. The data word format is Q1, with numerical values ranging from 0 to 9.

Refer to “Tool Offsets”, in Chapter 4.

M-504A 1-35

F WORD

The F word is used to establish a feedrate.

When used with the G98 command, it expresses the feedrate in inches or millimeters per minute.When used with the G99 command, it expresses the feedrate in inches or millimeters per revolution. Ifmore than one feedrate is programmed in a data block, the last feedrate programmed will be the activefeedrate.

Refer to the tables beginning on page 1-2 for data word formats. The decimal point must be pro-grammed.

Due to the maximum feedrates on the X, Y, and Z axes, the feedrate in G99 mode is “Lead Limited”.When G99 mode is active, the maximum feedrate in G01 mode is derived from the following formulas:

Maximum Feedrate (in/min) = inches per minute ÷ revolutions/minute

Maximum Feedrate (mm/min) = millimeters per minute ÷ revolutions/minute

The maximum programmable feedrate for the E, X, Y, and Z axes is:

150 inches per minute

3810 millimeters per minute

The F word, which can be placed anywhere in the data block, remains unchanged until repro-grammed. If G00 is used to obtain the rapid traverse rate, be sure it is canceled by another Group 1 Gcode after the rapid traverse move is completed.

The Feedrate Override switch modifies the programmed feedrate from 0% (Feed Hold) to 150%.When Dry Run mode is active, the control causes all slide motion to take place at a feedrate selectedwith the Feedrate Override switch.

1-36 M-504A

S WORD

NOTICE

Hardinge recommends that the spindle speed does not exceed 4,200 rpm for ma-chines used with a bar feed.

- NOTE -

A P word is used to specify which spindle will be commanded by a programmed Sword. Refer to page 1-35 for information on using the P word for spindle selection.

Do not program a decimal point with the S word.

The S word has several functions, depending on the G code it is associated with:

CODE FUNCTION:

G50 S word selects the spindle rpm limit for Constant Surface SpeedG96 S word specifies surface feet/meters per minute in Constant Surface SpeedG97 S word selects direct spindle rpm

When used with G50, the S word specifies the maximum rpm the spindle can attain during Con-stant Surface Speed programming (G96).

In G96 Constant Surface Speed programming, the format is S4 in both inch and metric modes. Theunits are surface feet per minute in inch mode (G20) and surface meters per minute in metric mode(G21). Refer to “Constant Surface Speed”, in Chapter 9.

When used in G97 direct rpm mode, the word format is S4.

- NOTE -

Base speed is the minimum spindle speed for machining.

The effective spindle speed range for the main spindle and optional sub-spindle is as follows:

Machine ModelMain Spindle

Base Speed / Maximum SpeedOptional Sub-Spindle

Base Speed / Maximum Speed

T-42 Lathe(16C Main Spindle)

750 / 6,000 750 / 6,000

T-42 Big-Bore Lathe(20C Main Spindle)

750 / 5,000 750 / 6,000


420 / 5000 750 / 5,000


590 / 4000 750 / 5,000

The S word is modal, and once programmed, need not be programmed again until a different spin-dle speed is required.

M-504A 1-37

T WORD

- NOTE -

On machines equipped with the Y axis option, the turret will not index if the turret ispositioned below Y0. Refer to Y Word, page 1-30, for additional information.

T-42 machines equipped with BMT 45 turret top plates are capable of half station indexing. Full sta-tions are numbered 1 through 16. Half stations are numbered 17 through 32. Refer to Figure 1.3 forturret station numbers. Refer to Figure 1.4 for turret indexing examples.

1-38 M-504A

1112

13

14

15

16

1

23

4

5

67

8

9

10

17

1819

20

21

22

23

24

25

26 27

28

29

30

31

32

Figure 1.3 - Turret Station Numbers(BMT 45 Top Plate)

TI5673

Half Station NumbersFull Station Numbers

1112

13

14

15

16

1

23

4

5

67

8

9

10 11 1213

14

15

16

1

2

34

5

6

78

9

10

Figure 1.4 - Turret Indexing Examples(BMT 45 Top Plate)

Half Station Index,Turret at Station 29

Full Station Index,Turret at Station 13

TI5674

MachineSpindle

MachineSpindle

T-51 and T-65 machines equipped with BMT 55 turret top plates are capable of half station index-ing. Full stations are numbered 1 through 12. Half stations are numbered 13 through 24. Refer to Fig-ure 1.5 for turret station numbers. Refer to Figure 1.6 for turret indexing examples.

M-504A 1-39

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

Figure 1.5 - Turret Station Numbers(BMT 55 Top Plate)

Full Station Numbers

TI5837

Half Station Numbers

Figure 1.6 - Turret Indexing Examples(BMT 55 Top Plate)

Half Station Index,Turret at Station 22

Full Station Index,Turret at Station 10

TI5838

MachineSpindle

MachineSpindle

Machines equipped with Hardinge top plates are NOT capable of half station indexing. Turret sta-tions are numbered 1 through 12.

The T word selects the turret station that is to be indexed to the cutting position and activates theTool Offset number. The Tool Offset number selects the following:

Tool Geometry Offset File:

1. X and Z axis Tool Dimensions.

2. Tool Nose Radius Value.

3. Tool Orientation Number.

Tool Wear Offset File:

1. X and Z axis Tool Wear adjustments.

The T word has the word format T4. The first two digits specify the turret station and the last two dig-its specify the location of the tool offsets. Note that both the geometry and wear offsets are activatedby the last two digits.

Example: N0120 T0515;

Block N0120 calls for turret station 5. Tool geometry offsets on line 15 of the Tool Offset GeometryFile will be activated and tool wear offsets on line 15 of the Tool Wear File will also be activated.

NOTICE

If no tool offsets are to be activated, the last two digits MUST be 00. If no digits areprogrammed in the last two places, the turret will not index. Instead, the control willuse the turret station number as an offset and activate that offset. This could result ina collision as the control will attempt to position the previously active tool using incor-rect offsets or no offsets at all.

For example, if the turret is to be indexed to station 5 without an offset, T0500 must be pro-grammed. If T05 is programmed, the turret will not be indexed to station 5, but offset 05 will beactivated.

- NOTE -

When the Hardinge Safe Index formats are used, it is not necessary to program “T0"before indexing to a new turret station. ”T0" is included in the Safe Indexsubprograms. Refer to Chapter 9 for information on Safe Index subprograms.

A turret command of “T0" should be inserted before indexing to a new turret station and at the endof each operation to cause the active tool offsets to be cleared from the offset registers.

Refer to Chapter 4 for additional information on tool offsets.

1-40 M-504A

M WORD

M codes convey action to the machine. They are known as miscellaneous functions and are desig-nated by a programmed M word having the format M3.

Only one M code is allowed in a data block. If more than one M code is programmed in a block fromthe keyboard or tape, the last M code entered will be the active M code. Refer also to the M code chartin Appendix Two.

The M code may be placed anywhere in the data block.

M00 Program Stop

The M00 command stops the program, stops the spindle, and turns the coolant off. The ColletOpen/Close push button is enabled. This function can be used for gauging and end-for-ending theworkpiece. Pressing Cycle Start causes the program to continue. It is the programmer’s responsibilityto program an M03, M04, M08, M13, M14, M51, M52, M53, or M54 to restart the spindle, live tooling,and/or coolant pump when restarting the program after an M00 Program Stop.

M01 Optional Stop

The M01 command performs the same function as M00, if the Optional Stop push button on thecontrol panel has been activated before the block containing the M01 is read by the control. If the Op-tional Stop push button has not been activated by the operator, the control will ignore the programmedM01 and will continue to execute the program. This function is useful when it is necessary to gauge theworkpiece during setup. Pressing Cycle Start causes the program to continue. It is the programmer’sresponsibility to program an M03, M04, M08, M13, M14, M51, M52, M53, or M54 to restart the spindle,live tooling, and/or coolant pump(s) when restarting the program after an M01 Optional Stop.

M03 Main Spindle Forward

M03 commands the main spindle to run in the forward direction at the programmed spindle speed(S word). The spindle is running in the forward direction when rotating clockwise as viewed from themain spindle end of the machine. M03 remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M04, M05, M14,M30, or by pressing the Reset key or Emergency Stop push button.

M04 Main Spindle Reverse

M04 commands the main spindle to run in the reverse direction at the programmed spindle speed(S word). The spindle is running in the reverse direction when rotating counterclockwise as viewedfrom the main spindle end of the machine. M04 remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M03, M05,M13, M30, or by pressing the Reset key or Emergency Stop push button.

M05 Main Spindle Stop / Coolant OFF

M05 commands the main spindle to stop and turns the coolant off, but DOES NOT stop axis motionunless G99 is active. M05 remains active until canceled by M03, M04, M13, or M14. M05 is active atmachine start-up and can also be activated by M00, M01, M30, Reset, and Emergency Stop.

M07 Sub-Spindle Phase Synchronization with Main Spindle [Option]

M07 commands the rotational direction, velocity, and orientation of the sub-spindle to match themain spindle. M07 is canceled by any standard spindle command on the main spindle or sub-spindle.

M-504A 1-41

M08 Coolant ON

M08 activates the turret coolant pump and remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M05, M09,M30, Reset, or Emergency Stop.

M09 Coolant OFF

M09 deactivates the turret coolant pump and remains effective until canceled by M08, M13, M14,M53, or M54. M09 is active at machine start-up and is activated by M00, M01, M05, M30, Reset, orEmergency Stop.

M10 High Pressure Coolant ON [Option]

M10 commands all high pressure coolant to be turned ON if this option is activated. The spindlemust be rotating and the guard door must be closed to activate the high pressure coolant feature. M10remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M11, M30, or Emergency Stop.

M11 High Pressure Coolant OFF [Option]

M11 commands all high pressure coolant to be turned OFF. M11 is active at machine start-up andremains active until canceled by M10.

M12 Turret Coolant OFF [Option]

M12 turns the turret coolant OFF if thru-spindle coolant is ON.

M13 Main Spindle Forward / Coolant ON

M13 commands the main spindle to run in the forward direction at the programmed spindle speed(S word) and turns the coolant pump ON.

The main spindle is running in the forward direction when rotating clockwise as viewed from themain spindle end of the machine. M13 remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M04, M05, M14,M30, or by pressing the Reset key or Emergency Stop push button.

If M04 is programmed after M13, the main spindle will run in the reverse direction and the coolantpump will remain ON.

M14 Main Spindle Reverse / Coolant ON

M14 commands the main spindle to run in the reverse direction at the programmed spindle speed(S word) and turns the coolant pump ON.

The main spindle is running in the reverse direction when rotating counterclockwise as viewed fromthe main spindle end of the machine. M14 remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M03, M05,M13, M30, or by pressing the Reset key or Emergency Stop push button.

If M03 is programmed after M14, the main spindle will run in the forward direction and the coolantpump will remain ON.

1-42 M-504A

M15 Thru-Spindle Coolant ON, Main Spindle [Option]

The M15 command causes the thru-spindle coolant at the main spindle to turn ON. M15 remainsactive until canceled by M16, M30, control Reset, or control OFF.

Refer to M215 for the equivalent command for the sub-spindle.

M16 Thru-Spindle Coolant OFF, Main Spindle [Option]

The M16 command causes the thru-spindle coolant at the main spindle to turn OFF. M16 remainsactive until canceled by M15.


M20 Speed Arrival Check ON

M20 commands the control not to move the machine axes until the spindle reaches the pro-grammed spindle speed. M20 remains active until canceled by M30, M60, control Reset, or controlOFF.

M21 Main Spindle Collet / Chuck Open

M21 commands the main spindle collet closer to release the workpiece. M21 remains active untilcanceled by M22.

M22 Main Spindle Collet / Chuck Close

M22 commands the main spindle collet closer to grip the workpiece. M22 remains active until can-celed by M21.

M23 Main Spindle Contouring Mode ON

M23 activates main spindle contouring mode for C Axis programming. Refer to Chapter 12 for addi-tional information.


M24 Main Spindle Contouring Mode OFF

M24 cancels main spindle contouring mode, which is used for C Axis programming. Refer to Chap-ter 12 for additional information.


M25 Main Spindle Part Catcher Retract [Option]

The M25 command extends the part conveyor into the work envelope; then, retracts the headwallpart catcher to deliver the part to the part conveyor. The conveyor retracts from the work envelope androtates to deliver the part to the unload ramp at the left end of the machine.

M-504A 1-43

M26 Main Spindle Part Catcher Extend [Option]

The M26 command moves the headwall part catcher to the part pickup position at the main spindle.

M27 Main Spindle Internal Chucking Mode

The M27 command establishes the operation of the main spindle collet closer to support internalgripping work-holding devices.

Refer to the operator’s manual (M-505) for information on establishing chucking modes.

M28 Main Spindle External Chucking Mode

The M28 command establishes the operation of the main spindle collet closer to support externalgripping work-holding devices.


M29 Rigid Tapping Mode

The M29 command activates rigid tapping mode. Refer to Chapter 7 for information on rigid tappingmode.

M30 End of Program, Auto Door Open

M30 indicates the end of a program and is usually found in the last block programmed. It stops thespindle, turns the coolant OFF, rewinds the program to the beginning, and opens the optional autodoor. The Collet Open/Close push button is enabled.

M32 Spindle Synchronization [Option]

M32 commands the optional sub-spindle to match direction and speed with the main spindle.

M32 is canceled by any standard spindle command on the main spindle or sub-spindle.

M33 Sub-Spindle Forward [Option]

M33 commands the sub-spindle to run in the forward direction at the programmed spindle speed (Sword). The sub-spindle is running in the forward direction when rotating clockwise as viewed from themain spindle end of the machine. M33 remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M30, M34, M35, orby pressing the Reset key or Emergency Stop push button.

M34 Sub-Spindle Reverse [Option]

M34 commands the sub-spindle to run in the reverse direction at the programmed spindle speed (Sword). The sub-spindle is running in the reverse direction when rotating counterclockwise as viewedfrom the main spindle end of the machine. M34 remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M30, M33,M35, or by pressing the Reset key or Emergency Stop push button.

1-44 M-504A

M35 Sub-Spindle Stop [Option]

M35 commands the sub-spindle to stop, but DOES NOT stop axis motion unless G99 is active.M35 remains active until canceled by M33 or M34. M35 is active at machine start-up and can also beactivated by M00, M01, M30, Reset, and Emergency Stop.

M36 Air Blast ON [Option]

M36 activates the main spindle air blast.

M37 Air Blast OFF [Option]

M37 deactivates the main spindle air blast.

M38 Auto Door Open [Option]

M38 commands the main coolant guard door to open.

M42 No Corner Rounding - Exact Stop

M42 is a modal command activating Exact Stop. Exact Stop permits a programmed position ex-actly. The feedrate is decreased until it is equal to zero and the following error is eliminated. M42 iscanceled by M30, M43, or Reset.

M43 Corner Rounding

M43 is a modal command which is used if no exact position stop is desired from one block to thenext. M43 is active at machine power-up, after an M30 command, and after the control has been reset.M43 cancels M42 Exact Stop.

M44 Enable Turret Bi-Directional Index

M44 enables the bi-directional indexing feature of the control. M44 is active on machine power-up.M44 is modal and cancels M45. M44 can be canceled by programming an M45 command.

M45 Disable Turret Bi-Directional Index

M45 disables the bi-directional indexing feature of the control. When M45 is active, the turret topplate will rotate only in a clockwise direction, as viewed from the spindle. M45 is modal and cancelsM44. M45 can be canceled by programming an M44 command or powering down the control.

M46 Sub-Spindle Air Blast ON [Option]

M46 activates the sub-spindle air blast.

M47 Sub-Spindle Air Blast OFF [Option]

M47 deactivates the sub-spindle air blast.

M-504A 1-45

M48 Enable Feedrate and Spindle Override

M48 is the Power-up or Reset state of the control. It enables the use of the feedrate and spindleoverride features. M48 remains active until canceled by M49.

M49 Disable Feedrate and Spindle Override

M49 cancels M48 and causes the feedrates and spindle speeds to operate at 100% of the pro-grammed values, ignoring the feedrate and spindle override controls. M49 remains active until can-celed by an M30, M48, a control OFF, or a control Reset.

M51 Live Tool Rotational Direction Command [Option]

M51 causes a cross-working live tooling attachment mounted at the active position on the turret torotate in the forward direction.

M51 causes a standard end-working live tooling attachment mounted at the active position on theturret to rotate in the reverse direction.

M51 cancels M52, M53, M54 and M55. Refer to Chapter 11 for additional information.

M52 Live Tool Rotational Direction Command [Option]

M52 causes a cross-working live tooling attachment mounted at the active position on the turret torotate in the reverse direction.

M52 causes a standard end-working live tooling attachment mounted at the active position on theturret to rotate in the forward direction.

M52 cancels M51, M53, M54, and M55. Refer to Chapter 11 for additional information.

M53 Live Tool Rotational Direction Command / Coolant ON [Option]

M53 causes a cross-working live tooling attachment mounted at the active position on the turret torotate in the forward direction with the coolant turned ON.

M53 causes a standard end-working live tooling attachment mounted at the active position on theturret to rotate in the reverse direction with the coolant turned ON.


M54 Live Tool Rotational Direction Command / Coolant ON [Option]

M54 causes a cross-working live tooling attachment mounted at the active position on the turret torotate in the reverse direction with the coolant turned ON.

M54 causes a standard end-working live tooling attachment mounted at the active position on theturret to rotate in the forward direction with the coolant turned ON.


1-46 M-504A

M55 Live Tool Stop / Coolant OFF [Option]

M55 causes the live tooling attachment mounted at the active position on the turret to stop rotatingand turns the coolant OFF. M55 cancels M51, M52, M53, and M54.


M56 Sub-Spindle Collet / Chuck Open [Option]

M56 commands the sub-spindle collet closer to release the workpiece. M56 remains active untilcanceled by M57.

M57 Sub-Spindle Collet / Chuck Close [Option]

M57 commands the sub-spindle collet closer to grip the workpiece. M57 remains active until can-celed by M56.

M58 Feed Bar Stock [Option]

M58 commands the optional magazine bar feed unit to feed bar stock to the machine.

M59 Cancel Feed Bar Stock [Option]

M59 commands the optional magazine bar feed unit to stop feeding bar stock to the machine.

M60 Speed Arrival Check OFF

M60 commands the control to move the machine axes as programmed and not to wait until thespindle reaches the programmed spindle speed. M60 remains active until canceled by M20.

M61 Bar Change [Option]

M61 calls the bar change macro program, which commands the magazine bar feed to load anotherpiece of bar stock into the active position.

M62 Activate C Axis Spindle Synchronization [Option]

The M62 command activates C axis spindle synchronization between the main spindle and the op-tional sub-spindle.

Refer to Spindle Synchronization Sample Programs, in Chapter 14.

M63 Cancel C Axis Spindle Synchronization [Option]

The M63 command cancels C axis spindle synchronization between the main spindle and the op-tional sub-spindle.

Refer to Spindle Synchronization Sample Programs, in Chapter 14.

M-504A 1-47

M64 Spindle Feedback from Main Spindle

The M64 command selects feedback from the main spindle for controlling inch [millimeter] per rev-olution feedrates.

This command is typically not required. The last active spindle (main spindle, sub-spindle, or livetool spindle) will be used for controlling inch [millimeter] per revolution feedrates unless overridden byan M64, M65, or M66.

When required, the M64 command is programmed on a line by itself.

M65 Spindle Feedback from Sub-Spindle [Option]

The M65 command selects feedback from the sub-spindle for controlling inch [millimeter] per revo-lution feedrates.



M66 Spindle Feedback from Live Tooling [Option]

The M66 command selects feedback from the active live tooling spindle for controlling inch [milli-meter] per revolution feedrates.



M68 Sub-Spindle External Chucking Mode [Option]

The M68 command establishes the operation of the sub-spindle collet closer to support externalgripping work-holding devices.


M69 Sub-Spindle Internal Chucking Mode [Option]

The M69 command establishes the operation of the sub-spindle collet closer to support internalgripping work-holding devices.


1-48 M-504A

M70 Orient Commands to Sub-Spindle [Option]

M70 is a modal command which causes all spindle orient commands to be effective on the optionalsub-spindle. M70 is canceled by M71.

M71 Orient Commands to Main Spindle [Option]

M71 is a modal command which causes all spindle orient commands to be effective on the mainspindle. M71 is canceled by M70.

M72 Chamfer OFF

M72 is a modal command which deactivates chamfering at the end of each threading pass during aG76 or G92 threading cycle. The threading tool will pull directly away from the workpiece. M72 is can-celed by M73. Refer to Chapter 7 for information on threading cycles.

M73 Chamfer ON

M73 is a modal command which activates chamfering at the end of each threading pass during aG76 or G92 threading cycle. The chamfer distance is determined by parameter 5130. M73 is canceledby M72. Refer to Chapter 7 for information on threading cycles.

M76 Sub-Spindle Drive OFF [Option]

M76 turns OFF the axis drive for the sub-spindle (E axis). Refer to Chapter 14 for additional infor-mation.

M77 Sub-Spindle Drive Low Torque [Option]

M77 switches the axis drive for the sub-spindle (E axis) to low torque mode. Refer to Chapter 14 foradditional information.

M78 Sub-Spindle Drive Normal Torque [Option]

M78 switches the axis drive for the sub-spindle (E axis) to normal torque mode. Refer to Chapter 14for additional information.

M80 Check Part Missing [Option]

M80 commands the sub-spindle part detector to check the sub-spindle for a part.

• If a part is not detected in the sub-spindle, program execution will stop and an alarmmessage will be displayed.

• If a part is detected in the sub-spindle, program execution will continue.

M81 Check Part Present [Option]

M81 commands the sub-spindle part detector to check the sub-spindle for a part.

• If a part is not detected in the sub-spindle, program execution will continue.

• If a part is detected in the sub-spindle, program execution will stop and an alarm messagewill be displayed.

M-504A 1-49

M82 E Axis Torque Control Mode ON (Tailstock Programming)

The M82 command switches the E axis drive from position control mode to torque control mode.Torque control mode allows the tailstock to be commanded in terms of constant force applied againstthe workpiece. Refer to Chapter 9 for information on programming the tailstock.

M83 E Axis Position Control Mode ON (Tailstock Programming)

The M83 command switches the E axis drive from torque control mode to position control mode.Position control mode allows the tailstock to be commanded in terms of coordinate positions on a lin-ear axis. Refer to Chapter 9 for information on the programming the tailstock.

M87 Tailstock Brake ON

The M87 command turns the tailstock brake ON.

This command is used with the tailstock when a live center is used with the tailstock. A typical appli-cation would be running small (low inertia) parts.

M88 Tailstock Brake OFF

The M88 command turns the tailstock brake OFF.

This command is used with the tailstock when a dead center is used with the tailstock.

M90 Part Probe ON

The M90 command is used to turn the optical part probe ON. Program the following lines immedi-ately before the command lines for probe operation:

M90 ; (Part Probe ON)G4 X1. ; (Dwell for Probe ON)

The optical part probe will automatically turn OFF after a predetermined amount of time.

Refer to the Marposs® probe documentation for information on macro programs and programmingexamples for the Marposs part probe.

Refer to the Renishaw® probe documentation for information on macro programs and program-ming examples for the Renishaw part probe.

M97 Part Counter

M97 increments the Fanuc parts counter. Refer to the operator’s manual (M-505) for additional in-formation on the parts counter.

M98 Subprogram Call

This code must be in the main part program block which activates a subprogram. It is programmedwith a P word, which specifies the subprogram number. Refer to “Subprograms”, in Chapter 9.

M99 Subprogram End

This code is used to return to the main part program after a subprogram has been completed. Referto “Subprograms”, in Chapter 9.

1-50 M-504A

M200 Main Spindle Brake ON

The M200 command turns the main spindle brake ON. This command is used when programmingC axis spindle orient. Refer to Chapter 11 for information on programming C axis spindle orient.

M201 Main Spindle Brake OFF

The M201 command turns the main spindle brake OFF. This command is used when programmingC axis spindle orient. Refer to Chapter 11 for information on programming C axis spindle orient.

M202 Sub-Spindle Brake ON [Option]

The M202 command turns the sub-spindle brake ON.

This command is used with the sub-spindle when programming C axis spindle orient. Refer toChapter 11 for information on programming C axis spindle orient.

M203 Sub-Spindle Brake OFF [Option]

The M203 command turns the sub-spindle brake OFF.

This command is used with the sub-spindle when programming C axis spindle orient. Refer toChapter 11 for information on programming C axis spindle orient.

M206 Disable Main Spindle Draw Bar Check

M206 disables the two proximity switches used to check the position of the main spindle draw tube(open, closed, or overtravel condition).

M206 is used to run the main spindle without a part or work-holding device in the spindle.

M207 Enable Main Spindle Draw Bar Check

M207 enables the two proximity switches used to check the position of the main spindle draw tube(open, closed, or overtravel condition). M207 is the normal operating mode for the main spindle.

M207 is active at machine start-up and can also be activated by pressing Reset.

M208 Disable Sub-Spindle Draw Bar Check [Option]

M208 disables the two proximity switches used to check the position of the sub-spindle draw tube(open, closed, or overtravel condition).

M208 is used to run the sub-spindle without a part or work-holding device in the spindle.

M209 Enable Sub-Spindle Draw Bar Check [Option]

M209 enables the two proximity switches used to check the position of the sub-spindle draw tube(open, closed, or overtravel condition). M209 is the normal operating mode for the sub-spindle.

M209 is active at machine start-up and can also be activated by pressing Reset.

M-504A 1-51

M215 Thru-Spindle Coolant ON, Sub-Spindle [Option]

The M215 command causes the thru-spindle coolant at the sub-spindle to turn ON. M215 remainsactive until canceled by M216, M30, control Reset, or control OFF.

Refer to M15 for the equivalent command for the main spindle.

M216 Thru-Spindle Coolant OFF, Sub-Spindle [Option]

The M216 command causes the thru-spindle coolant at the sub-spindle to turn OFF. M216 remainsactive until canceled by M215.


M221 Part Catcher Slide Extend [Option]

M221 commands the part catcher slide to extend to the part pick-up position.


M222 Part Catcher Slide Retract [Option]

M222 commands the part catcher slide to retract into the headwall.


M223 Sub-Spindle Contouring Mode ON [Option]

The M223 command activates sub-spindle contouring mode for C Axis programming. Refer toChapter 12 for additional information on C Axis programming.


M224 Sub-Spindle Contouring Mode OFF [Option]

The M224 command cancels sub-spindle contouring mode, which is used for C Axis programming.Refer to Chapter 12 for additional information on C Axis programming.


1-52 M-504A

M225 Sub-Spindle Part Catcher Arm Rotate Out [Option]

M226 commands the part catcher arm to swing OUT to the part retrieve position at the spindle cen-terline.


M226 Sub-Spindle Part Catcher Arm Rotate In [Option]

M225 commands the part catcher arm to swing IN to allow the part catcher to be retracted.


M227 Sub-Spindle Part Catcher Gripper Close [Option]

M227 commands the part catcher gripper to close, gripping the workpiece.


M228 Sub-Spindle Part Catcher Gripper Open [Option]

M228 commands the part catcher gripper to open, releasing the workpiece.


M258 Chip Conveyor ON [Option]

M258 turns the chip conveyor ON.

M259 Chip Conveyor OFF [Option]

M259 turns the chip conveyor OFF.

M300 Series M Codes

M300 series M codes are spare M codes to be used as needed. Refer to Chapter 9 for additional in-formation on the spare M codes.

M-504A 1-53

DIAMETER PROGRAMMING

Hardinge lathes are configured to allow the programmer to use part diameter dimensions from theworkpiece drawing as X word entries. With diameter programming, the workpiece centerline coin-cides with the spindle centerline unless an X axis Zero Offset is active. Refer to Chapter 4 for informa-tion on work shift and tool offsets.

NOTICE

It is strongly recommended that the X axis register in the Work Shift file be set tozero at all times.

PROGRAMMING NOTES

1. X words are programmed as diameters.

2. The format for diameter programming is X±2.5 in inch mode (G20) and X±3.4 in metric mode(G21). Maximum resolution is .000005 inches [.00005 mm] on the diameter.

3. Dwell (G04) is not affected by diameter programming and is entered directly in seconds ormilliseconds, depending on the data word used.

4. Incremental or continuous jogs are unaffected by diameter programming. The actual movesare incremental, but the final absolute X position will be displayed on the control display screenas an X diameter.

5. Tool geometry offsets in the X axis are entered and displayed as diameters. Tool wear offsets inthe X axis are entered and displayed as diameters. Z moves are not affected.

6. X axis “Distance to Go” is displayed as a diameter value.

1-54 M-504A

GENERAL PROGRAM FORMATS

MAIN SPINDLE OPERATION

- NOTE -

Bold text indicates items programmed as required.

BEGINNING OF PROGRAM

% Stop Code (End of Record)O_________ Letter “O” and the Program Number

#500=-____ Work Shift Value for Main Spindle Operation#501=-____ Work Shift Value for Sub-Spindle Operation [Option]#502=____ X Axis Safe Index Position#503=____ Z Axis Safe Index Position for Main Spindle Operation#504=-____ Z Axis Safe Index Position for Sub-Spindle Operation [Option]

BEGINNING OF OPERATION

N _____ (___________) Sequence Search Number and Message

G10 P0 Z#500 Set Main Spindle Work Shift

G53 E19.3 Move Tailstock to Reference Position (Tailstock Machine Only)

M98 P1 Call Safe Index Subprogram O1

M(13 or 14) S1000 G97 P1 T____ Spindle Direction, Spindle RPM, Direct RPM,Select Spindle (P1 = Main Spindle)Index to Tool Station and Call Offset

X ____ Y____ Z____ Move Tool To Activate X, Y, & Z Tool Offsets

IF USING CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED

G50 S ______ Maximum RPM Limit

G96 S ______ Surface Feet (Meters) Per Minute Speed

IF USING TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION

G(41 or 42) X____ Z____ Tool Nose Radius Compensation (Non-Cutting Move Required)

MACHINE PART

G1 G99 X____ Z____ F___ Machine Part, Inches [mm] Per Revolution Feed

CLEAR PART

X____ (and/or) Z____ Clear Part by 3 Times the Tool Tip Diameter

G53 E19.3 Move Tailstock to Reference Position (Tailstock Machine Only)


M01 Optional Stop

PROGRAM END

M30 End of Program

% Stop Code (End of Record)

BAR JOB

Use the Repeat Mode push button on the Operator Panel

M-504A 1-55

SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION [Option]

- NOTE -


BEGINNING OF PROGRAM

% Stop Code (End of Record)O_________ Letter “O” and the Program Number

G65 P9150 H_._ ; Call Collet Dwell Macro (Time Delay for Pneumatic Collet Closer)

#500=-____ Work Shift Value for Main Spindle Operation#501=-____ Work Shift Value for Sub-Spindle Operation#502=____ X Axis Safe Index Position#503=____ Z Axis Safe Index Position for Main Spindle Operation#504=-____ Z Axis Safe Index Position for Sub-Spindle Operation



G10 P0 Z#501 Set Sub-Spindle Work Shift


M(33 or 34) S1000 G97 P2 T____ Spindle Direction, Spindle RPM, Direct RPM,Select Spindle (P2 = Sub-Spindle)Index to Tool Station and Call Offset

X ____ Y____ Z-____ Move Tool To Activate X, Y, & Z Tool Offsets

IF USING CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED

G50 S ______ Maximum RPM Limit

G96 S ______ Surface Feet (Meters) Per Minute Speed

IF USING TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION

G(41 or 42) X____ Z____ Tool Nose Radius Compensation (Non-Cutting Move Required)

MACHINE PART

G1 G99 X____ Z____ F___ Machine Part, Inches [mm] Per Revolution Feed

CLEAR PART

X____ (and/or) Z-____ Clear Part by 3 Times the Tool Tip Diameter


M01 Optional Stop

PROGRAM END

M30 End of Program

% Stop Code (End of Record)

BAR JOB

Use the Repeat Mode push button on the Operator Panel

1-56 M-504A

- NOTES -

M-504A 1-57

- NOTES -

1-58 M-504A

CHAPTER 2 - TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION

INTRODUCTION

Regardless of the location of the origin of the work coordinate system used, execution of the partprogram causes a single point (tool nose reference point) to be moved relative to and positioned at co-ordinates specified by the program. However, the tool nose is not a point; it is a radius. Metal removaldoes not always take place at the same section of the tool nose. Orientation of the tool nose relative tothe work surface determines which portion of the tool is involved in metal removal. (Orientation de-pends on tool geometry and the type of cut.) Programming the proper tool path for radius and anglecontouring requires Tool Nose Radius Compensation. The following example illustrates the need forsuch compensation.

To machine the 30 degree taper shown in Figure 2.3, a contouring tool with a tool nose similar to theone shown in Figure 2.1 is used. The distance this tool nose extends from the X axis turret face is mea-sured from the turret reference point to the X axis touch-off point. The position of the tool nose relativeto the Z axis turret face is measured from the turret reference point to the Z axis touch-off point. If aTool Offset is active while a part program is being executed, the “Actual Position” register will displaythe coordinates of the tool nose reference point. This point is formed by the X coordinate of the X axistouch-off point and the Z coordinate of the Z axis touch-off point. In this case, the tool nose referencepoint is not on the tool nose. Refer to Figure 2.1.

However, this is not always the case. Some tools have only one touch-off point. Refer to Figure 2.2.In such a case, the distance the nose extends from the turret centerline and Z axis turret face to thissingle touch-off point becomes the tool nose reference point. For such tools, the tool nose referencepoint is located on the tool nose. Some numerical control manuals refer to the tool nose referencepoint as the “imaginary tool tip”. This term can be misleading and is avoided in this manual.

M-504A 2-1

Figure 2.1 - Tool Nose with X and ZAxis Touch-off points.

+X

+Z

Z AxisTouch-Off

Point

X AxisTouch-Off

Point

Tool NoseReference

Point

TI2373

Figure 2.2 - Tool Nose with XAxis Touch-off points.

+X

+Z

TI2374

X AxisTouch-Off

Point

To properly machine the section of the part shown in Figure 2.3, metal removal must take placealong the line connecting X.4 Z0. and X6. Z-.1732 . However, if Tool Nose Radius Compensation is ig-nored and these coordinates are programmed, the resulting cut will be oversize. Block N50 moves thetool nose reference point from X.4 Z.2 to X.4 Z0. and block N60 moves the reference point from X.4Z0. to X6. Z-.1732 . Stock removal does not take place along the path followed by the tool nose refer-ence point (represented by the dashed line) and the resulting cut (represented by the solid line) isoversize. The amount oversize is a function of the angle of the taper and the size of the tool nose ra-dius.

Without automatic Tool Nose Radius Compensation to make the control generate the proper toolpath, the programmer must perform the necessary calculations to offset the effect of the tool noseradius.

As with tapers, any change in the tool nose radius will require program revisions for all contouringinvolving arcs.

With automatic Tool Nose Radius Compensation, the programmer can write a part program as if azero radius tool were being used. Programs are written using coordinates taken directly from theworkpiece. The operator stores the radius value of each tool in the Tool Offset files and the controlmakes all necessary calculations and compensations as the program is executed. If a tool is changed,the operator simply modifies the radius in the Tool Offset file and the control recalculates the compen-sation as the program is executed again. Time consuming manual calculations are eliminated, as isthe threat of large scale part program revisions due to tooling changes.

2-2 M-504A

Figure 2.3 - Example of Oversize Cut Caused byAbsence of Tool Nose radius Compensation

TI2375

C (X.6 Z-.75)

B (X.6 Z-.1732)

A (X.4 Z0.) Start Point(X.4 Z.2)

r=.01

+X

+Z

.1

.1732

30°N40 G01 G99 ;N50 Z0. F.01 ;N60 X.6 Z-.1732 ;N70 Z-.75 ;

Z Zero

CL

30°

TOOL ORIENTATION NUMBER

Before Tool Nose Radius Compensation can be activated in a program, the tool nose radius valueand the tool orientation number must be stored in the tool geometry offset file. The tool orientationnumber describes the center of the tool nose radius relative to the X and Z touch-off points. A diagramof the orientation codes appears in Figure 2.4. A diagram showing the proper signs for tool offsets ap-pears in Figure 2.5.

Refer to Chapter 4 for information on storing tool nose radius values and tool orientation numbers inthe tool offset file from a program.

M-504A 2-3

Figure 2.4 - Tool Orientation Codes

TI2376

+X

+Z

5

4

2

7

8

3

6

1

Main Spindle Turret

Figure 2.5 - Tool Offset Dimension Signs

TI5663

BMT 45 Turret Top Plate

MainSpindle

+X

+Z

+X +Z +X -Z+X +Z +X -Z

Hardinge Turret Top Plate

ACTIVATING TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION

A tool nose radius value and tool orientation number must be activated before entering Tool NoseRadius Compensation mode. Tool nose radius values and tool orientation codes are activated alongwith Tool Offsets by a programmed T word with the data word format T4: Txxyy

Where: xx = Turret Stationyy = Tool Offset Number

A programmed T0 command deactivates all active tool offset data.

A G41 or G42 Preparatory Command is programmed to activate Tool Nose Radius Compensation.This block is called the entry block. The G41 or G42 entry block must be a non-cutting move on bothaxes. At least one axis must move a distance equal to or greater than the radius of the tool nose.

To determine which G code to use, imagine you are sitting on the tool nose facing the direction oftool motion. If the workpiece is on your right, G41 is the correct code. If the workpiece is on your left,G42 is the correct code. Refer to Figures 2.6 and 2.7.

The control has a two block look-ahead capability, which enables the control to complete a com-pensated move with the tool in position to begin the next compensated move. While the currently ac-tive block is being executed, the control searches ahead to read and process the next two data blocks.Refer to Figure 2.8 for a comparison of programmed tool paths with and without Tool Nose RadiusCompensation based on similar workpiece contours.

2-4 M-504A

M-504A 2-5

Figure 2.6 - G41/G42 Diagram: Turret at Main Spindle

+X

TI2378

+Z

+X

+Z

G42G41

CL

CL

CL

CL

Figure 2.7 - G41/G42 Diagram: Turret at Sub-Spindle

TI4174G42G41

+X

+Z

+X

+Z

CL

CL

CL

CL

2-6 M-504A

Figure 2.8 - Tool Path Comparisons

TI2379

CL

Tool CompensationActive

Tool Compensation

Tool CompensationNot Active

CL

CLCL

Tool Compensation

To

ol

Co

mp

en

sa

tio

nT

oo

lC

om

pe

nsa

tio

n

ENTERING AND EXITING THE WORKPIECE WITHTOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION ACTIVE

When entering and exiting the workpiece, axis motion should be perpendicular to the surface of theworkpiece. Refer to Figure 2.9 for an illustration of correct axis motion.

If axis motion is not perpendicular with the surface of the workpiece, the tool may be “boxed in”.When a tool is “boxed in”, it will not reach the programmed end point. Refer to Figure 2.10 for an illus-tration of incorrect axis motion and “boxing the tool in”.

M-504A 2-7

Figure 2.9 - Correct Axis Motion

TI2380

Exit

Entry

Workpiece

G42

G42

CL

Figure 2.10 - Incorrect Axis Motion

TI2381

Exit

Entry

Workpiece

G42

G42

CL

SWITCHING G41/G42 CODE WITH TOOLNOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION ACTIVE

NOTICE

Due to the way in which Tool Nose Radius Compensation is interpolated, G41 orG42 should be programmed in a block with non-cutting linear motion. If Tool NoseRadius Compensation is activated in a block in which cutting is commanded, unde-sirable axis motion may occur.

To switch from G41 to G42 or vice versa while Tool Nose Radius Compensation is active, it is notnecessary to program a G40 to cancel the active code. Programming the desired G41 or G42 will can-cel the active code and activate the new G code. For example, if G41 is active and G42 is pro-grammed, G41 will be canceled and G42 will be activated.

Due to the way Tool Nose Radius Compensation is interpolated, this linear move should usually bea non-cutting move. The notable exception is an axis reversal. Axis reversal is discussed in the nextsection.

2-8 M-504A

AXIS REVERSALS WITH TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION ACTIVE

Axis reversals are possible with Tool NoseRadius Compensation active. As mentioned inthe previous section, an axis reversal repre-sents a case when a G41/G42 switch can occurin a cutting move.

In the sample program segment shown be-low, G41 is activated in the move to Point A(Block N60). Refer to Figure 2.11.

Block N60 establishes the feedrate andmoves the tool nose reference position to point“A” for the facing operation.

Block N70 commands the facing move frompoint “A” to point “C”. The position of the centerof the tool nose radius at the end of block N70 ison the spindle centerline. Therefore, at the endof block N70, the tool nose reference point isone tool nose radius to the -X side of the spindlecenterline.

Block N80 switches the code to G42. No Zaxis motion takes place as a result of theG41/G42 switch. If Tool Compensation was notchanged from G41 to G42 in block N80, the con-trol would assume that the part is still on theright side of the tool and an overcutting alarmwould occur.

Block N90 moves the tool back up the face ofthe part to point “D”.

Block N100 commands the turning movefrom point “D” in the -Z direction.

In summary, axis reversals are possible, butbe aware of the tool nose radius “overshoot” atthe end of the move prior to the reversal.

SAMPLE PROGRAM SEGMENT

N50 G00 G41 X1.2 Z.1 ;

N60 G01 G99 Z0. F.01 ;

N70 X-.02 ;

N80 G42 ;

N90 X.8 ;

N100 Z-.5 ;

M-504A 2-9

Figure 2.11 - Axis Reversal withTool Compensation Active

TI2382

A(X1.2 Z0.)

B(X.8 Z0.)

B’(X.79 Z0.)

C(X0. Z0.)

C’(X-.01 Z0.)

r=.01

D(X.8 Z0.)

C(X0. Z0.)

C’(X-.01 Z0.)

CL

CL

MODES IN WHICH TOOL NOSE RADIUSCOMPENSATION IS NOT PERFORMED

Tool Nose Radius Compensation is not performed in the following automatic cycles:

G74 Automatic Drilling Cycle

G75 Automatic Grooving Cycle

G76 Automatic Threading Cycle

G92 Canned Threading Cycle

If Tool Nose Radius Compensation is active before one of these auto cycles is executed, Tool NoseRadius Compensation is deactivated during the cycle and then reactivated after the cycle iscompleted.

Tool Nose Radius Compensation also is not performed during the G32 Constant LeadThreadcutting mode or the optional G34 Variable Lead Threadcutting mode.

MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES WITH TOOLNOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION ACTIVE

Tool Nose Radius Compensation is not active during G71, G72, or G73 roughing cycles, but is ac-tive during the G70 finishing cycle. To use Tool Nose Radius Compensation in the multiple repetitivefinishing cycle, Tool Nose Radius Compensation must be activated in the move to the start point.

If the same tool is used to rough and finish the workpiece, the move to the start point occurs prior tothe roughing cycle. Compensation will be suppressed until the finishing cycle is executed. If a differenttool is used to finish turn the workpiece, compensation is activated in the move to the start point prior tothe G70 cycle.

2-10 M-504A

CANNED CYCLES WITH TOOL NOSERADIUS COMPENSATION ACTIVE

Tool Nose Radius Compensation can be used with the G90 Canned Turning Cycle and the G94Canned Facing Cycle, but it must be activated prior to the block that specifies the G90 or G94 cannedcycle. If Tool Nose Radius Compensation is used in either cycle, axis motion is as follows:

G90 CANNED TURNING CYCLE

Refer to Figure 2.12

1. The tool moves from the start point to thecompensated position to begin the turn.

2. The tool ends the turn at the compensatedposition to begin facing the shoulder.

3. At the end of the facing move, the tool nosereference point is at the X coordinate of thestart point.

4. The tool then returns to the start point. At theend of the move, the tool nose reference pointis at the coordinates of the start point.

G94 CANNED FACING CYCLE

Refer to Figure 2.13

1. The tool moves from the start point to thecompensated position to begin the turn.

2. The tool ends the face at the compensatedposition to begin the turn.

3. At the end of the turn, the tool nose referencepoint is at the Z coordinate of the start point.

4. The tool then returns to the start point. At theend of the move, the tool nose reference pointis at the coordinates of the start point.

M-504A 2-11

Figure 2.12 - Axis Motion Duringa G90 Turning Cycle

StartPoint

CL

TI2383

Rapid Traverse

Feed

Figure 2.13 - Axis Motion Duringa G94 Turning Cycle

TI2384

StartPoint

Rapid Traverse

Feed

CL

TOOL MOVED AWAY FROM THE WORKPIECE WITHTOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION ACTIVE

If a program is stopped during the execution of contouring with Tool Nose Radius Compensationactive and the tool is moved away from the workpiece, either by a manual Jog operation or an ManualData Input command, do not resume the cycle from this new position. Reset the program and performa Program Restart operation.

TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION RELATED ALARMS

ALARM 033

A point of intersection cannot be determined for Tool Nose Radius Compensation.

ALARM 034

Entry or exit move is programmed in G02 or G03 mode. The control must be in G00 orG01 mode to activate or deactivate Tool Nose Radius Compensation.

ALARM 035

Skip function (G31) has been programmed with Tool Nose Radius Compensation active.

ALARM 038

Arc start point or end point coincides with the arc center. The probable cause of the alarmis a G02/G03 programming error. It is possible that a G01 move was not programmed aftercutting the arc.

ALARM 039

An Insert Chamfer or Insert Arc was commanded in an entry block, exit block, or in aswitch between G41 and G42. The program may cause overcutting to occur.

ALARM 040

Overcutting will occur with Tool Nose Radius Compensation active and a G90 or G94canned cycle programmed.

ALARM 041

Overcutting will occur because of one of the following conditions:

1. A programmed groove or inside corner is smaller than the tool nose radius.

2. The direction of the tool nose reference point is between 90 degrees and 270 degreesdifferent than the programmed path.

2-12 M-504A

DEACTIVATING TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION

Program a G40 along with a non-cutting linear move in both axes to deactivate Tool Nose RadiusCompensation. An alarm message will appear if:

• Circular motion is programmed in the exit block.

• Insert Chamfer or Insert Radius is programmed in the exit block.

TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION PROGRAMMING RULES

1. Store tool nose radius values and orientation codes along side the appropriate offset numbersin the Tool Offset file. The offset must be activated prior to activation of Tool Nose RadiusCompensation.

2. To activate Tool Nose Radius Compensation, program a G41 or G42 along with non-cuttinglinear motion in both axes. The motion on either axis must be equal to or greater than the radiusvalue of the tool nose. To determine which G code to use, image yourself sitting on the tool tipfacing in the direction of the tool motion. If the workpiece is on your right, the correct code isG41. If the workpiece is on your left, the correct code is G42.

3. Entry to and exit from the workpiece should be perpendicular to the surface of the workpiece.

4. To switch from G41 to G42 and vice versa, program the appropriate G code in a block by itselfbefore motion in the other direction.

5. Tool Nose Radius Compensation is not performed in the following modes: G32, G34, G71,G72, G73, G74, G75, G76, and G92.

6. When Tool Nose Radius Compensation is active, only one data block which does not containaxis motion may be programmed between blocks which contain axis motion. If two or morenon-motion blocks are programmed consecutively, undesirable machine behavior in the formof under-cutting or over-cutting may occur.

7. If Tool Nose Radius Compensation is to be used with G90 or G94 canned cycles, Tool NoseRadius Compensation must be activated prior to the block that specifies the G90 or G94 cycle.

8. If Tool Nose Radius Compensation is to be used with a G70 multiple repetitive finishing cycle,Tool Nose Radius Compensation must be activated in the move to the start point prior to theexecution of the G70 cycle.

9. When clearing the workpiece, axis motion should move the tool nose a distance of at least threetimes the tool nose diameter from the workpiece.

M-504A 2-13

- NOTES -

2-14 M-504A

CHAPTER 3 - LINEAR AND CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION

FEEDRATE

Feedrate is specified by the value after the word address F. This value can be expressed ininches/millimeters per minute (G98 mode) or as inches/millimeters per revolution (G99 mode). Themaximum programmable feedrates are listed below. Programmed feedrates greater than the maxi-mum feedrate allowed will default to the maximum value upon program execution.

The maximum programmable feedrate for the E, X, Y, and Z axes is:

150 inches per minute

3810 millimeters per minute

To convert in/min [mm/min] to in/rev [mm/rev], divide the in/min [mm/min] feedrate by the pro-grammed spindle speed:

English: inches/minute ÷ revolutions/minute = inches/revolution

Metric: millimeters/minute ÷ revolution/minute = millimeters/revolution

To convert in/rev [mm/rev] to in/min [mm/min], multiply the in/rev [mm/rev] feedrate by the pro-grammed spindle speed:

English: inch/revolution x revolution/minute = inches/minute

Metric: millimeter/revolution x revolution/minute = millimeters/minute

To override programmed feedrates, use the Feedrate Override switch. The Feedrate Overrideswitch is disabled during threading cycles, except when set to 0%. To override rapid traverse rate, usethe Rapid Override switch.

NOTICE

If the Feedrate Override switch is set to 0% during a threading cycle, X and Z axismotion will STOP.

M-504A 3-1

ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING

In absolute programming, the E, X, Y, and Z data words are used to specify the end point of a moveas a coordinate on the work coordinate system. For example, the following command calls for a linearmove to position the tool nose reference point at X.25 Z5. on the work coordinate system:

G01 G98 X.25 Z5. F10. ;

In incremental programming, the U, V, and W words are used to specify the end point of a move asan incremental distance from the current position on the work coordinate system.

U = Incremental distance on the X axis

U- = Toward the operator

U+ = Away from the operator

V = Incremental distance on the Y axis

V- = Toward the machine bed

V+ = Away from the machine bed

W = Incremental distance on the Z axis

W- = Toward the face of the main spindle

W+ = Away from the face of the main spindle

For example, the following command calls for a linear move in which the cross slide moves .25inches away from the operator and the carriage moves 2.5 inches toward the spindle face:

G01 G98 U.5 W-2.5 F10. ;

Absolute and Incremental commands may be used together in a block. For example, the followingcommand causes the cross slide to move .375 inches toward the operator from the current cross slideposition and also positions the carriage at Z coordinate point 6.5 on the work coordinate system:

G01 G98 U-.75 Z6.5 F10. ;

If both X and U, Y and V, or Z and W are programmed in the same block, the one specified last is ef-fective. For example, the following block causes the carriage to move .5 inches away from the spindleface from the current carriage position. (The Z word is ignored).

G01 G98 Z.4 W.5 F10. ;

3-2 M-504A

INTERPOLATION

Interpolation describes the function of the control when it decodes a block of programmed datacommanding axis motion. Given the type of motion, the feedrate, and the end point, the control de-fines the tool path by generating a series of intermediate points between the current slide position andthe programmed end point. In the case of tapers and arcs, it also calculates the proper feedrate foreach axis to produce the correct tool path.

There are two standard types of interpolation performed by the control:

Linear Interpolation

Circular Interpolation

LINEAR INTERPOLATION

Linear Interpolation is commanded by the G01 command. G01 is a modal code, which means that itwill stay active until a G00 code (positioning) or a G02/G03 code (Circular Interpolation) is pro-grammed. Therefore, it is necessary to program a G01 to return to Linear Interpolation from a cur-rently active G00, G02, or G03 code because these codes are also modal.

With G01 active, program blocks command the tool to move in a straight line from its current posi-tion to a programmed end point. This end point is specified as either a coordinate position (X, Z) on thework coordinate system or as an incremental movement (U, W) from the current slide position. Forexample:

G01 G99 X.25 Z2. F.008

Slides move from current position to work coordinate X.25 Z2.

G01 G99 U.4 W-1. F.008

X axis moves .2 inches in the positive direction as Z axis moves 1 inch in the negative direction.

Insert Chamfer or Corner Radius

- NOTE -

Insert chamfer/insert corner radius cannot be programmed in a threadcutting block.

If two linear (G01) moves intersect, it is possible to insert a chamfer or an arc between them withoutadding a third program block or switching from linear interpolation to circular interpolation and backagain. The following rules apply:

1. Both moves must be a G01 move.

2. The end point of the first block is the point where the linear moves would intersect if there wasno chamfer or corner radius inserted. It is not the start point of the chamfer or corner radius.

M-504A 3-3

INSERT CHAMFER

To insert a chamfer, program a “,C” word in the first of the two linear move (G01) blocks. These twolinear moves do not have to be perpendicular to each other. The value of “,C” is unsigned. The (,)comma must precede the C word.

INSERT CORNER RADIUS

To insert an arc between two linear (G01) moves, program an “,R” word in the first motion block.The value of the “,R” word is the radius of the arc to be inserted. The value of “,R” is unsigned. The (,)comma must precede the R word.

SAMPLE PROGRAM

- NOTE -

The control will try to blend the inserted chamfer into the two linear moves. The in-serted radius MUST BLEND into the linear move on each side of it.

Figure 3.1 illustrates an Insert Chamfer/Corner Radius programming example and Figure 3.2 illus-trates the Insert Chamfer/Corner Radius programming format.

ALARM MESSAGES FOR INSERT CHAMFER/INSERT CORNER RADIUS

There are a number of alarm messages generated by the control that relate to Insert Chamfer / In-sert Corner Radius. Refer to the Fanuc operator’s manual for an explanation of these alarmmessages.

3-4 M-504A

Figure 3.1 - Insert Chamfer / Corner Radius Sample Program

TI2367

1.50

1.00

.50

.01

1.00

.50

N15 G01 G99 X0. Z0. F.008 ;

N20 X.5 ,C.01 ;

N25 Z-.5 ,C.01 ;

N30 X1. ,R.01 ;

N35 W-.5 ,R.01 ;

N40 X1.5 ,R.01 ;

N45 Z-1.5 ;

CL

.01

.01

.01

.01 R

.01 R

.01 R

M-504A 3-5

Figure 3.2 - Insert Chamfer / Insert Corner Radius

TI2368A

X(U)___ ,C___ ;Z(W)___ ;

,C ,C

,C ,C

,C ,C

,C ,C

Z(W)___ ,C___ ;X(U)___ ;

+X

+Z

+X

+Z

+X

+Z

+X

+Z

Insert Chamfer

Insert RadiusX(U)___ ,R___ ;Z(W)___ ;

,R ,R

,R ,R

,R ,R

,R ,R

Z(W)___ ,R___ ;X(U)___ ;

CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION

In Circular Interpolation the control uses the information contained in a single data block to gener-ate an arc. There are two types of Circular Interpolation:

Clockwise Arc (G02)

Counterclockwise Arc (G03)

The Electronics Industries Association (EIA) defines clockwise and counter-clockwise arcs asfollows:

G02 Clockwise Arc

An arc generated by the coordinated motion of two axes in which curvature of the path of the toolwith respect to the workpiece is clockwise when viewing the plane of motion in the negative directionof the perpendicular axis. Stated another way, tool motion during a G02 arc will appear clockwise, asviewed by the machine operator.

G03 Counter-Clockwise Arc

An arc generated by the coordinated motion of two axes in which curvature of the path of the toolwith respect to the workpiece is counterclockwise when viewing the plane of motion in the negative di-rection of the perpendicular axis. Stated another way, tool motion during a G03 arc will appear coun-terclockwise, as viewed by the machine operator.

Besides containing the G code for the rotational direction of tool movement, the data block specify-ing circular interpolation must contain information indicating the position of the arc end point and thelocation of the arc center. Data words used to specify these parameters are summarized in Figure 3.3.

Note the differences in the definitions depending on whether Tool Nose Radius Compensation isactive or inactive. As indicated with Tool Nose Radius Compensation active, the location of the arcend point and arc center is independent of the tool nose radius. These dimensions are taken from thepart and the control performs the necessary compensation to generate the proper arc. Refer to Chap-ter 2 for additional information.

3-6 M-504A

Programming Notes for Circular Interpolation

1. In circular interpolation, the feedrate along the arc (feedrate tangent to the arc) is held within±2% of the programmed feedrate.

2. If I and K are used to indicate the arc center, and either I or K is equal to zero, that word may beomitted.

3. If I and K are used to indicate the arc center and both I and K are programmed as zero with ToolNose Radius Compensation inactive, the tool will move linearly from the arc start point to thearc end point. However, if I and K are programmed as zero with Tool Nose RadiusCompensation active, an alarm message will appear on the control display screen. The alarmindicates that overcutting will occur because the arc start point coincides with the arc center.

4. If I, K, and R are programmed in the same data block, the control will ignore the I and K andgenerate the arc using R to locate the arc center.

5. If R is used to locate an arc center, a zero degree arc is assumed (no tool motion occurs) if anyof the following three conditions occurs:

A) If X and Z are the coordinates of the start point.

B) If X, U, Z, and W are omitted.

C) If U and W are programmed as zero (U0. W0.).

6. If R is used to indicate the arc center, but the R value is less than half the distance from the arcstart point to the arc end point, R is ignored and a half circle is produced which connects the arcstart point and arc end point.

7. Circular Interpolation may be switched without canceling with G01.

8. G01 (Linear Interpolation) must be programmed to cancel Circular Interpolation.

M-504A 3-7

3-8 M-504A

Parameter Command Definition

RotationalDirection

G02

G03

Definition(Tool Nose Radius

Compensation Not Active)

Definition(Tool Nose Radius

Compensation Active)

Location ofArc Center

I,K

Incremental distance from the center ofthe tool nose radius at the start point to thearc center.

IMPORTANT: This value must be signed.(This incremental distance depends onthe size of the tool nose radius.)

Refer to the example shown in Figure 3.4.

Incremental distance from arc start pointto the arc center, as measured on theworkpiece.

IMPORTANT: This value must be signed.(This incremental distance remains thesame regardless of the size of the toolnose radius.)


R

Radius of the arc. This radius is measuredfrom the center of the tool nose radius tothe arc center. This value is unsigned.(This distance depends on the size of thetool nose radius.)

NOTE: The R word can only be used whenthe arc is 180 degrees.


Radius of the arc. This radius is measuredfrom the arc start point to the arc center, asmeasured on the workpiece. This value isunsigned. (This distance is independent ofthe size of the tool nose radius.)

NOTE: The R word can only be used whenthe arc is 180 degrees.


Location ofArc End

Point

X,Z

Coordinates of the tool nose referencepoint to the arc end point. (Thesecoordinates depend on the size of the toolnose radius and geometric configurationof the tool nose.)


Coordinates of the arc end point, asmeasured on the workpiece. (Thesecoordinates are independent of the size ofthe tool nose radius and geometricconfiguration of the tool nose.)


U,W

Incremental distance from the position ofthe tool nose reference point at the arcstart point to the position of the tool nosereference point at the arc end point.(These coordinates depend on the size ofthe tool nose radius and geometricconfiguration of the tool nose.)


Incremental distance from arc start pointto the arc end point, as measured on theworkpiece. (This incremental distance isindependent of the size of the tool noseradius and geometric configuration of thetool nose.)


Figure 3.3 - Circular Interpolation Parameters

+X

+Z

+X

+Z

M-504A 3-9

Figure 3.4 - Arc Center Parameters(Tool Nose Radius Compensation Not Active)

TI2369

K

R

I

Arc Center

CL

K

R

I

Arc CenterCL

+X

+Z

Figure 3.5 - Arc Center Parameters(Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active)

TI2371

K

R

I

Arc Center

CL

K

R

I

Arc CenterCL

+X

+Z

3-10 M-504A

Figure 3.6 - Arc End Point Parameters(Tool Nose Radius Compensation Not Active)

TI2370

W

X,Z

U

Arc Center

CL

+X

+Z

CL

W

X,Z

U

Arc Center

Figure 3.7 - Arc End Point Parameters(Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active)

TI2372

W

X,Z

U

Arc Center

CL

W

X,Z

U

CLArc Center

+X

+Z

- NOTES -

M-504A 3-11

- NOTES -

3-12 M-504A

CHAPTER 4 - WORK SHIFT AND TOOL OFFSETS

WORK SHIFT

At the beginning of each separate tool operation in a part program, the program will call the requiredwork shift from the appropriate macro variable register and load the work shift value into the Z axiswork shift file.

Once the work shift value is copied from the macro variable register to the Z axis work shift file, thework shift offset moves the Z axis origin of the work coordinate system. The value stored in the workshift file is active at all times.

NOTICE

The Work Shift file contains an E, X, Y and Z offset register. The X and Y axis regis-ters in the Work Shift file should be set to zero at all times.

The value entered into the Z axis Work Shift register from the macro variable registermust be a negative number.

- NOTE -

Refer to Chapter 14 for information on Z axis work shift for sub-spindle operation.

The E axis work shift will be set by the machine operator.

The values stored in the Work Shift file are added to the Absolute Position registers, thus shiftingthe origin of the work coordinate system by the amount stored in the Work Shift file. For example, if theZ axis is at 14 inches and the operator stores Z-2.5 in the Work Shift file, the Absolute Position regis-ters would then display Z11.5 [14 +(- 2.5)].

Immediately after a Work Shift value is stored, the control adds it to the Absolute Position registers.The registers will remain modified until the Work Shift offset values are set to zero by the operator orfrom the part program.

The part length is stored as the Z Work Shift offset. Typically the X and Y axis Work Shift offsetsARE NOT USED (set to zero). Since the Work Shift value is added to the Absolute Position registers,the part length is stored as a negative Z value. With the part length stored in the Work Shift file, the ori-gin of the Absolute coordinate system is the intersection of the part face and the spindle centerline.

MACRO VARIABLE ASSIGNMENTS

Macro variable register #500 will contain the work shift value for all main spindle operations.

Macro variable register #501 will contain the work shift value for all sub-spindle operations.

STORING WORK SHIFT OFFSETS

The values for the work shift offsets can be stored in the macro variable registers by either of the fol-lowing methods:

• Manually stored by the machine operator at the manual data input keyboard. Refer to theoperator’s manual (M-505) for information on storing data in the macro variable registersfrom the manual data input keyboard.

• Automatically input from the part program. Refer to the section that follows.

M-504A 4-1

LOADING THE MACRO VARIABLES FROM THE PART PROGRAM

The main spindle and sub-spindle Z axis Work Shift offsets can be loaded directly into macro vari-able registers 500 and 501 from the part program.

Main Spindle

Programming Format: #500=-___ ;

Programming Example: #500=-4.250 ;

Sub-Spindle [Option]

Programming Format: #501=-___ ;

Programming Example: #501=-12.250 ;

LOADING A WORK SHIFT OFFSET FROM THE MACRO VARIABLE REGISTERS

The G10 command line will be programmed at the beginning of each tool operation.

NOTICE

The Work Shift file contains an E, X, Y and Z offset register. The X and Y axis regis-ters in the Work Shift file should be set to zero at all times.

- NOTE -

This section discusses only the command line structure required to transfer datafrom the macro variable registers to the work shift files.

Programming Format:

G10 P0 X0 Y0 Z#500 ; (Main spindle work shift offset)

G10 P0 X0 Y0 Z#501 ; (Sub-spindle work shift offset)

P0: Selects the Work Shift offset as the offset file to be modified.

X: Work Shift offset value on the X axis (absolute)

Y: Work Shift offset value on the Y axis (absolute)

Z: Work Shift offset value on the Z axis (absolute)

In an absolute command, the value in the specified macro variable register is set as the Z axis WorkShift offset.

In an incremental command, the value specified in address W is added to the current Z axis WorkShift offset. Use of this command in a program causes the Z axis work shift to advance incrementally.

4-2 M-504A

TOOLING AND TOOL OFFSETS

TOOLING

Top Plate Configurations

Hardinge T-42 lathes are available with the following top plate configurations:

• 16 station BMT 45

• 12 station Hardinge English

• 12 station Hardinge Metric

Hardinge T-51 and T-65 lathes are available with the following top plate configurations:

• 12 station BMT 55

• 12 station Hardinge English

• 12 station Hardinge Metric

Left Hand/Right Hand Tooling

Hardinge Inc. recommends that all cutting forces be directed into the machine base, which will re-sult in maximum tool life.

Making the selection between left-hand or right-hand tooling should be based on:

• the position of the tool in relation to the spindle

• the direction of spindle rotation

M-504A 4-3

TOOL OFFSETS

Introduction

The Tool Offset file is made up of two types of offsets: Tool Geometry Offsets and Tool Wear Off-sets. The control has the capacity to store 99 sets of each offset type (Offsets 01 through 99) in sepa-rate files.

NOTICE

Information stored in the Geometry and Wear Offset files is NOT automatically con-verted into the correct units when a programmed G20 or G21 command switchesprogramming resolution from inch to metric or vice versa. Offsets in the desired unitof measure should be entered after the control has been set to the proper mode,inch (G20) vs metric (G21). If a G20 or G21 is programmed after the tool offsets areentered, the decimal point will be shifted one place to the left or right. If start-upmode is G20 (inch) and the program switches to G21 (metric), the offset decimalpoint will shift one place to the right. If start-up mode is G21 (metric) and the pro-gram switches to G20 (inch), the offset decimal point will shift one place to the left.

The following information is stored in the Tool Geometry Offset file:

X Tool Dimension

Diameter distance from the X axis tool touch-off point to the turret reference point.Sign is determined by the direction from the tool nose reference point to the turret refer-ence point.

Z Tool Dimension

Distance from the Z axis tool touch-off point to the turret reference point. Sign is de-termined by the direction from the tool nose reference point to the turret reference point.

- NOTE -

Refer to Chapter 2 for a description of the tool nose reference point.

Refer to Chapter 5 for a description of coordinate system reference positions.

Tool Orientation:

The orientation code describes the location of the center of the tool nose in relation tothe tool nose reference point.

Tool Nose Radius Value:

The distance from the cutting edge to the center of the tool nose radius.

4-4 M-504A

The Tool Wear Offset file allows the operator to enter minor dimensional changes for each tool tocompensate for tool wear. The Tool Wear Offset files coincide with the Geometry Offset files. When atool offset is activated, the control looks at the corresponding Tool Wear offset and performs the nec-essary corrections to compensate for tool wear.

The Tool Offset files allow the operator to easily make corrections resulting from tool changes, thuslarge-scale modifications to the part programs are eliminated.

Tool Offsets are activated by the last two digits in the T word. The first two digits specify the turretstation. The data word format for the T word is T4.

Tool Nose Radius Value and Orientation Code

If Tool Nose Radius Compensation is to be used, the tool nose radius value (Figure 4.1) and thetool orientation code (Figure 4.2) must be entered for each tool that uses Tool Nose Radius Compen-sation.

Refer to the operator’s manual (M-505) for information on inputting tool nose radius values and ori-entation codes from the control keyboard.

M-504A 4-5

Figure 4.1 - Tool Nose Radius Illustration

Tool NoseRadius Value

TI3638

Figure 4.2 - Tool Orientation Codes

TI2376

+X

+Z

5

4

2

7

8

3

6

1

Main Spindle Turret

Storing Tool Offsets from the Part Program

Tool Offsets may be input directly from the part program by using the G10 code.

Programming Format:

G10 P_____ X_____ Y_____ Z_____ R_____ Q_____ ; or

G10 P_____ U_____ V_____ W_____ C_____ Q_____;

P: Selects the Tool Offset file to be modified.

For Wear Offset: P = Wear Offset Number

For Geometry Offset: P = 100 + Geometry Offset Number (2 place Format)

Examples of P words used for Geometry Offsets:

For Geometry Offset #1: P10001

For Wear Offset #1: P1

For Geometry Offset #15: P10015

For Wear Offset #15: P15

X: Offset value on the X axis (absolute)

Y: Offset value on the Y axis (absolute)

Z: Offset value on the Z axis (absolute)

U: Offset value on the X axis (incremental)

V: Offset value on the Y axis (incremental)

W: Offset value on the Z axis (incremental)

R: Tool nose radius offset value (absolute) †

C: Tool nose radius offset value (incremental) †

Q: Tool nose orientation code (Refer to Figure 4.2) †

† Used for X and Z axis only

Absolute and incremental values for different axes may be programmed in the same offset datablock.

Examples: G10 P_____ U_____ Z_____ R_____ Q_____ ;

G10 P_____ X_____ W_____ R_____ Q_____ ;

4-6 M-504A

Activating Tool Offsets

Tool offsets are activated by a T word having the format T4. The first two numbers select the turretstation that is to be indexed to the cutting position. The last two numbers specify which tool offsets inthe tool geometry and wear offset tables are to be used with the selected turret position.

Example: N0120 T0622 ;

In data block N0120, turret station 6 will be indexed to the cutting position and the tool offsets storedon line 22 in the tool geometry and wear offset tables will be activated.

The leading zero in the T word may be omitted:

T0101 = T101

NOTICE

If tool offsets are not to be called up with a turret index, the last two numbers in the Tword MUST be “00" (Example: T0100). If no numbers are programmed in the lasttwo places, the control will use the numbers programmed in the first two places asthe tool offset and the turret will not index (Example: T01 will be interpreted by thecontrol as T0001).

When a T word with a tool offset is programmed in a block containing axis motion, the tool offsetmotion is computed with the programmed axis position, causing the slide(s) to move directly to thecorrected axis position at the programmed feedrate.

When a T word with a tool offset is programmed in a block without axis motion, the tool offset movewill occur in the next block containing axis motion. The tool offset motion is computed with the pro-grammed axis position, causing the turret reference point to move directly to the corrected axis posi-tion at the programmed feedrate.

Canceling Tool Offsets

Tool offsets are deactivated when the machine is first powered up or when the Reset key ispressed.

The T0 command is used to cancel tool offsets. Tool offset cancellation (T0) will occur in the nextprogrammed axis movement for the X and Z axes. The next programmed X axis movement will cancelthe X axis offset and move the turret reference point to the programmed X axis position. The next pro-grammed Z axis movement will cancel the Z axis offset and move the turret reference point to the pro-grammed Z axis position.

M-504A 4-7

- NOTES -

4-8 M-504A

CHAPTER 5 - WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM

HOW THE CONTROL POSITIONS THE SLIDES

To understand work coordinate programming, it is helpful to consider how the control positions theslides. We will begin by examining how the slides are positioned on a manual lathe. At the onset thismay seem like an in-depth discussion of the obvious, but bear with us, the point of this exercise is toshow the similarities between the operation of a manual lathe and a CNC lathe.

On a manual lathe, the carriage and cross slide are positioned by manually turning a handle at-tached to a lead screw. The operator positions each slide by reading the dial attached to each handle.Let’s assume that on the manual lathe each slide has 10 pitch lead screw. Therefore, each revolutionof the lead screw advances the slide .1 inch. If the dial has 100 graduations, each graduation equals1/100 of a revolution or .001 inch slide travel.

If the operator wants to move a slide .306 inch, he turns the handle in the desired direction andcounts three and 6/100 revolutions of the dial. How close to 6/100 of a revolution he gets largely de-pends on his ability to manually position the dial at the proper graduation.

Like the slides on the manual lathe, the CNC lathe carriage and cross slide are positioned by rotat-ing a lead screw. However, there are no handles to rotate the lead screws on the CNC lathe. Instead,each lead screw is rotated by a servo motor. The revolutions of each screw are counted by an en-coder. The encoder continuously monitors the radial position of the lead screw. Information from theencoder is fed to the control where it is converted into useful output information to produce the correctfeedrate and slide position.

As the lead screw rotates so does the encoder shaft, which causes the encoder to generate posi-tioning and velocity data. This data is fed to the control for positioning and velocity control functions.

To move a slide .306 inch, we enter a coded instruction into the control specifying type of motion(linear or circular), velocity (feedrate), and distance. (Distance can be indicated as an incremental dis-tance from the current position or as a coordinate which represents the endpoint of the move.) Inter-nally, the control decodes the instruction and converts the command into a voltage which is sent to theservo motor of the slide. As the servo motor turns the lead screw, the lead screw turns the encodershaft and the encoder produces positioning and velocity data. This data is feed back to the controlwhere it is used to monitor slide motion.

The distance from the current slide position to the commanded end point is known as the DistanceTo Go. Before any slide motion takes place in our example, the distance to go is .306 inch. This valueis stored in a register in the control. As the lead screw rotates, the control receives counts from the en-coder and subtracts them from the Distance To Go register. When the Distance To Go registers countdown to zero, the control knows that the slide has moved .3060 (±.0001) inches.

M-504A 5-1

This feedback arrangement, in which the actual slide movement is compared with the commandoriginating from the control, is known as a closed loop system. Besides the closed loop system forslide position discussed above, there is also a closed loop system for feedrate, which makes use ofthe electrical pulses produced by the encoder.

By making use of the feedback information it receives from the encoder, the control can accuratelymove a slide a commanded distance at a commanded feedrate.

RECTANGULAR COORDINATES

To relate the position of the tool to a position on the workpiece, a system must be set up where thelocation of a given point can be defined relative to a known reference point. Working with mutually per-pendicular axes (X, Y, and Z), rectangular coordinates (also known as Cartesian coordinates) areused to describe the location of any point at which the tool can be positioned.

Refer to page 1-6 for axis definitions.

To apply the use of rectangular coordinates when programming CNC lathes, it is necessary to de-fine coordinate system reference positions.

COORDINATE SYSTEM REFERENCE POSITIONS

Figures 5.1 and 5.2 illustrate the axis reference positions.

MACHINE ZERO POSITION

The intersection of the main spindle face and the spindle centerline. This position never changes.

TURRET AXIS REFERENCE POSITION

The turret axis reference position is the location to which the specified axes (X, Y, Z) will move whena G28 command is executed. This position never changes. Refer to Chapter 1 for information on pro-gramming the G28 command.

Refer to Appendix One for the turret axis reference position coordinates.

TURRET REFERENCE LOCATION

The intersection of the turret face toward the spindle centerline and the centerline of the tool holdermounting location. This location can be modified through the use of tool offsets.

SUB-SPINDLE OR TAILSTOCK AXIS REFERENCE POSITION

The sub-spindle or tailstock axis reference position is the location to which the E axis will movewhen a G28 command is executed. This position never changes. Refer to Chapter 1 for information onprogramming the G28 command.

Refer to Appendix One for the sub-spindle or tailstock axis reference position coordinate.

SUB-SPINDLE OR TAILSTOCK REFERENCE LOCATION

The intersection of the spindle centerline and the face of the sub-spindle or tailstock.

5-2 M-504A

M-504A 5-3

Figure 5.1 - Coordinate System Reference Positions(BMT Turret Top Plate)

TI5664A

Machine Zero Position

Turret Reference Location

Turret AxisReference Position

NOTE:X, Z, and E axes not shown at reference position.

+X

+Z

CL

-ESub-Spindle or TailstockReference Location

Sub-Spindle or Tailstock Axis Reference Position

+E

Figure 5.2 - Coordinate System Reference Positions(Hardinge Turret Top Plate)

TI5665A


Turret Reference Location

Turret AxisReference Position

NOTE:X, Z, and E axes not shown at reference position.

+X

+Z

CL

-E +ESub-Spindle or TailstockReference Location

Sub-Spindle or Tailstock Axis Reference Position

POSITION REGISTERS

Press the Position key; then, press the ALL soft key to view the following position registers on thecontrol display screen:

AbsoluteDistance to GoMachineRelative

- NOTE -

The “Distance To Go” registers are only displayed in Automatic or Manual Data Inputmode.

MACHINE POSITION REGISTERS

The Machine Position registers always display the “true” axis position of the turret reference loca-tion relative to the machine zero position. Active tool offsets and work shift values have no affect onthe Machine Position display.


ABSOLUTE POSITION REGISTERS

The Absolute Position registers, which can be modified, are probably of greater interest to the pro-grammer and operator. To simplify programming, the work coordinate system can be modifiedthrough the use of a work shift and tool offsets to relate the tool nose position to coordinates on theworkpiece.

The work shift offset can be used to move the origin of the work coordinate system asneeded. The work shift is typically used to set the origin (X0. Z0.) to the intersection of thespindle centerline and the face of the workpiece.

The tool offsets can be used to move the turret reference location to the tool nose posi-tion.


- NOTE -

For additional information, refer to Feedrate, Absolute and Incremental Pro-gramming, and Linear Interpolation, in Chapter 3.

5-4 M-504A

M-504A 5-5

Figure 5.3 - Position Display Comparison:Main Spindle Operation with Tool Offsets and Work Shift Active

TI5666

CL


Z Axis Machine Position

Z Axis Absolute Position

X AxisMachinePosition

X AxisAbsolute Position

Tool NosePosition

Figure 5.4 - Position Display Comparison:Sub-Spindle Operation with Tool Offsets and Work Shift Active

TI5667Machine Zero Position

Z Axis Absolute Position

Tool NosePosition

Z Axis Machine Position

X AxisMachinePosition

X AxisAbsolute Position

CL

- NOTES -

5-6 M-504A

CHAPTER 6 - MACHINING CYCLES

G90 CANNED TURNING CYCLE

The G90 Canned Turning Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of defining multipleturning passes by specifying only the depth of cut for each pass. The operation may be either astraight turn or a taper turn.

Figure 6.1 and its accompanying program illustrate an elementary part on the main spindle which isto have a 1 inch long, .5 inch diameter turned on a workpiece having a diameter of 1 inch. The part faceis set to Z0 by the G10 command in block N20; therefore, all turning passes will be in the minus Zdirection.

The X and Z axis tool offsets are activated through the Tool Offset selection in block N50. Turretstation #1 is selected and Tool Offset #1 is activated. The Tool Offset allows the programmer to pro-gram the X axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to the spindle centerline and Z axisposition of the tool tip as the actual position relative to Z0 on the machine coordinate system. If a Z axisWork Shift is active (G10 command), the Z axis position of the tool tip will be positioned in relation tothe shifted Z0, as established by the Work Shift offset.

Since all dimensions are in inch mode, G20 is entered in block N10. This assures the correct formatin case the previously executed program was in metric data input mode (G21).

EXAMPLE 1: G90 STRAIGHT TURNING (Figure 6.1)

N10 G20 ; N90 G1 G99 G90 X.875 Z-1. F.02 ;N1 (Operator Message) ; N100 X.75 ;N20 G10 P0 Z#500 ; N110 X.625 ;N30 G97 S1000 M13 P1 ; N120 X.532 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N130 X.5 ;N50 T0101 ; N140 G1 ;N60 X1.5 Z.1 ; N150 M98 P1 ;N70 G50 S3800 ; N160 M1 ;N80 G96 S1000 ; N170 M30 ;

M-504A 6-1

Figure 6.1 - G90 Canned Turning Cycle: Straight Turn

TI1600

2.735

1.100

.500

1.000 .100

Start Point

1.000

.500.735

ChuckFace

SpindleFace

CL

The cutting tool path is a box pattern; and, because the Start Point is also the point to which the toolreturns on the return path, the Start Point in the X direction was placed at a distance greater than .5inches from the spindle centerline. This assures that the tool will completely face the workpiece shoul-der on each pass.

The G90 Preparatory Command is specified in block N90 together with G99 (inch/rev feed), the firstpass tool tip position relative to the spindle centerline, the length of cut, and the feedrate. In subse-quent turning cycle blocks (N100 through N130) it is only necessary to specify the tool tip position rela-tive to the spindle centerline for each pass. Feedrate and spindle speed changes can also beprogrammed in these blocks. The Feedrate Override switch is active during the turning passes. To de-activate G90 mode, program another Group 1 G-code. (Refer to the G code chart located in AppendixTwo.)

The approach and return paths are executed at rapid traverse rate. This rate can be varied with theRapid Override switch.

If Constant Surface Speed or Tool Nose Radius Compensation is to be used, the parametersMUST be entered prior to the G90 block.

In cases where U and W commands are used in place of X and Z, make certain each command hasthe correct sign.

EXAMPLE 2: G90 TAPER TURNING (Figure 6.2)

N10 G20 ; N110 X1.5359 ;N1 (Operator Message) ; N120 X1.4109 ;N20 G10 P0 Z#500 ; N130 X1.2859 ;N30 G97 S1000 M13 P1 ; N140 X1.1609 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N150 X1.0671 ;N50 T0101 ; N160 X1.0359 ;N60 X2. Z.2 ; N170 G1 ;N70 G50 S3800 ; N180 M98 P1 ;N80 G96 S1000 ; N190 M1 ;N90 G1 G98 G42 X1.76 Z.1 F200. ; N200 M30 ;N100 G99 G90 X1.6609 Z-1. R-.29474 F.004 ;

6-2 M-504A

Figure 6.2 - G90 Canned Turning Cycle: Tapered Turn

TI2670

1.250

ChuckFace

CL

1.760

1.1251.0359

.500

2.735

1.000

1.6609

SpindleFace

.500.735 .100

Start Point

15°

All rules applying to straight turning in the G90 Canned Turning mode also apply to taper turning inthis mode.

Figure 6.2 and its accompanying program illustrate an elementary part which is to have a 1 inchlong, 15 degree taper turned on a workpiece having a diameter of 1.25 inches. The part face is set toZ0 by the G10 command in block N20; therefore, all turning passes will be in the minus Z direction.

The only difference between taper turning and the preceding straight turning is that the amount oftaper in the X direction, expressed as an “R” value, must be programmed in the G90 block. Programthe “R” word as a POSITIVE value if the tool moves in the -X direction as it moves in the -Z direction.Program the “R” word as a NEGATIVE value if the tool moves in the +X direction as it moves in the -Zdirection.

For this example, “R” was determined as follows:

R = (Z + .1) x -(Tan 15 degrees)= 1.1 x -.26794… (Unrounded Value)= -.29474 (Rounded Value)

M-504A 6-3

G71/G70 AUTOMATIC MULTIPLE REPETITIVEROUGH AND FINISH TURNING

- NOTE -

This section is divided into two parts; standard turning and the optional pocket turn-ing feature. All general information on G71/G70 turning is outlined in the section onstandard turning. Specific information relating to the optional G71/G70 pocket turn-ing feature begins on page 6-9.

The G71 Multiple Repetitive Turning Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of describ-ing multiple rough turning passes with two blocks of information. The first G71 block specifies theamount of stock to be removed per pass and the distance the tool will retract from the workpiece forthe return pass. The second G71 block specifies the data blocks which define the section of theworkpiece to be rough turned and the amount of stock to be left for finish machining. Finally, the G70Preparatory Command specifies the section of the workpiece to be finish machined by specifying thefirst and last blocks of the required program section.

G71/G70 STANDARD TURNING

Figure 6.3 and its accompanying program illustrates an elementary part on the main spindle that isto be rough turned and finish contoured to the dimensions shown.

The part face is set to Z0 by the G10 command in block N20; therefore, all turning passes will be inthe minus Z direction.

The X and Z Axis tool offsets are activated through the Tool Offset selection in block N50. Turretstation #1 is selected and Tool Offset #1 is activated. The Tool Offset allows the programmer to pro-gram the X Axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to the spindle centerline and the ZAxis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to Z0 on the machine coordinate system. If a ZAxis Work Shift (G10 command) is active, the Z Axis position of the tool tip will be positioned in relationto the shifted Z0.

Since all dimensions are in the inch mode, G20 is entered in block N10. This assures the correctformat in case the previously executed program was in metric mode (G21). The Start Point com-manded in block N90 must be located outside the area occupied by the blank stock.

6-4 M-504A

Example 3: G71/G70 Standard Turning Cycle (Figure 6.3)

N10 G20 ; N130 G0 X.25 S800 ;N1 (Operator Message) ; N140 G1 G99 Z-.25 ,R.1 F.004 ;N20 G10 P0 Z#500 ; N150 X.55 ;N30 G97 S1000 M13 P1 ; N160 X.8 Z-.4665 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N170 Z-.75 ;N50 T0101 ; N180 X.94 ;N60 X1.31 Z.2 ; N190 X1.1 Z-.83 ;N70 G50 S3800 ; N200 Z-1. ;N80 G96 S1000 ; N210 X1.3 ;N90 G1 G98 G42 X1.3 Z.1 F100. ; N220 G70 P130 Q210 ;N100 G99 ; N230 M98 P1 ;N110 G71 U.1 R.025 ; N240 M1 ;N120 G71 P130 Q210 U.03 W.015 F.01 ; N250 M30 ;

M-504A 6-5

Figure 6.3 - G71/G70 Rough and Finish Turning Cycle: Standard Turning

TI1602

ChuckFace

CL

1.300

SpindleFace

.100

Start Point

1.100

.940

.800

.550

.250

.250

1.125

1.000

.830

.750

.4665

.500.735

2.735

W

.100

U/2

U

Block N110 will establish the parameters for the rough turning cycle:

N110 G71 U.1 R.025 ;

Where: G71 = Preparatory command for the repetitive roughing cycle.

U: Depth of cut of each pass (as a radius value) during the roughing cycle. In this examplethe depth of each cutting pass is .100 inches.

R: Distance the tool will withdraw from the part for the return pass.

Block N120 will execute the roughing cycle:

N120 G71 P130 Q210 U.03 W.015 F.01 ;

Where: G71 = Preparatory command for the repetitive roughing cycle.

P: Sequence number of the first block in the program section that controls the workpiecearea to be roughed out.

Q: Sequence number of the last block in the program section that controls the workpiecearea to be roughed out.

U: Amount of stock on the X axis to be left for removal during the finish machining cycle.This is a diameter value.

W: Amount of stock on the Z axis to be left for removal during the finish machining cycle.

F: Feedrate in inches/revolution for the roughing cycle. The decimal point must be pro-grammed.

- NOTE -

Decimal point programming cannot be used when programming the P and Q datawords.

Block N130 establishes the Constant Surface Speed value for the G70 finishing cycle:

N130 G0 X.25 S800 ;

S: The surface feet per minute for the finishing pass.

Block N140 establishes the inch per revolution feedrate for the G70 finishing cycle.

N140 G1 G99 Z-.25 ,R.1 F.004 ;

F: The feedrate for the finishing pass. The decimal point must be programmed.

6-6 M-504A

Block N220 designates the section of the workpiece to be finish machined by specifying the first (P)and last (Q) blocks of the required program section.

N220 G70 P130 Q210 ;

P: Sequence number of the first block in the program section that controls the workpiecearea to be finish machined.

Q: Sequence number of the last block in the program section that controls the workpiecearea to be finish machined.

- NOTE -

Decimal point programming cannot be used when programming the P and Q datawords.

When the control encounters the G71 preparatory command blocks, the amount of finish stock asspecified by the U and W words is treated as a pair of offsets. The slides will move in the direction anddistance specified. The U and W words MUST be properly signed (+ or -) to ensure that slide move-ments occur in the direction to leave stock for finishing. If the sign is omitted, the control automaticallyassumes plus (+). In this example the cross slide will move .015 inches in the +U direction and the car-riage will move .015 inches in the +W direction. The control will then cause the machine to executemultiple roughing passes .1 inches deep and a roughing contour pass (as shown by the dashed linesin Figure 6.3) that follows the contour as designated by blocks N130 through N210. After completionof the roughing contour pass, the finish pass will be executed according to the program sectionspecified in the G70 block.

The amount of tool withdrawal after completion of each pass is controlled by the R word in blockN110 (R.025).

In this example the same tool is used for roughing and finishing; therefore, Tool Nose Radius Com-pensation must be established in a block preceding the G71 roughing cycle block. Tool Nose RadiusCompensation is activated and interpolated in the move to the starting point commanded in blockN90. Tool Nose Radius Compensation is deactivated during the G71 cycle and reactivated after theG71 cycle is completed. After the workpiece has been finish machined, Tool Nose Radius Compensa-tion is canceled by the G40 command in sub-program “O1", which is called in block N230. Also see”Tool Nose Radius Compensation", Chapter 2.

Constant Surface Speed must be established in blocks preceding the G71 roughing cycle. Thefeedrate for the roughing passes may be established prior to the first G71 block or in the second G71block. The surface speed and feedrate for the finishing pass must be established in the part programafter the second G71 block. The surface speed and feedrate for the finishing pass can be changed atwill between the starting and ending blocks as designated in the G70 block.

The spindle speed command that must precede entry into Constant Surface Speed mode is pro-grammed in block N30. A G99 Preparatory command, programmed in block N100, establishes Inchper Revolution feedrate. Maximum spindle speed is established by the S word and the G50 Prepara-tory Command in block N70. Constant Surface Speed is established by the G96 command in blockN80 and surface speed for the roughing cycle is set by the S word in the same block. Surface speed forthe finishing pass is established in block N130. Feedrate for the finishing pass is established in blockN140. Constant Surface Speed is canceled by the G97 command in sub-program “O1" after theworkpiece has been finish machined. Also see Constant Surface Speed, in Chapter 9.

M-504A 6-7

G71 Standard Turning Programming Rules

- NOTE -

Refer also to page 6-10 for rules when programming G71/G70 pocket turning.

1. A block specified by a P word cannot contain a Z move.

2. G00 or G01 should be programmed in the block specified by the P word.

3. The contouring path must be a steadily increasing or decreasing pattern on both the X and Zaxes.

4. No subprogram can be called in the program between the start of the cycle designated by P andthe end of the cycle designated by Q.

5. It is not necessary to program a return to the start point at the end of the program. The controlautomatically returns the slides to the start point after the block specified by Q is executed.

6. If Tool Nose Radius Compensation is to be used, it must be programmed prior to the first G71block. Tool Nose Radius Compensation will be deactivated during the G71 cycle andreactivated after the G71 cycle is completed.

7. If Constant Surface Speed is to be used, it must be programmed prior to the first G71 block.

8. Tooling changes for the roughing cycle must be made prior to the first G71 block. Tool offsetchanges for the finishing cycle may be made within the blocks designated by the P and Q wordsin the G70 block.

9. The spindle speed and feedrate for the roughing cycle can be specified prior to the first G71block or in the second G71 block. The spindle speed and feedrate for the finishing cycle can bespecified within the blocks designated by the P and Q words in the G70 block.

6-8 M-504A

G71/G70 POCKET TURNING [Option]

- NOTE -

This section contains specific information relating to G71/G70 pocket turning. Referto G71/G70 Standard Turning, beginning on page 6-4, for additional information onprogramming the G71/G70 turning cycle.

Figure 6.4 and its accompanying program illustrates a pocket contour that is to be rough turned andfinish turned on the main spindle to the dimensions shown. Figure 6.5 illustrates the paths followed bythe roughing and finishing tools.

The part face is set to Z0; therefore, all turning passes will be in the minus Z direction.

Example 4: G71/G70 Pocket Turning Cycle (Figure 6.4)

N10 G20 ; N130 G0 X.4 W0. S800 ;N1 (Operator Message) ; N140 G1 G99 X.75 Z-.125 F.004 ;N20 G10 P0 Z#500 ; N150 Z-.25 ;N30 G97 S1000 M13 P1 ; N160 X.5 Z-.375 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N170 Z-.625 ;N50 T0101 ; N180 X.75 Z-.75 ;N60 X1.1 Z.1 ; N190 Z-.875 ;N70 G50 S3800 ; N200 X1.1 Z-1.05 ;N80 G96 S1000 ; N210 G70 P130 Q200 ;N90 G1 G98 G42 X1.05 Z.05 F100. ; N220 M98 P1 ;N100 G99 ; N230 M1 ;N110 G71 U.1 R.025 ; N240 M30 ;N120 G71 P130 Q200 U.03 W0 F.01 ;

M-504A 6-9

Figure 6.4 - G71/G70 Rough and Finish Turning Cycle: Pocket Turning

TI2697

CL

1.100Dia.

Start Point

1.050

.050

.750Dia.

.500Dia.

1.000Dia.

.125

.250

.375

.875

.750

.625

45°

- NOTE -

When programming G71 pocket turning, the following programming rules supersedethe corresponding standard G71 programming rules, as outlined on page 6-8. Allother programming rules outlined under standard G71 turning still apply.

G71 Pocket Turning Programming Rules

1. The value of the W data word in the second G71 block MUST be zero (W0); otherwise, the tooltip may cut into one of the side walls of the pocket.

2. The block specified by the P word in the second G71 block MUST contain a W0 (zero).

3. The contouring path must be a steadily increasing or decreasing pattern on the Z axis only.

4. A maximum of ten pockets can be programmed in the G71 turning cycle.

6-10 M-504A

Figure 6.5 - G71/G70 Rough and Finish Turning Cycle: Tool Paths

TI2698

CL

Start Point

Z0

D

U

G94 CANNED FACING CYCLE

The G94 Canned Facing Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of defining multiplefacing passes by specifying only the depth of cut for each pass. The operation may be either straightor taper facing.

Figure 6.6 and its accompanying program illustrate an elementary part on the main spindle havinga diameter of 1.5 inches that is to be faced back .5 inches with a .5 inch diameter projection remaining.

EXAMPLE 5: G94 STRAIGHT FACING (Figure 6.6)

N10 G20 ; N110 Z-.1875 ;N1 (Operator Message) ; N120 Z-.25 ;N20 G10 P0 Z#500 ; N130 Z-.3125 ;N30 G97 S1000 M13 P1 ; N140 Z-.375 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N150 Z-.4375 ;N50 T0101 ; N160 Z-.484 ;N60 X1.6 Z.1 ; N170 Z-.5 ;N70 G50 S3800 ; N180 G1 ;N80 G96 S1000 ; N190 M98 P1 ;N90 G1 G99 G94 X.5 Z-.0625 F.002 ; N200 M1 ;N100 Z-.125 ; N210 M30 ;

M-504A 6-11

Figure 6.6 - G94 Canned Facing Cycle: Straight Facing

TI1603

CL

Start Point

1.900

.100

SpindleFace

1.600

ChuckFace

.500

.500.500.400

1.500

The X and Z axis tool offsets are activated through the Tool Offset selection in block N50. Turretstation #1 is selected and Tool Offset #1 is activated. The Tool Offset allows the programmer to pro-gram the X axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to the spindle centerline and Z axisposition of the tool tip as the actual position relative to Z0 on the machine coordinate system. If a Z axisWork Shift is active (G10 command), the Z axis position of the tool tip will be positioned in relation tothe shifted Z0.

Since all dimensions are in the inch mode, G20 is entered in block N10. This assures the correctformat in case the previously executed program was in metric mode (G21).

The cutting tool path is a box pattern. Since the Start Point is also the point to which the tool returnson the return path, the starting point in the X direction was placed at a distance greater than .75 inchesfrom the spindle centerline. This assures that the cutting tool will completely face the workpiece shoul-der on each pass. In the Z direction, the start point was placed in front of the workpiece face to ensurethat the .5 inch diameter is completely turned on each pass.

The G94 Preparatory Command is specified in block N90 along with the depth of cut for the firstpass (Z) on relation to Z0 (zero) and the diameter to which the facing operation is to extend (X). Thefeedrate is also specified. In subsequent blocks (N100 through N170) it is only necessary to specifythe depth of cut for each pass in relation to Z0 (zero). Feedrate and spindle speed changes can alsobe programmed in these blocks. The Feedrate Override switch is active during the facing passes. Todeactivate the G94 mode, program another group 1 G code. Refer to the G Code chart in AppendixTwo.

NOTICE

All facing passes MUST be toward the spindle centerline. If the facing operation isprogrammed to face away from the spindle centerline, the cutting tool will advanceinto the workpiece at the rapid traverse rate.

The approach and return paths are executed at the rapid traverse rate. This rate may be varied withthe Rapid Override switch.

If Constant Surface Speed or Tool Nose Radius Compensation is used, the parameters MUST beentered prior to the G94 block.

In cases where U and W commands are used in place of X and Z make certain each command hasthe correct sign.

6-12 M-504A

EXAMPLE 6: G94 TAPER FACING (Figure 6.7)

N10 G20 ; N130 Z-.0875 ;N1 (Operator Message) ; N140 Z-.15 ;N20 G10 P0 Z#500 ; N150 Z-.2125 ;N30 G97 S1000 M13 P1 ; N160 Z-.275 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N170 Z-.3375 ;N50 T0101 ; N180 Z-.4 ;N60 X1.75 Z.2 ; N190 Z-.4625 ;N70 G50 S3800 ; N200 Z-.49 ;N80 G96 S1000 ; N210 Z-.5 ;N90 G1 G98 G41 X1.6 Z.1 F200. ; N220 G1 ;N100 G99 G94 X.5 Z.1 R-.14737 F.002 ; N230 M98 P1 ;N110 Z.0375 ; N240 M1 ;N120 Z-.025; N250 M30 ;

All rules applying to straight facing in the G94 Canned Facing cycle also apply to taper facing.

Figure 6.7 illustrates an elementary part on the main spindle with a 1.5 inch diameter. This part isfaced back .5 inches and leaves a shoulder that tapers back 15 degrees. A .5 inch diameter projectionremains.

The only difference between taper facing and the preceding straight facing example is that theamount of taper in the Z direction, expressed as an “R” value, must be programmed in the G94 block.Program the “R” word as a POSITIVE value if the tool moves in the +X direction as it moves in the +Zdirection. Program the “R” word as a NEGATIVE value if the tool moves in the -X direction as it movesin the +Z direction.

For this example, R was determined as follows:

R = (1.05 - x) x (-Tan 15°)= (1.05 - .5) x -.26794… (Unrounded Value)= -.14737 (Rounded Value)

M-504A 6-13

Figure 6.7 - G94 Canned Facing Cycle: Tapered Facing

TI1604A

CL

Start Point

.100

SpindleFace

1.600

ChuckFace

1.500

2.025

.500.500.400

.14737

.550

15°

.500

G72/G70 AUTOMATIC MULTIPLE REPETITIVE ROUGH AND FINISH FACING

The G72 Multiple Repetitive Facing Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of describ-ing multiple rough facing passes with two blocks of information. The first G72 block specifies theamount of stock to be removed per pass and the distance the tool will retract from the workpiece forthe return pass. The second G72 block specifies the data blocks which define the section of theworkpiece to be rough faced, the amount of stock to be left for finish machining, and the feedrate forthe G72 roughing cycle. Finally, the G70 Preparatory Command specifies the section of theworkpiece to be finish machined by specifying the first and last blocks of the required program section.

Figure 6.8 and its accompanying program illustrate an elementary part on the main spindle that is tobe rough and finish contoured to the dimensions shown.

EXAMPLE 7: G72/G70 FACING CYCLE (Figure 6.8)

N10 G20 ; N120 G72 P130 Q180 U.03 W.015 F.01 ;N2 (Operator Message) ; N130 G0 Z-1.25 S800 ;N20 G10 P0 Z#500 ; N140 G1 G99 X3. F.004 ;N30 G97 S1000 M13 P1 ; N150 Z-.95235 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N160 X1. Z-.375 ;N50 T0202 ; N170 X.75 ;N60 X4.11 Z0.2 ; N180 Z.1 ;N70 G50 S3800 ; N190 G70 P130 Q180 ;N80 G96 S1000 ; N200 M98 P1 ;N90 G1 G98 G41 X4.1 Z.1 F100. ; N210 M1 ;N100 G99 ; N220 M30 ;N110 G72 W.1 R.03 ;

6-14 M-504A

Figure 6.8 - G72/G70 Rough and Finish Facing Cycle

SpindleFace TI1605

Start Point

U30°

4.100

CL

2.650

ChuckFace

3.000

1.000

.750

.100

.500.400

4.000

1.250

W(N120)

W (N110)

.375

.95235

The face of the part extends 2.650 from the face of the spindle. Since block N20 sets the part face toZ0, all facing passes will be in the minus Z direction.

The X and Z axis tool offsets are compensated for through the Tool Offset selection in block N50.Turret Station #2 is selected and Tool Offset #2 is activated. The Tool Offset allows the programmer toprogram the X axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to the spindle centerline and Zaxis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to Z0 on the machine coordinate system. If a Zaxis Work Shift is active (G10 command), the Z axis position of the tool tip will be positioned in relationto the shifted Z0, as established by the Work Shift offset.

Since all dimensions are in the inch mode, G20 is entered in block N10. This assures the correctformat in case the previously executed program was in metric (G21) mode.

The start point commanded in block N90 must be located outside the area occupied by the blankstock.

Block N110 will establish the parameters for the rough facing cycle:

N110 G72 W.1 R.03 ;

Where: G72 = Preparatory command for the repetitive rough facing cycle.

W: Specifies the depth of cut of each pass during the roughing cycle.

R: Specifies the distance the tool will retract from the workpiece for the return pass.

Block N120 will execute the rough facing cycle:

N120 G72 P130 Q180 U.03 W.015 F.01 ;

Where: G72 = Preparatory command for the repetitive rough facing cycle.

P: Sequence number of the first block in the program section that controls the workpiecearea being roughed out.

Q: Sequence number of the last block in the program section that controls the workpiecearea being roughed out.

U: Amount of stock on the X axis to be left for removal during the finish machining cycle.This is a diameter value

W: Amount of stock on the Z axis to be left for removal during the finish machining cycle.

F: Feedrate for the roughing passes. The decimal point must be programmed.

Block N130 establishes the Constant Surface Speed value for the G70 finishing cycle:

N130 G0 Z-1.25 S800 ;

S: The surface feet per minute for the finishing pass.

M-504A 6-15


N140 G1 G99 X3. F.004 ;


Block N190 designates the section of the workpiece to be finish machined by specifying the first (P)and the last (Q) blocks of the required program section:

N190 G70 P130 Q180 ;

Where: G70 = Preparatory command for the finishing cycle.

P: Sequence number of the first block in the program section that controls the workpiecearea being finish machined.

Q: Sequence number of the last block in the program section that controls the workpiecearea being finish machined.

When the control encounters the G72 preparatory command blocks, the amount of finish stock asspecified by the U and W words is treated as a pair of offsets. The slides will move in the direction anddistance specified. The U and W words MUST be properly signed (+ or -) to ensure that slide move-ments occur in the direction to leave stock for finishing. If the sign is omitted, the control automaticallyassumes plus (+). In this example, the cross slide will move .015 in the +U direction and the carriagewill move .015 in the +W direction. The control will then cause the machine to execute multiple rough-ing passes .1 inches deep and a roughing contour pass (as shown by the dashed lines in Figure 6.6)that follows the contour as designated by blocks N130 through N180. After completion of the roughingcontour pass, the finish pass will be executed according to the program section specified by the G70block.

The amount of tool withdrawal after completion of each pass is controlled by the R word in blockN110 (R0.03).

The spindle speed for the roughing passes is specified in block N80. It is recommended that thespindle speed be established before the G72 blocks to ensure the spindle reaches full commandedspeed before the roughing passes begin. Spindle speed and feedrate changes for the finish cycle canbe made at will between the starting and ending blocks as designated by P and Q in the G70 block.

Tool changes (T function) for the roughing cycle MUST be made prior to the first G72 block. Tooloffset changes for the finishing cycle can be made within the blocks designated by the P and Q wordsin the G70 block.

In this example the same tool is used for roughing and finishing; therefore, Tool Nose Radius Com-pensation must be established in a block preceding the first G72 block. Tool Nose Radius Compensa-tion is activated and interpolated in the move to the starting point commanded in block N90. Tool NoseRadius Compensation is deactivated during the G71 cycle and reactivated after the G72 cycle is com-pleted. Compensation is canceled by a G40 command in subroutine “O1", which is called by lineN200. Also see ”Tool Nose Radius Compensation" Chapter 2.

If Constant Surface Speed is to be used, it must be established in blocks preceding the first G72block. Feedrate for the roughing passes may be established prior to the G72 blocks or in the secondG72 block. If a different surface speed and feedrate is required for the finishing pass, it must be estab-lished in the part program after the second G72 block. Surface speed and feedrate can be changed atwill between the starting and ending block as designated by the P and Q words in the G70 block.

6-16 M-504A

The spindle speed command that must precede entry into Constant Surface Speed mode is pro-grammed in block N30. Maximum spindle speed is established by the S word and the G50 Prepara-tory command in block N70. Constant Surface Speed is established by the G96 command in blockN80 and surface speed for the roughing cycle by the S word in the same block.

Surface speed for the finishing pass is established in block N130. Constant Surface Speed is can-celed by the G97 command in sub-program “O1" after the workpiece has been finish machined. Alsosee Constant Surface Speed, in Chapter 9.

The feedrate for the finishing pass is established in block N140.

G72 PROGRAMMING NOTES

1. A block specified by a P word cannot contain an X move.


3. The contouring path must be a steadily increasing or decreasing pattern.





8. Tooling changes for the roughing cycle must be made prior to the first G72 block. Tool offsetchanges for the finishing cycle may be made within the blocks designated by the P and Qwords.

9. The spindle speed and feedrate for the roughing cycle can be specified prior to the first G72block or in the second G72 block. The spindle speed and feedrate for the finishing cycle can bespecified within the blocks designated by the P and Q words.

M-504A 6-17

G73/G70 AUTOMATIC ROUGH AND FINISH PATTERN REPEAT

The G73 Canned Pattern Repeat Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of repeatedlycutting a fixed pattern (contour) with two blocks of information. The first block specifies the incremen-tal distance between the first and last roughing pass and the number of roughing passes to be exe-cuted. The second block specifies the section of the workpiece to be roughed out, the amount of stockto be left for finish machining, and the roughing feedrate. Finally, the G70 Preparatory Commandspecifies the section of the workpiece to be finish machined by specifying the first and last block of therequired program section. This automatic cycle is especially useful for rough and finish contouring aworkpiece whose rough shape has already been created by casting, forging or rough machining. Ifthis cycle is to be used to contour a workpiece from bar stock, make certain the first pass starts at apoint that will not cause excessive “hogging” on the first pass.

Figure 6.9 illustrates an elementary part on the main spindle that is to be finished to the dimensionsshown with three roughing passes and a finishing pass. It is assumed the configuration of the blankworkpiece approximates that of the finish piece.

EXAMPLE 8: G73/G70 PATTERN REPEAT CYCLE (Figure 6.9)

Sample ProgramN10 G20 ; N130 G0 X.5 ;N7 (Operator Message) ; N140 G1 G99 Z-.25 F.002 ;N20 G10 P0 Z#500 ; N150 X.75 ;N30 G97 S1000 M13 P1 ; N160 X1. Z-.4665 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N170 Z-.72 ;N50 T0707 ; N180 X1.5 Z-.97 ;N60 X2.15 Z.2 ; N190 Z-1.25 ;N70 G50 S3000 ; N200 X2.05 ;N80 G96 S500 ; N210 G70 P130 Q200 ;N90 G1 G98 G42 X2.05 Z.1 F100. ; N220 M98 P1 ;N100 G99 ; N230 M1 ;N110 G73 U.135 W.05 R3 ; N240 M30 ;N120 G73 P130 Q200 U.03 W.015 F.01 ;

- NOTE -

The legends in lower half of Figure 6.9 are explained as follows:

U1 = U (N110)U2 = U (N120)W1 = W (N110)W2 = W (N120)

Since all dimensions are in the inch mode, G20 is entered in block N10. This assures the correctformat in case the previously executed program was in metric (G21) mode.

The start point commanded in block N90 must be located outside the maximum diameter occupiedby the blank stock to be machined.

6-18 M-504A

M-504A 6-19

Figure 6.9 - G73/G70 Rough and Finish Pattern Repeat

TI1606

Start Point

CL

.100

.750

SpindleFace

ChuckFace

.250

.720

.970

1.250

.4665

1.000

2.650

.500.400

2.000

.500

1.500

2.05030°

45°

Start Point

U1 U2

W1

W2

W1 + W2

U1 + U2

Block N110 will establish the parameters for the G73 rough facing cycle:

N110 G73 U.135 W.05 R3 ;

U: Distance and direction of relief in the X axis direction. (radius value) This value tells thecontrol the amount of material to be removed from the workpiece in the X direction. Thisvalue will allow the control to calculate the correct distance and direction to pull awayfrom the workpiece before beginning the automatic cycle. This programmed value isequal to the amount of stock to be removed from each side during the roughing cycleminus the depth of the first cut and finish allowance on each side.

Example:

Total amount of stock to remove = .200 (radius value)Depth of first cut = -.050 ”X axis finish amount left = -.015 ”Programmed U word (Block N110) = .135 ”

W: Distance and direction of relief in the Z axis direction. This value tells the control theamount of material to be removed from the workpiece in the Z direction. This value willallow the control to calculate the correct distance and direction to pull away from theworkpiece before beginning the automatic cycle. This programmed value is equal to theamount of stock to be removed during the roughing cycle minus the depth of the first cutand finish allowance.

R: The number of rough passes desired.

- NOTE -

The above entries are modal and are not changed until another value is pro-grammed.

Block N120 will execute the G73 rough facing cycle:

N120 G73 P130 Q200 U.03 W.015 F.01 ;

P: Sequence number of the first block for the program section that controls the workpiecearea being roughed out.

Q: Sequence number of the last block for the program section that controls the workpiecearea being roughed out.

U: Distance and direction of finishing allowance in X direction (diameter value).

W: Distance and direction of finishing allowance in Z direction.

F: Feedrate to be active during the automatic roughing cycle. The decimal point must beprogrammed.


N140 G1 G99 Z-.25 F.002 ;


6-20 M-504A







6. Tooling changes for the roughing cycle must be made prior to the first G73 block. Tool offsetchanges for the finishing cycle may be made within the blocks designated by the P and Q wordsin the G70 block.

7. The spindle speed and feedrate for the roughing cycle can be specified prior to the first G73block or in the second G73 block. The spindle speed and feedrate for the finishing cycle can bespecified within the blocks designated by the P and Q words in the G70 block.

M-504A 6-21

G70 AUTOMATIC FINISHING CYCLE

After rough cutting by G71, G72, or G73, the following command permits finishing.

G70 P(starting block) Q(finishing block) ;

Refer to the sections on the G71, G72, and G73 automatic cycles for G70 programming examples.

P: Sequence number of the first block in the program section that controls the workpiecearea to be finish machined.

Q: Sequence number of the last block in the program section that controls the workpiecearea to be finish machined.


NOTICE

Never position the Start Point below the Q Line diameter. When the G70 finish turnis completed, the tool rapids back to the Start Point.

1. F, S and T words programmed between sequence numbers “P___” and “Q___”, as defined bythe G70 program block will be recognized by the G70 cycle.

2. When the G70 Automatic Finishing Cycle is completed, the tool is returned to the start point andthe next block is read.

3. In blocks between the starting block and finishing block programmed in G70 through G73,subprograms cannot be called.

6-22 M-504A

AUTOMATIC DRILLING CYCLES

In any auto deep hole drilling cycle, the Z axis is reversed at prescribed intervals to provide forproper chip removal. An automatic drilling cycle must be flexible enough to accommodate a wide vari-ety of materials and a full range of hole depths. It is the programmer’s responsibility to make certainthat the programmed parameters result in a cycle that satisfactorily removes chips during the drillingoperation. If the chip load builds up:

• The drill bit could break.

• The spindle could stall.

• The Z axis servo motor could overload.

G74 CONSTANT DEPTH INCREMENT AUTOMATIC DRILLING CYCLE

A G74 command activates an automatic drilling cycle that uses constant depth increments. All in-formation for the cycle is programmed in two data blocks. The data word formats are defined in thesection below and illustrated in Figure 6.10.

- NOTE -

The values shown in the following data blocks are data word formats, NOT actual di-mensions.

Block Format

Inch Programming

G74 R(e) ;G74 Z(W)±2.5 Q7 F3.2 (in/min) or F1.6 (in/rev) ;

Metric Programming

G74 R(e) ;G74 Z(W)±3.4 Q7 F5.0 (mm/min) or F3.4 (mm/rev) ;

M-504A 6-23

Where: G74 = G code for Automatic Drilling Cycle (Constant Depth Increments)

R = Amount of retract between cutting moves.

Z = Z coordinate of Final Hole Depth (signed)

W = Z Increment from Start Point to Final Depth (signed)

Q = Size of Depth Increment (unsigned)

F = Feedrate.

Before the G74 block is encountered, the drill must be positioned at the start point. During execu-tion of the cycle, the series of Z axis moves (see Figure 6.10) is as follows:

a) From the start point, the drill feeds in “Q” amount.

b) The drill retracts at rapid traverse “R” amount.

c) The drill feeds in “Q+R” amount.

d) The drill continues to rapid retract “R” amount, then feed in “Q+R” amount until the lastpass. On the last pass, the drill feeds in to the final hole depth, then rapid retracts to thestart point.

6-24 M-504A

Figure 6.10 - G74 Automatic Drilling Cycle Parameters

TI2159A

CL

Start Point

W

Z

QR

+Z

Q Word Programming

The control assumes decimal point placement as Q2.5 for English units (inches) and Q3.4 for Met-ric units (millimeters).

Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the Q data word. Leading zeros may be omitted,however trailing zeros MUST be programmed.

Refer to the following examples:

Inch: Q25000 = .25 inches Metric: Q25000 = 2.5 millimetersQ250000 = 2.50 inches Q250000 = 25.0 millimeters

G74 Automatic Drilling Sample Program

In this sample program, Z0 (zero) is the face of the part and the final depth of the hole is 1.5 inches.Refer to Figure 6.11.

Sample ProgramN7 (Operator Message) ; N260 X0. Z.1 ;N220 G10 P0 Z#500 ; N270 G74 R.05 ;N230 G97 S1000 M13 P1 ; N280 G74 G99 Z-1.5 Q25000 F.005 ;N240 M98 P1 ; N290 M98 P1 ;N250 T0707 ; N300 M1;

M-504A 6-25

Figure 6.11 - G74 Automatic Drilling Cycle: Sample Workpiece

TI2160B

Start Point(X0. Z.1)

.1001.500

1.600

.050 .250

CL

R WORD (N270)

Specifies the amount of retract between each cutting move of the drill bit. Refer to “R”, inFigure 6.10. In this example, the amount of retract is .05 inches.

F WORD (N280)

Specifies the feedrate for the G74 Automatic Drilling Cycle. In this example, the feedrate is.005 inches per revolution.

Q WORD (N280)

Specifies the depth of cut in the Z direction. In this example, the depth of cut is .25 inches.Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the Q word.

The Q word in this sample program is structured for Super-Precision® lathes.

Z WORD (N280)

Specifies the final depth of the drilled hole, in reference to Z0 (zero). In this example, the fi-nal depth of the drilled hole is 1.5 inches.

Instead of programming Z-1.5 in block N280, we could have programmed W-1.6 (the incre-mental distance from the start point to the final hole depth) and the cycle would have be-haved exactly the same way.

6-26 M-504A

VARIABLE DEPTH INCREMENT AUTOMATIC DRILLING CYCLE

The G74 Automatic Drilling Cycle has limited applications because of its constant infeed, constantretract increments, and absence of a dwell. To create a more versatile automatic drilling cycle,Hardinge Inc. has developed an auto drilling cycle with variable depth increments, a retract point clearof the part, and a programmable dwell at the retract point.

All information required for this drilling cycle is programmed in one data block.

- NOTE -

The values shown in the following data blocks are data word format designations,NOT actual dimensions.

Decimal point programming MUST be used in data blocks containing macro calls.

Block Format

Inch Format: G65 P9136 K±2.5 B2.5 F1.6 W2.5 C2.5 A5.1 Z±2.5 ;

Metric Format: G65 P9136 K±3.4 B3.4 F3.4 W3.4 C3.4 A5.1 Z±3.4 ;

Data Word Definitions

G65 = G Code for Macro Call

P9136 = Macro Program 9136 (Deep Drill)

K = Z Axis End Position (SIGNED absolute value)

B = Start Feed Increment Value (Incremental value, always positive)

F = Drill Feedrate per Revolution

W = Depth of First Drill In-Feed

C = Minimum Increment

A = Amount of Dwell (in seconds) at Retract Point

Z = First Rapid-to-Feed Point Inside Workpiece (SIGNED absolute value)Optional Command, refer to page 6-32

Refer to Figures 6.12 and 6.13 to see how these data words relate to the workpiece.

M-504A 6-27

6-28 M-504A

Figure 6.12 - Macro 9136: Deep Drill Cycle Parameters (Main Spindle)

TI2163

CLZ Start Point

B

K

Z End Point Rapid Traverse

Feed

C C

3rdPass 2nd Pass 1st Pass (W)

Figure 6.13 - Macro 9136: Deep Drill Cycle Parameters (Sub-Spindle)

TI4226

Z Start Point

B

CL

K

Rapid Traverse

Feed

1st Pass (W) 2nd Pass3rd

PassC C

Z End Point

Positioning the Drill

The data block preceding the block calling Deep Drill Macro Program 9136 will position the drill tipat the start point for the drilling cycle. All retract motion during the drilling cycle will be to this start point.


The face of the workpiece will be set to Z0 by the work shift; therefore, the Z axis startpoint will be located at a positive Z coordinate. Based on the positive sign of the Z axis startpoint, the macro program will verify the sign of the K data word is negative.

Program Block Structure:

X0. Z.1 ;G65 P9136 K-___ B___ W___ F___ C___ A___ Z-___ ;

SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

The face of the workpiece will be set to Z0 by the work shift; therefore, the Z axis startpoint will be located at a negative Z coordinate. Based on the negative sign of the Z axisstart point, the macro program will verify the sign of the K data word is positive.

Program Block Structure:

X0. Z-.1 ;G65 P9136 K___ B___ W___ F___ C___ A___ Z___ ;

Calculating the Drill Pass Increments

1. 1st Pass Increment = Specified by the W word.

2. 2nd pass increment = .5 times the 1st pass increment.

3. 3rd pass increment = .5 times the 2nd pass increment.

4. 4th pass increment = .5 times the 3rd pass increment.

The control will not allow the pass increment to drop below the minimum pass increment, as estab-lished by the C word.

- NOTE -

If desired, the value of “W” can be increased or decreased to lengthen or shorten thefirst pass depth. This will have a direct affect on the rest of the passes.

M-504A 6-29

Macro 9136 without Optional Z Word

SAMPLE PART DESCRIPTION

A .25 inch diameter hole, 1.5 inches deep, is to be drilled in a piece of 1-3/16 inch diameter stock.The part has already been center drilled and the face of the workpiece is set to Z0 (zero) in block N160.

The depth of the first pass is to be .75 inches. A one-half second dwell is programmed at the retractposition. The start feed increment will be set to .02 inches and the minimum increment will be set to.0625 inches.

EXAMPLE 1: MAIN SPINDLE (Refer to Figure 6.14)

Sample Program Segment:

.

.N140 M98 P1 ;N150 M1 ;N2 (Operator Message) ;N160 G10 P0 Z#500 ;N170 G97 S1400 M13 P1 ;N180 M98 P1 ;N190 T0202 ;N200 X0. Z.1 ;N210 G65 P9136 K-1.5 B.02 F.008 W.75 C.0625 A.5 ;N220 M98 P1 ;N230 M1 ;..

6-30 M-504A

Figure 6.14 - Macro Program 9136:Main Spindle Operation without the Optional Z Word

TI2166

CL

Z0

1.500

.750

.730

.100

.020


First Rapid-to-FeedPoint (X0. Z.02)

Second Rapid-to-FeedPoint (X0. Z-.73)

EXAMPLE 2: SUB-SPINDLE (Refer to Figure 6.15)

Sample Program Segment:

.

.N140 M98 P2 ;N150 M1 ;N2 (Operator Message) ;N160 G10 P0 Z#501 ;N170 G97 S1400 M13 P1 ;N180 M98 P2 ;N190 T0202 ;N200 X0. Z.-1 ;N210 G65 P9136 K1.5 B.02 F.008 W.75 C.0625 A.5 ;N220 M98 P2 ;N230 M1 ;..

M-504A 6-31

Figure 6.15 - Macro Program 9136:Sub-Spindle Operation without the Optional Z Word

CL

1.500

.750

.730

.100

.020

Start Point(X0. Z-.1)

First Rapid-to-FeedPoint (X0. Z-.02)

Second Rapid-to-FeedPoint (X0. Z.73)

TI4227Z0

Macro 9136 with Optional Z Word

NOTICE

The Z word is an optional command and is NOT TO BE PROGRAMMED UNLESSREQUIRED.


Assuming the part face has been set to Z0, a Z word with a negative value may be programmed ifthe drill is to start inside the workpiece; for example, inside a counterbore.

The depth of the counterbore will be programmed in the macro data block as a negative value, as-suming the face of the workpiece is set to Z0. The drill will rapid into the counterbore a distance equalto the value of the Z word plus the value of the B word. The drill will feed in from this position at the pro-grammed feedrate.

Refer to Example 3, on page 6-33.


Assuming the part face has been set to Z0, a Z word with a positive value may be programmed if thedrill is to start inside the workpiece; for example, inside a counterbore.

The depth of the counterbore will be programmed in the macro data block as a positive value, as-suming the face of the workpiece is set to Z0. The drill will rapid into the counterbore a distance equalto the value of the Z word minus the value of the B word. The drill will feed in from this position at theprogrammed feedrate.

Refer to Example 4, on page 6-34.

SAMPLE PART DESCRIPTION

A .25 inch diameter hole, 1.5 inches deep from the face of the workpiece, is to be drilled in a piece of1-3/16 inch diameter stock. The bottom of the counterbore has already been center drilled and theface of the workpiece is set to Z0 (zero) in block N160.

The hole will begin at the base of a .25 inch counterbore. The depth of the first pass is to be .75inches. A one-half second dwell is programmed at the retract position. The start feed increment will beset to .02 inches and the minimum increment will be set to .0625 inches.

6-32 M-504A

EXAMPLE 3: MAIN SPINDLE (Refer to Figure 6.16)

The only difference between this sample program segment and the sample program segment inExample 1 is that in this sample the drill bit will rapid from the start point (X0. Z.1) to X0. Z-.23 beforegoing to the programmed feedrate.

The coordinate location X0. Z-.23 was determined by adding the Feed Increment Value (B word) tothe value of the programmed Z word.

Sample Program Segment

.

.N140 M98 P1 ;N150 M1 ;N2 (Operator Message) ;N160 G10 P0 Z#500 ;N170 G97 S1400 M13 P1 ;N180 M98 P1 ;N190 T0202 ;N200 X0. Z0.1 ;N210 G65 P9136 K-1.5 B.02 F.008 W.75 C.0625 A.5 Z-.25 ;N220 M98 P1 ;N230 M1 ;..

M-504A 6-33

Figure 6.16 - Macro Program 9136:Main Spindle Operation with the Optional Z Word

CL

1.500

.750

.980 .100

.020


First Rapid-to-FeedPoint (X0. Z-.23)Second Rapid-to-Feed

Point (X0. Z-.98)

TI2174Z0

.250

1.000

EXAMPLE 4: SUB-SPINDLE (Refer to Figure 6.17)

The only difference between this sample program segment and the sample program segment inExample 2 is that in this sample the drill bit will rapid from the start point (X0. Z-.1) to X0. Z.23 beforegoing to the programmed feedrate.

The coordinate location X0. Z.23 was determined by subtracting the Feed Increment Value (Bword) from the value of the programmed Z word.

The following sample program segment is written for lower turret operation.


.

.N140 M98 P2 ;N150 M1 ;N2 (Operator Message) ;N160 G10 P0 Z#501 ;N170 G97 S1400 M13 P1 ;N180 M98 P2 ;N190 T0202 ;N200 X0. Z-0.1 ;N210 G65 P9136 K1.5 B.02 F.008 W.75 C.0625 A.5 Z.25 ;N220 M98 P2 ;N230 M1 ;..

6-34 M-504A

Figure 6.17 - Macro Program 9136:Sub-Spindle Operation with the Optional Z Word

CL

1.500

.750

.980.100

.020

Start Point(X0. Z.-1)

First Rapid-to-FeedPoint (X0. Z.23) Second Rapid-to-Feed

Point (X0. Z.98)

.250

1.000

TI4228Z0

G75 AUTOMATIC GROOVING CYCLE

BLOCK FORMAT

All information for the G75 Automatic Grooving Cycle is programmed in two data blocks, as follows:

Inch Format

G75 R2.4 ;G75 X(U)±2.4 Z(W)±2.4 P6 Q6 F3.2 (ipm) or F1.6 (ipr);

Metric Format

G75 R3.3 ;G75 X(U)±3.3 Z(W)±3.3 P6 Q6 F5.0 (mmpm) or F3.4 (mmpr);

- NOTE -

The values shown in the preceding data blocks are data word format designations,NOT actual dimensions.

Where: G75 = G code for Automatic Grooving Cycle (Constant Depth Increments)

R = Amount of retract between cutting moves.

X = X coordinate at full depth of pass (signed)

U = Incremental distance from X axis start pointto X axis final position (signed)

Z = Z axis position for final pass (signed)

W = Incremental distance from first pass Z axis positionto last pass Z axis position (signed)

P = Size of depth increment (unsigned)

Q = Incremental amount of Z axis move between fullcutting passes (unsigned)

F = Feedrate.

Refer to Figure 6.18 to see how these data words relate to the workpiece.

M-504A 6-35

P AND Q WORD PROGRAMMING

On High Performance lathes, the control assumes decimal point placement as P2.4 and Q2.4 forEnglish units (inches) and P3.3 and Q3.3 for Metric units (millimeters).

On Super-Precision® lathes, the control assumes decimal point placement as P2.5 and Q2.5 forEnglish units (inches) and P3.4 and Q3.4 for Metric units (millimeters).

Decimal Point programming is NOT allowed with the P or Q data words. Leading zeros may beomitted; however trailing zeros MUST be programmed.

Refer to the following examples:

HIGH PERFORMANCE LATHES

Inch: P2500 = .25 inches Metric: P2500 = 2.5 millimetersP25000 = 2.50 inches P25000 = 25.0 millimeters


SUPER-PRECISION LATHES

Inch: P25000 = .25 inches Metric: P25000 = 2.5 millimetersP250000 = 2.50 inches P250000 = 25.0 millimeters


TOOL MOVEMENT SEQUENCE

Before the G75 blocks are encountered, the grooving tool must be positioned at the X and Z axisstart point. During execution of the cycle, the series of X and Z axis moves (Refer to Figure 6.18) is asfollows:

a) From the start point, the tool feeds in “P” amount.

b) The tool retracts at rapid traverse “R” amount.

c) The tool feeds in “P+R” amount.

d) The tool continues to rapid retract “R” amount, then feed in “P+R” amount until the lastpass. On the last pass, the tool feeds in a distance equal to or less than “P” until the fi-nal depth is reached.

e) The tool rapid retracts to the X axis start position.

f) The tool moves toward the Z axis end point a distance specified by the Q word to arriveat the start point for the next full cut.

g) Steps “a” through “f” are repeated until the entire groove is completed.

h) When the final cut is completed, the tool rapid retracts to the X axis start position; thenrapids to the X and Z axis start point specified by the program blocks immediately pre-ceding the G75 blocks.

6-36 M-504A

M-504A 6-37

Figure 6.18 - G75 Automatic Grooving Cycle Parameters

TI2164A

StartPoint

1 4

2 5

3 6

W

U

X,Z

CL

Z0

U

U

P

R

Q

Z AxisMovement

CL

CL CL

CL CL

G75 AUTOMATIC GROOVING SAMPLE PROGRAM

In this sample program segment, X0 (zero) is the spindle centerline, Z0 (zero) is the face of theworkpiece and the final depth of the groove is .25 inches. The width of the grooving tool is .125 inches.Refer to Figure 6.19.

- NOTE -

The P word in block N300 is an incremental value. Each cutting pass will be an ac-tual .075 inch cut.

Sample Program SegmentN7 (Operator Message) ; N270 G50 S5200 P1 ;N220 G10 P0 Z#500 ; N280 G96 S280 ;N230 G97 M13 ; N290 G75 R.02 ;N240 M98 P1 ; N300 G75 G99 X.5 Z-.8 P750 Q1000 F.005 ;N250 T0707 ; N310 M98 P1 ;N260 X1.1 Z-.625 ; N320 M1 ;

R WORD (N290)

Specifies the incremental amount of retract between each cutting move of the groovingtool. Refer to “R”, in Figure 6.18. In this example, the amount of retract is .02 inches.

F WORD (N300)

Specifies the feedrate for the G75 Automatic Grooving Cycle. In this example, the feedrateis .005 inches per revolution.

6-38 M-504A

Figure 6.19 - G75 Automatic Grooving Cycle: Sample Workpiece

TI2165

CL

1.100 Dia.

Start Point(X1.1 Z-.625)

+X

+Z

1.000 Dia..500 Dia.

.250

.625

.500

.800

P WORD (N300)

Specifies the incremental depth of each cutting move in the X direction. In this example,the depth of each cutting move is .075 inches. Decimal point programming is NOT allowedwith the P word.

Q WORD (N300)

Specifies the incremental move in the Z direction between each full cutting pass. In this ex-ample, the incremental move is .100 inches. Decimal point programming is NOT allowedwith the Q word.

X WORD (N300)

Specifies the X axis position of the tool at the end of each complete cutting pass, in refer-ence to X0 (zero). In this example, the X axis position is X.5 inches.

Z WORD (N300)

Specifies the Z axis position for the final full cutting pass, in reference to Z0 (zero). In thisexample, the final Z axis position is Z-.8 inches.

- NOTE -

If the Z values in blocks N260 and N300 are swapped, the tool will begin at Z-.8 andfinish at Z-.625 .

M-504A 6-39

POLYGON TURNING

INTRODUCTION

The purpose of polygon turning is to provide the capability of turning a symmetrical polygon on theoutside diameter of a workpiece.

Polygon turning can be performed on the main spindle or the optional sub-spindle. Refer to “Spin-dle Selection”, below.

The type of polygon produced is determined by the following factors:

• the ratio between the spindle speed and the rotational speed of the polygon turning livetooling cutter

• the number of cutting edges on the tool (2 or 3)

The size of the polygon is determined by the following factors:

• diameter and cutting depth of the polygon turning live tooling cutter

• diameter of the workpiece

The spindle speed is programmed through the use of the S word. The cutter speed is programmedin the G51.2 program block as a ratio of the spindle speed.

The location of the tool tip on the polygon turning live tooling cutter is defined in terms of X,Y coordi-nates.

SPINDLE SELECTION

- NOTE -

It is not possible to enable polygon turning on both spindles at the same time.

Setting parameter 7640 to “1” will enable polygon turning on the main spindle.

Setting parameter 7640 to “2” will enable polygon turning on the sub-spindle.

Parameter 7640 can be set from a program or through the manual data input keyboard.

Program Entry

Program Format: G10 L50 ; Activate Parameter Entry ModeN7640 R1 (or R2) ; Sets parameter 7640 to 1 (or 2)G11 ; Cancel Parameter Entry Mode

Manual Data Input Keyboard Entry

Refer to the operator’s manual (M-505) for information on changing machine parameters throughthe manual data input panel.

6-40 M-504A

G CODES

Two G codes are used to control polygon turning.

G51.2 Activates polygon turning. Refer to Block Format, below.

G50.2 Cancels polygon turning.

BLOCK FORMAT

G51.2 P_ Q_ ;

G51.2 = Activate polygon turning

P_ = Spindle speed factor (Range: 1 to 9)

Q_ = Live tooling speed factor (Range: 1 to 9)(Positive value = Live tool forward rotation)(Negative value = Live tool reverse rotation)

The ratio between the spindle speed factor (P word) and the live tooling speed factor (Q word) de-termines the rotational speed of the polygon turning live tool.

Example 1: Spindle speed is 1000 rpm

G51.2 P1 Q2 ; Live tool forward rotation, 2000 rpm


G51.2 P1 Q3 ; Live tool forward rotation, 3000 rpm


G51.2 P1 Q-2 ; Live tool reverse rotation, 2000 rpm

M-504A 6-41

CROWNING

Crowning is a result of the relative elliptical path of each tool tip in relation to the workpiece. Theamount of crowning is dependent upon the radius of the workpiece and the radius of the polygon turn-ing live tooling cutter.

The amount of crowning will decrease as the radius of the polygon turning live tooling cutter in-creases in relation to the radius of the workpiece.

Refer to Figure 6.20.

6-42 M-504A

Figure 6.20 - Example of Crowning During Polygon Turning

TI4749

RT

RW

RT + Rw + f

f

RT = Radius of polygon turning live tooling cutter

RW = Radius of workpiece

f = Crown (radius value)

Direction ofRotation

Direction ofRotation

Corner to corner distance(Theoretical)

Corner to corner distance(Actual, due to crowning)

SELECTING THE CUTTER AND SPEED RATIO

NOTICE

The actual speed of the polygon turning live tooling cutter must be 1000 rpm orgreater. Select a spindle speed and speed factor values that will result in cutterspeed of 1000 rpm or greater.

For clearance purposes:

• the polygon turning live tooling cutter should always be running at a higher rpm than themachine spindle.

• use a one tooth cutter and program a speed ratio of 1:2 when cutting two flats on aworkpiece. Refer to the chart shown below.

The number of sides on the polygon to be produced will indicate the number of teeth on the polygonturning live tooling cutter that must engage the workpiece per revolution of the spindle.

Equation:

Number of Sides Teeth per Cutter Speed Ratio� �

Refer to the examples listed in the following chart:

PolygonType

Numberof Sides

Teeth perCutter

SpindleSpeed Factor

Live ToolSpeed Factor

(2 Flats) 2 1 1 2

Square 4 2 1 2

Pentagon 5 2 2 5

Hexagon 6 2 1 3

Hexagon 6 3 1 2

Octagon 8 2 1 4

M-504A 6-43

SAMPLE PROGRAM SEGMENTS

These sample program segments involve a single plunge cut on the outer diameter of theworkpiece.

When machining on the end of the workpiece, the width of the cutter must be equal to or greaterthan the width of the polygon to be machined.

Typically, a single plunge cut requires the width of the cutter to be equal to the width of the polygonto be machined. When machining on the end of the workpiece, the width of the cutter can be equal toor greater than the width of the polygon to be machined.

Main Spindle Program Segment

.

.

N2 (Operator Message) ;

N160 G10 P0 Z#500 ; Set Main Spindle Work Shift

N170 G97 S1000 M14 P1 ; Main Spindle Reverse 1000 RPM, Coolant ON

N180 M98 P1 ; Call Safe Index Subprogram O1

N190 T0202 ; Select Tool and Tool Offset

N200 G0 X4. Z.875 ; Move to Start Point

N210 M52 S2000 P3 ; Activate Live Tooling at 2000 RPM

N220 G51.2 P1 Q2 ; Activate Polygon Turning, Speed Ratio 1:2

N230 G1 X.75 F.4 ; Cut to Depth

N240 G4 X2. ; Dwell 2 seconds

N250 G0 X4. Rapid Away from Workpiece

N260 G50.2 ; Cancel Polygon Turning

N270 M5 ; Main Spindle Stop, Coolant OFF


N290 M1 ; Option Stop

.

.

6-44 M-504A

Sub-Spindle Program Segment

.

.


N160 G10 P0 Z#501 ; Set Sub-Spindle Z Axis Work Shift

N170 G97 S1000 M33 P2 ; Sub-Spindle Forward 1000 RPM



N200 G0 X4. Z-.875 M08 ; Move to Start Point, Coolant ON

N210 M52 S2000 P3 ; Activate Live Tooling at 2000 RPM

N220 G51.2 P1 Q2 ; Activate Polygon Turning, Speed Ratio 1:2

N230 G1 X.75 F.4 ; Cut to Depth

N240 G4 X2. ; Dwell 2 seconds

N250 G0 X4. Rapid Away from Workpiece

N260 G50.2 ; Cancel Polygon Turning

N270 M35 ; Sub-Spindle Stop


N290 M1 ; Option Stop

.

.

CANCELING POLYGON TURNING

Polygon turning is canceled by any of the following:

• Programmed G50.1

• Control OFF

• Emergency Stop

• Servo alarm

• Control Reset

• P/S alarm 217, 218, 219, 220, or 221. Refer to the Fanuc operator’s manual for informationon these alarms.

M-504A 6-45

- NOTES -

6-46 M-504A

CHAPTER 7 - THREADING CYCLES

INTRODUCTION

The feedrate for precision threading should be lead limited to 120 inches [3048 mm] per minute.Above this value, to the maximum machine feedrate, the lead error should be checked to make certainit does not exceed specifications for the individual thread being produced. It is the programmer’s re-sponsibility to ensure that the combination of lead and spindle speed does not exceed a feedratewhich produces threads that are not within specifications.

The maximum spindle speed for a given thread lead is calculated through the use of the followingformulas:

English Threads: Maximum rpm = 120 inches/minute ÷ Thread Lead

Metric Threads: Maximum rpm = 3048 millimeters/minute ÷ Thread Lead

SINGLE BLOCK THREADCUTTING

The spindle encoder monitors RPM during a threading pass and when feeding in Inches/Millime-ters per Revolution (G99). The encoder sends data relating axis position and velocity to the servodrives.

With the Single Block Threadcutting feature, the programmer can cut a thread in any desired num-ber of passes using either the G32 or G92 preparatory command. The principle differences betweenthe two commands are:

1. The G92 command causes the X axis movements of the threading tool to be controlled au-tomatically by the machine during the threading cycle. The G32 command is used to pro-gram each threading pass individually.

2. The G92 command requires fewer blocks of information for a complete threading operation.

The feedrate of the carriage and/or cross slide is determined by programming the thread “Lead” us-ing the F word address. The format for F is:

Inch Programming: F1.6

Metric Programming: F3.4

M-504A 7-1

- NOTE -

Thread pitch is the axial distance from the center of one thread to the center of thenext. Lead is the distance the screw will advance when turned one revolution. On asingle thread screw, the pitch and lead are equal since a screw will advance anamount equal to the pitch when turned one revolution. On a double thread the screwwill advance two threads or twice the pitch in one revolution. Therefore, the pro-grammed lead is twice the pitch.

Program the spindle speed for a threading operation in a block of data preceding the threadcuttingcalling block (G32 or G92). This will allow time for the spindle speed to stabilize before entering thethreadcutting mode.

The Feedrate Override switch is not active during a G32 or G92 threadcutting pass unless it is set to0%. When the Feedrate Override switch is set to 0%, axis motion WILL STOP.

The spindle Increase Override and Decrease Override push buttons are active.

The Feed Hold push button allows the operator to immediately retract the tool from the workpieceduring a threading pass. Refer to the operator’s manual (M-505) for information on the Thread CuttingCycle Retract feature.

ESTABLISHING A START POINT FOR THREADING

For accurate thread leads it is essential that the per revolution feedrate of the tool is held constantduring the threading pass. The location of the start point for each threading pass is important in thatsufficient distance must be provided to accelerate the tool from its Z axis velocity at the end of theinfeed to the proper threading velocity.

Due to the nature of the servo-controlled axis drive system, provide a minimum of four leads or .250inch, whichever distance is greater, between the first thread to be cut and the start point for the thread-ing pass.

The X axis start point should be equal to the diameter of the workpiece plus two times the singledepth of thread.

- NOTE -

This minimum clearance must be provided for all threading passes. If a compoundinfeed is used, (see Compound Infeed Threading, page 7-8) work backwards to cal-culate the start point for the cycle. Beginning with the last threading pass, calculatethe Z axis motion during infeed for the first pass. Add this distance to the Z axisclearance (four leads or .250 inch, whichever is greater). This gives the Z axis posi-tion of the start point for the cycle relative to the first thread to be cut.

7-2 M-504A

G32 PROGRAMMING

The G32 Threadcutting command, which must be programmed in each threadcutting data block,automatically synchronizes the threadcutting mode so that the same thread is cut in each pass. TheG32 command is modal and remains active until canceled by another Group 1 G code.

Only one axis need be programmed for a straight thread; both axes must be programmed for a ta-pered thread. The thread length and lead must be programmed in each G32 block.

EXAMPLE 1: G32 STRAIGHT THREADS

For this example it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required diameter and is ready tohave a .0625 lead, single start, 1.00 inch long thread cut on its O.D. Refer to Figure 7.1.

The face of the part is set to Z0. All threading passes will, therefore, be in the minus Z direction. Thespindle centerline is X0. G98 is activated by Safe Index Subprogram O1 in block N360.


N7 (T0707 7/8 - 16 THREAD) ; N450 X.951 ;

N340 G10 P0 Z#500 ; N460 G0 Z.25 ;

N350 G97 S500 M13 P1 ; N470 G1 X.8176 F50. ;

N360 M98 P1 ; N480 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ;

N370 T0707 ; N490 X.951 ;

N380 X.951 Z.25 S1920 ; N500 G0 Z.25 ;

N390 G1 G98 X.8559 F50. ; N510 G1 X.7984 F50. ;

N400 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ; N520 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ;

N410 X.951 ; N530 G1 X.951 ;

N420 G0 Z.25 ; N540 M98 P1 ;

N430 G1 X.8367 F50. ; N550 M1 ;

N440 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ;

M-504A 7-3

Figure 7.1 - G32 Threading Cycle: Straight Thread

TI1607

1.000

.7984

.875

.250

.0383

Lead.0625

Z0

CL

1

2

Single Depth of Thread = .61343 x Lead = .0383

EXAMPLE 2: G32 TAPERED THREADS

When programming tapered threads, movements must be programmed in both the X and Z axes.The lead is specified by the F word, whose lead orientation (X or Z axis) is determined by the angle ofthe taper with the part centerline.

If the angle of taper “B”, Figure 7.2, is less than or equal to 45 degrees, the value of F is measuredparallel to the Z axis. If angle of the taper is greater than 45 degrees, F is measured parallel to the Xaxis.

For the example shown, it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required 1 degree 47minute taper and is ready to have a .071429 lead, single start thread 1.25 inches long turned on itsO.D. The value of the lead F is measured parallel to the Z axis because the angle of taper is less than45 degrees.

The face of the part is set to Z0. All threading passes will, therefore, be in the minus Z direction. Thespindle centerline is X0.


N7 (T0707 1.5 - 14 TAPER THREAD) ; N450 X1.614 ;

N340 G10 P0 Z#500 ; N460 G0 Z.2857 ;

N350 G97 S1000 M13 P1 ; N470 G1 X1.3187 F50. ;

N360 M98 P1 ; N480 G32 X1.4143 Z-1.25 F.071429 ;

N370 T0707 ; N490 X1.614 ;

N380 X1.614 Z.2857 S1680 ; N500 G0 Z.2857 ;

N390 G1 G98 X1.3758 F50. ; N510 G1 X1.2901 F50. ;

N400 G32 X1.4714 Z-1.25 F.071429 ; N520 G32 X1.3857 Z-1.25 F.071429 ;

N410 X1.614 ; N530 X1.614 ;

N420 G0 Z.2857 ; N540 M98 P1 ;

N430 G1 X1.3472 F50. ; N550 M1 ;

N440 G32 X1.4429 Z-1.25 F.071429 ;

7-4 M-504A

Figure 7.2 - G32 Threading Cycle: Tapered Thread

TI2583

.0478

.0571

Z0


Angle B = 1� 47’Taper (R) = .0478”

CL

Lead.071429

1.500

1.614B

1.4044

1.250

.2857

Start Point

G92 CANNED THREADING CYCLE

The G92 Threadcutting command provides the programmer with the capability to define multiplethreading passes by specifying only the depth of cut for each pass.

The G92 lead and thread length commands are programmed in the first threadcutting data blockonly. Only positions in the X (U) axis (thread pass coordinate) need be programmed in subsequentblocks. The G92 command is modal and remains active until canceled by another Group 1 G code.

When cutting a tapered thread, an R word must be programmed in the G92 block.


For this example, it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required diameter and is readyto have a .0625 lead, single start, 1.00 inch long thread cut on its O.D.

The face of the part extends 3.00 inches from the face of the spindle. This value is stored in theWork Shift offset. This causes the face of the part to be set to Z0. All threading passes will be in the mi-nus Z direction. Refer to Figure 7.3.

The tool nose reference point is 1.25 inches from the turret face in the -X direction and .25 inches inthe -Z direction. These dimensions are stored in the Tool Offset (Geometry) file under offset 07 aspositive values. The offset is activated by the T0707 command in block N370.


N7 (T0707 7/8 - 16 THREAD) ; N400 X.8367 ;

N340 G10 P0 Z#500 ; N410 X.8176 ;

N350 G97 S500 M13 P1 ; N420 X.7984 ;

N360 M98 P1 ; N430 G0 ;

N370 T0707 ; N440 M98 P1 ;

N380 X.951 Z0.25 S1920 ; N450 M1 ;

N390 G92 X.8559 Z-1. F.0625 ;

M-504A 7-5


TI2582

.951

.875

.250

.0383

Lead.0625

Z0

CL

Single Depth of Thread = .61343 x Lead = .0383 Start Point

1.000

Return Path

.7984

Note that the start point, block N380, must be outside the thread O.D. as this point establishes thereturn path after the completion of each threading pass.

Block N390 establishes the threading mode, the X coordinate for the first pass (X.8559), threadlength (Z-.75) and lead (F.0625). In subsequent blocks, N400 through N420, it is only necessary toprogram the X coordinate for each pass until the final depth is reached in block N420.

A G00 code MUST be on the line after the last threading pass. If the G00 code is not present, thetool will make two extra passes on the workpiece at the last programmed thread depth.


O.D. tapered threads are programmed as a Negative R word in the G92 block to define the amountof taper. I.D. tapered threads are programmed with Positive R words in the G92 block.

For the example shown, it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required 1 degree 47minute taper and is ready to have a .071429 lead, single start, 1.25 inch long thread turned on its O.D.The value of the lead F is measured parallel to the Z axis and R is measured parallel to the X axis be-cause the angle of the taper is less than 45 degrees. Refer to Figure 7.4.

The face of the part extends 2.25 inches from the face of the spindle. This value is stored in WorkShift offset as Z-2.2500. Storing the part length as a Work Shift offset causes the face of the part to beset to Z0. All threadcutting passes will be in the minus Z direction.


N7 (T0707 1.5 - 14 TAPER THREAD) ; N400 X1.4543 ;

N340 G10 P0 Z#500 ; N410 X1.4314 ;

N350 G97 S1000 M13 P1 ; N420 X1.4086 ;

N360 M98 P1 ; N430 X1.3857 ;

N370 T0707 ; N440 G0 ;

N380 X1.614 Z.2857 S1680 ; N450 M98 P1 ;

N390 G92 X1.4771 Z-1.25 F.071429 R-.0478 ; N460 M1

7-6 M-504A



Angle B = 1� 47’Taper (R) = .0478”

TI2583Z0

Lead.071429

1.614B

1.4044

1.250

.2857

Start Point

.0478

.0571

CL

1.500

The tool tip is located on the turret centerline and extends 1.25 inches from the turret face. The tooldimensions are stored in the Tool Offset (Geometry) file under offset number 07.

Note that the start point, block N380, must be outside the thread O.D. as this point establishes thereturn path after completion of each threading pass.

Block N390 establishes the threading mode, the X coordinate for the first pass (X1.4771), threadlength (Z-1.25), lead (F.071429), and amount of taper (R-.0478). In subsequent blocks, N400 throughN440, it is only necessary to program the X coordinate for each pass until the final thread depth isreached in block N440. Notice that the sign of R must be minus to cause the threading tool to move inthe plus X direction.

See “R Word” in G76 Automatic Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle, page 7-11.

If the angle of taper “B” is less than or equal to 45 degrees, the value of F is measured parallel to theZ axis. If the angle of taper is greater than 45 degrees, F is measured parallel to the X axis.

PLUNGE INFEED THREADING

A plunge infeed is used in the threading example shown in Figure 7.1. During a plunge infeed, Fig-ure 7.5, the tool moves along the X axis from the start point for the threading cycle to the start point forthe current threading pass. Infeed is at 90 degrees relative to the spindle centerline. The next blockcontains the threading G Code (G32) which synchronizes axis motion with spindle rotation. When thespindle is properly oriented, axis motion begins at the commanded per revolution feedrate. As illus-trated in Figure 7.5, an equal amount of material is removed by each edge of the tool.

M-504A 7-7

Figure 7.5 - Plunge Infeed

First Pass

TI1611

Second Pass

Third Pass

Fourth Pass

Start Point

Return Path

COMPOUND INFEED THREADING

When machining a material that presents threading difficulties due to its toughness or when cuttinga coarse thread of extreme depth, it is often desirable to infeed the tool so that the leading edge of thetool cuts the major portion of the material. This reduces deformation of the tool nose due to pressureand heat, thus adding to the tool life. To accomplish this, the X and Z axis position of the tool at the startpoint of each pass is altered to produce the desired infeed angle, as shown in Figure 7.6. This is knownas Compound Infeed.

When using compound infeed, the Z axis start point is shifted by an amount determined by the Xaxis shift (�X) and the desired angle of the compound infeed. In Figure 7.7, the infeed angle, desig-nated �, is at 25 degrees relative to the face of the part.

The incremental shift in the Z axis start point for each pass (�Z) is calculated with the followingequation (Refer to Figure 7.7):

�Z = �X x Tan �

During a compound infeed thread, Figure 7.6, the tool moves on the X axis from threading cyclestart point to the start point for the current threading pass. After the threading pass, the tool movesalong the return path to the next Z axis start position, which is equal to the previous Z axis start pointminus �Z.

When the spindle is properly oriented, axis motion begins. With a compound infeed, the Z axis posi-tion of the tool, at the start of each cut, is closer to the part face than it was on the previous pass. Theresult of this is that the majority of all metal removal takes place along the leading edge of the tool withthe trailing edge making a slight clean-up cut.

7-8 M-504A

Figure 7.6 - Compound Infeed

First Pass

TI1612A

Second Pass

Third Pass

Fourth Pass

Start Point

Return Path

Figure 7.7 illustrates how the incremental shift in the Z start position for the compound infeed is cal-culated for each threading pass.

Where:

X1 = X Axis Position for the 1st Pass.

X2 = X Axis Position for the 2nd Pass.

X3 = X Axis Position for the 3rd Pass.

X4 = X Axis Position for the 4th Pass.

� = Infeed Angle

Z1 = Initial Z Axis Start Point

Z2 = Z1 - �Z

Z3 = X2 - �Z

Z4 = Z3 - �Z

M-504A 7-9

Figure 7.7 - Z Start Point for Compound Infeed

X1

TI1613A

CL

X2

X3

X4

Z1

Z2

Z3

Z4

�X

�Z

�

The following program segment has been taken from Example 1 and modified to incorporate com-pound infeed (Refer to Figure 7.1):

N7 (T0707 7/8 - 16 THREAD) ; N450 X.951 ;

N340 G10 P0 Z#500 ; N460 G0 Z.2411 ;

N350 G97 S1920 M13 P1 ; N470 G1 X.8176 F50. ;

N360 M98 P1 ; N480 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ;

N370 T0707 ; N490 X.951 ;

N380 X.951 Z.25 ; N500 G0 Z.2366 ;

N390 G1 G98 X.8559 F50. ; N510 G1 X.7984 F50. ;

N400 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ; N520 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ;

N410 X.951 ; N530 G1 X.951 ;

N420 G0 Z.2455 ; N540 M98 P1 ;

N430 G1 X.8367 F50. ; N550 M1 ;

N440 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ;

CALCULATIONS

Single Depth of Thread= .61343 x Lead = .0383 (Radius Value)

Number of Threading Passes = 4

� (Infeed Angle)= 25°

Incremental Change in Depth per Pass (�X) = .009575 (Radius Value).01915 (Diameter Value)

Incremental Change in Z (�Z) = �X (Radius Value) x Tan 25°= .009575 x .46631= .004465

Coordinate Values for each Threading Pass

X1 = .875 - .01915 = .85585

X2 = .85585 - .01915 = .83670

X3 = .83670 - .01915 = .81755

X4 = .81755 - .01915 = .79840

Z1 = .25000

Z2 = Z1 - .004465 = .24554

Z3 = X2 - .004465 = .24107

Z4 = Z3 - .004465 = .23661

7-10 M-504A

G76 AUTOMATIC MULTIPLE REPETITIVE THREADING CYCLE

The G76 Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of defin-ing a complete threading operation with two blocks of information. The control interprets the data inthese two blocks and generates the multiple passes required to cut an entire thread.

This automatic threading cycle can be used for cutting straight or tapered threads of constant leadin either Absolute or Incremental mode. The thread may be either external or internal. Plunge (X axis)or compound (X and Z axis) infeed can be performed.

BLOCK FORMAT

Specification of the threading cycle parameters is achieved by using the G76 preparatory com-mand and its associated parameters as follows:

Inch Programming:

G76 P6 Q5 R0.5 ;G76 X(U)±2.5 Z(W)±2.5 R±1.5 P5 Q5 F1.6 ;

Metric Programming:

G76 P6 Q4 R1.4 ;G76 X(U)±3.4 Z(W)±3.4 R±2.4 P4 Q4 F3.4 ;

- NOTE -

Decimal point programming cannot be used when programming the P or Q words ina G76 Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle.

With leading zero suppression, the decimal point is not programmed. Leading zeros can be omit-ted, but all trailing zeros must be programmed.

Example:

The format for the P word in the execution line is P5 for Inch mode and P4 for metricmode.

The format for the Q word in the execution line is Q5 for Inch mode and Q4 for metricmode.

The numbers indicate the number of places to the right of the assumed decimal point.

The control counts from right to left, inserts the decimal point the number of places fromthe right as set by the format. Leading zeros will be automatically inserted when required.

M-504A 7-11


(Constant lead on a part having a uniform diameter.)

For this example, it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required diameter and is readyto have a .125 lead, single start thread, 1.75 inches long cut on its O.D. The thread is to be cut in tenpasses on a High Performance lathe. Refer to Figure 7.8.


N4 (T0404 1.5 - 8 THREAD) ;

N190 G10 P0 Z#500 ;

N200 G97 S500 M13 P1 ;

N210 M98 P1 ;

N220 T0404 ;

N230 X1.6534 Z.5 S960 ;

N240 G76 P011055 Q0015 R.0004 ;

N250 G76 X1.3466 Z-1.75 P0767 Q0242 F.125 ;

N260 M98 P1 ;

N270 M1 ;

7-12 M-504A


TI2580

X1.3466

P Word.0767

Z-1.750

F Word.125

CL


Start PointX1.6534 Z.500

Return Path

1.500

Q Word.0242

Z0


(Constant lead on a tapered part)

For this example, it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required 1° 47” taper and isready to have a .071429 lead, single start thread, 1.25 inch long thread cut on its O.D. Refer to Figure7.9.

N9 (T0909 1.5 - 14 Taper Thread) ;

N90 G10 P0 Z#500 ;

N100 G97 S1000 M13 P1 ;

N110 M98 P1 ;

N120 T0909 ;

N130 X1.614 Z.2857 S1100 ;

N140 G76 P011055 Q0015 R.0004 ;

N150 G76 X1.3857 Z-1.25 P0571 Q0120 R-.0478 F.071429 ;

N160 M98 P1 ;

N170 M1 ;

M-504A 7-13


Angle B = 1� 47’Thread Lead “F” = .071429Single Depth of Thread = .8 x Lead = .0571First Pass Depth = .012Note: All Dimensions are in inches.

TI2581

Z Start

CL

Start Point

Angle “B”

PQ

Tool TipAngle

F

Z

R

X

Return Path

Z0

Part Diameter = 1.750Length of Thread = 1.250Start Point Coordinates: X1.614 Z.2857

G76 PARAMETER LINE (Figures 7.8 and 7.9)

P Word (First G76 Block)

The number of finishing passes is specified by parameter 723 and has a valid range from 1to 99. This parameter is set by the first two digits in the P word located in the first line ofthe G76 programming blocks.

The thread chamfer (anticipated pullout) amount is specified by parameter 109 and has avalid range from 00 to 99. This range allows the programmer to specify a chamfer amountfrom 0.0 times the thread lead to 9.9 times the thread lead. This parameter is set by thesecond two digits in the P word located in the first line of the G76 programming blocks. Asetting of 00 will pull straight out of the part. A setting of 10 will have an anticipated pulloutof one lead.

The tool nose angle is specified by parameter 724 and can be set to 0, 29, 30, 55, 60, or80 degrees. This parameter is set by the last two digits in the P word located in the firstline of the G76 programming blocks. A 0 setting will give a plunge feed.

Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the P word.

Refer to “Block Format”, page 7-11, for the data word format.

Q Word (First G76 Block)

Parameter 725 specifies the minimum depth of cut for a threading pass and is set by thisdata word.

Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the Q word.


R Word (First G76 Block)

Parameter 726 specifies the finish pass allowance per side and is set by this data word.For the examples shown in Figures 7.8 and 7.9, R.0004 will leave .0004 inches per side forthe clean-up pass.


7-14 M-504A

G76 EXECUTION LINE

P Word (Second G76 Block)

Specifies the single depth of the thread and is always positive. It is measured parallel tothe X axis. The P Word value for an American National Thread is calculated as follows:

Straight Thread: Single Depth of Thread = .61343 � Number of Threads per Inch

Tapered Thread: Single Depth of Thread = .8 � Number of Threads per Inch

See Figure 7.8 for the P word definition when cutting a straight thread and Figure 7.9 whencutting a tapered thread.

Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the P data word.


Q Word (Second G76 Block)

Specifies the cutting depth of the first pass and is always positive. It is measured parallel tothe X axis.

See Figure 7.8 for the Q word definition when cutting a straight thread and Figure 7.9,when cutting a tapered thread. This value is calculated by dividing the Single Depth ofThread by the square root of the number of threading passes to be taken.

Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the Q data word.


F Word (Second G76 Block)

Specifies the thread lead and is always positive. It is measured parallel to the Z axis forstraight threads. It is measured parallel to the Z axis for tapered threads when the angle ofthe workpiece centerline is equal to or less than, 45 degrees. If the angle of taper with theworkpiece centerline is greater than 45 degrees, it is measured parallel to the X axis.


X Word (Second G76 Block)

For a straight external thread the X word specifies the root (Minor) diameter of the thread.For a straight internal thread the X word specifies the O.D. (Major Diameter) of the thread.When cutting tapered threads, the X word specifies the root (Minor) diameter at the largeend of the external thread or O.D. (Major) diameter at the small end for an internal thread.The sign will be positive for cutting on the back side of the spindle centerline (+X).


M-504A 7-15

Z Word (Second G76 Block)

In Absolute programming mode the Z word specifies the Absolute Z coordinate at the endof the thread. Unless the face of the part has been set to Z Zero by a Work Shift offset, Zwill be relative to the spindle face. When a Work Shift is used, Z will be relative to the faceof the part. The sign of Z will be positive when measured from the spindle face and nega-tive when measured from the face of the part.


R Word (Second G76 Block)

The R word is only programmed when tapered threads are to be produced. When it is pro-grammed, the R word must be in the second G76 block.

The R word specifies the amount of taper in a tapered thread and is measured parallel tothe X axis. It is calculated as follows:

R = W * TAN B(* = Multiplication)(B = Angle of taper with workpiece centerline)

The R word may be programmed as R0 (zero) or omitted when cutting a straight thread.When cutting a tapered thread, length W must include the additional travel required for thestart point on the Z axis. When cutting a tapered thread in the +X direction, as shown inthe example, R must have a NEGATIVE (-) value. If the minus sign is not used, R is as-sumed to be positive and the taper will be cut in the -X direction or opposite the directionshown. The same rule applies to internal threads cut on the +X side of the spindle center-line. A conventional pipe thread would require a NEGATIVE “R” for O.D. threading and aPOSITIVE “R” value for I.D. Threading.



1. After the initial pass, the control automatically calculates the depth of cut based on a constantvolume removal of material. The minimum cutting depth is controlled by parameter 725. Thisparameter is controlled by the Q word in the first G76 block.

2. During the return path the control defaults to rapid traverse. If a slower rate is desired use theRapid Override switch.

3. For precision threadcutting, the feedrate should be lead limited to 120 inches per minute.

4. The number of clean-up passes is set by parameter 723. This parameter is controlled by thefirst two digits in the P word in the first G76 block. As shipped from Hardinge Inc., this parameteris set at 1. It may be set from 1 to 99 passes.

5. The Reset button is active during the threading pass. The Feedrate Override switch is disabledduring a G76 Automatic Threading Cycle unless it is set to 0%. When the Feedrate Overrideswitch is set to 0%, axis motion will stop.

7-16 M-504A

G34 VARIABLE LEAD THREADCUTTING

The Variable Lead Threadcutting feature enables the programmer to cut straight or taperedthreads having linear increasing or decreasing leads. The G34 code is used to prepare the control forcutting leads of either type.

The length of thread is determined by the distance command for X and/or Z. Only one axis need beprogrammed for a linear thread; both axes must be programmed for a tapered thread.

The initial thread lead is determined by programming an F word. For tapered threads, F is mea-sured parallel to the Z axis when the angle of taper with the workpiece centerline is equal to or lessthan 45 degrees. When the angle is greater than 45 degrees, F is measured parallel to the X axis.

The rate at which the thread lead increases or decreases is programmed as a K word. This is thelinear increase or decrease per revolution - not the change in lead per inch. It is calculated from theformula:

K = [Final Lead2 - Initial Lead2] ÷ [2 x Thread Length]

- NOTE -

When solving the preceding formula for threads with decreasing lead, the value of Kwill be negative. The minus sign must be programmed for a thread with decreasinglead or the control will assume plus and cut a thread with increasing lead.

The maximum spindle speed that can be programmed when cutting variable lead threads is deter-mined by the maximum lead from the formula:

Maximum rpm = 120 ipm ÷ Maximum Lead

When cutting a thread with decreasing lead, if the K word is large enough to decrease the threadlead to zero before the end of the thread is reached, the control will go into a Cycle Stop and an alarmmessage will be displayed on the control display screen.

The Feedrate Override switch is not active during a threadcutting pass.

The G34 command is modal and remains active until canceled by another Group 1 G code.

The data words have the following format:

Inch Programming: X(U)±2.4, Z(W)±2.4, F1.6, K±1.6

Metric Programming: X(U)±3.3, Z(W)±3.3, F3.4, K±3.4

- NOTE -

The Threadcutting Cycle Retract feature is NOT active during G34 Variable LeadThreadcutting.

M-504A 7-17

LEFT-HAND THREADS

If left-hand threads are to be cut from right to left (-Z direction, tool path toward the spindle face), thespindle must be run in the reverse (M04) direction. This will require the tool to be mounted cut side upon the turret top plate.

If left-hand threads are to be cut from left to right (+Z direction, tool path toward the part face), thespindle must be running in the forward (M03) direction. This will require the threading tool tip to bemounted upside down on the turret top plate. When this method is used, a relief of .25 inches [6.35mm] or four times the thread lead, whichever is greater, is required to ensure that lead error does notoccur. This clearance is necessary to allow the CNC control to synchronize spindle and axis motionand also to prevent ringing of the first thread.

7-18 M-504A

TAPPING

Use a self-releasing style tap holder with sufficient longitudinal float to allow the spindle to reversedirection. The Hardinge Model TT-5/8 and TT-3/4 tap holders have a pullout to release increment of3/32 inch, which is sufficient.

1. Program a dwell to allow the spindle to reach the programmed speed before the tool engagesthe workpiece.

Minimum Dwell evious Spindle Speed Tapping Spindle S� �(Pr peed) �1000

2. Use the G32 Preparatory Command.

3. Program the lead command F.001 inch (.0254 mm) per revolution less than the thread leadwhere practical.

4. Minimum dwell for holder release is determined as follows:

Minimum DwellTap Pullout x

Lead x RPM�

( ) ( )

( ) ( )

60

5. Reverse spindle and feed out at lead (F), a distance Z that is sufficient to clear the workpiece.

EXAMPLE

Tap a ¼-20 thread, ½ inch deep using a Hardinge TT-5/8 tap holder.

Previous spindle speed was 1500 rpm.Spindle speed is 250 RPM.Minimum dwell (step 1) for spindle speed change is determined as follows:

Dwell onds� � � �( ) . sec1500 250 1000 125

Minimum dwell (step 4) for Hardinge TT-5/8 tap holder is determined as follows:

Dwellx

xonds� �

(. ) ( )

(. ) ( ). sec

094 60

05 25045

(Rounded to nearest tenth of a second equals .5).

M-504A 7-19


NOTICE

During set up, the operator must activate AUTO mode before line 190 is read by thecontrol. SINGLE mode (block-by-block) execution should not be used for spindle re-versal (M04). Tap breakage or thread damage will occur. It is suggested that the op-erator activate AUTO mode after completion of line 150.

Assume that the part length has been stored as a Work Zero Offset and that tool offset dimensionshave been stored in Tool Offset (Geometry) file.

- NOTE -

Hole was drilled to a depth greater than the depth of the tapped thread.

N5 (T0505 ¼-20 Tap) ; Operator Message

N110 G10 P0 Z#500 ; Set Main Spindle Work Shift

N120 G97 S250 M13 P1 ; Spindle Forward 250 RPM, Coolant ON, Spindle Select



N150 X0. Z0.5 ; Approach

N160 G4 X1.25 ; Dwell for 1.25 Sec. for Spindle Speed Change

N170 G32 Z-0.5 F0.049 ; Tap

N180 G4 X0.5 ; Dwell .5 Seconds

N190 M14 ; Spindle Reverse, Coolant ON

N200 G32 Z0.5 F0.05; Clear Workpiece by .50 Inch


N220 M1 ; Optional Stop

7-20 M-504A

RIGID TAPPING

Rigid tapping is performed through interpolation between the X or Z axis and the spindle. Whenrigid tapping is active, the spindle rotates one revolution as the X or Z axis is fed a distance equal to thelead of the tap. This eliminates the need for a floating tap holder. This capability allows high speed,high precision tapping.

Rigid tapping can be performed on the main or sub-spindle. Rigid tapping is activated by the M29command.

RIGID TAPPING WITH STANDARD TOOLING (Non-Live Tooling)

NOTICE

The basic programming formats shown in this section must be used when perform-ing rigid tapping with standard tooling.

- NOTE -

A spindle speed (S word) must be programmed in the M29 data block after the M29command.

These programming formats are written for 20 threads per inch. Modify the tool assignment anddata values as needed for the thread to be produced.

M-504A 7-21

Program Formats for Standard Tooling

TURRET AT THE MAIN SPINDLE

N10 (Rigid Tap) ; Operator Message

G10 P0 Z#500 ; Set Main Spindle Work Shift

G97 S500 M13 P1 ; Spindle Forward 500 RPM, Coolant ON, Spindle Select

M98 P1 ; Call Safe Index Subprogram O1

T0505 ; Select Tool and Tool Offset

G0 X0. Z.1 ; Approach

M29 S500 ; Activate Rigid Tapping Mode

G84 G99 Z-1. F.05 ; Tapping Cycle Data

G80 ; Cancel Tapping Cycle


M01 ; Option Stop

TURRET AT THE SUB-SPINDLE


G10 P0 Z#501 ; Set Sub-Spindle Work Shift

G97 S500 M33 P2 ; Sub-Spindle Forward 500 RPM, Spindle Select



G0 X0. Z.-1 M8 ; Approach, Coolant ON


G84 G99 Z1. F.05 ; Tapping Cycle Data



M01 ; Option Stop

7-22 M-504A

RIGID TAPPING WITH LIVE TOOLING

NOTICE

The basic programming formats shown in this section must be used when perform-ing rigid tapping with live tooling.

- NOTE -

These programming formats are written for 20 threads per inch. Modify the tool as-signment and data values as needed for the thread to be produced.

Program Formats for Live Tooling

END-WORKING ATTACHMENT AT THE MAIN SPINDLE





M54 S500 P3 ; Live Tool Forward, 500 RPM, Coolant ON, Spindle Select

G0 X1.5 Z.1 C0. ; Approach, Orient Main Spindle


G84 G99 Z-1. F.05 ; Tapping Cycle Data, Tap Hole #1

Z-1. C90. ; Orient Main Spindle and Tap Hole #2




M55 ; Live Tool Stop


M01 ; Option Stop

M-504A 7-23

CROSS-WORKING ATTACHMENT AT THE MAIN SPINDLE






G0 X2.5 Z-.75 C0. ; Approach, Orient Main Spindle


G88 G99 X1.75 F.05 ; Tapping Cycle Data, Tap Hole #1

X1.75 C90. ; Orient Main Spindle and Tap Hole #2






M01 ; Option Stop

7-24 M-504A

END-WORKING ATTACHMENT AT THE SUB-SPINDLE






G0 X1.5 Z-.1 A0. ; Approach, Orient Sub-Spindle


G84 G99 Z1. F.05 ; Tapping Cycle Data, Tap Hole #1

Z1. A90. ; Orient Sub-Spindle and Tap Hole #2






M01 ; Option Stop

M-504A 7-25

CROSS-WORKING ATTACHMENT AT THE SUB-SPINDLE






G0 X2.5 Z.75 A0. ; Approach, Orient Sub-Spindle


G88 G99 X1.75 F.05 ; Tapping Cycle Data, Tap Hole #1

X1.75 A90. ; Orient Sub-Spindle and Tap Hole #2






M01 ; Option Stop

7-26 M-504A

THREAD MILLING

- NOTE -

Thread milling requires the optional Y axis.

INTRODUCTION

Thread milling is capable of producing threads of superior quality than those produced by conven-tional tapping.

Thread milling involves coordinating the rotation and linear motion of the live tooling used for thethread milling operation. Helical Interpolation is used to rotate the live tooling one revolution (360°)while moving on the X axis a distance equal to the thread lead.

CONVENTIONAL MILLING AND CLIMB MILLING

It is recommended that climb milling be used whenever possible. Climb milling offers the followingadvantages over conventional milling:

• Lower cutting forces

• Better thread quality

• Longer insert life

• Better chip development

GENERAL GUIDELINES

1. The preferred method of entry and exit is to arc into and out of the workpiece.

2. The radius of the tool is stored in the R column of the tool geometry offset.

3. A tool quadrant of 0 or 9 is stored in the T column of the tool geometry offset.

4. To simplify programming, program all moves as incremental moves.

WORK PLANE SELECTION

- NOTE -

When performing thread milling on the side of the work piece, G19 specifies the Z,Yplane selection.

G19 must be active for Circular Interpolation and Tool Nose Radius Compensation to functionproperly during thread milling.

M-504A 7-27

INTERNAL THREAD MILLING

Variable Definitions and Formulas

DO = Major Diameter

D = Minor Diameter

PD = Pitch Diameter

CL = Starting Clearance

RE = Entry Radius

RI = D ÷ 2

RO = DO ÷ 2

Entry Radius Formula:

RR CL R

RE

I O

O

�� ( )2 2

2

Programming Example

Thread Description: 1-1/8 x 20

Major Diameter: 1.125

Minor Diameter: 1.0709

Pitch Diameter: 1.0925

Entry Radius Calculation:

RR CL R

RE

I O

O

��

��

�( ) (. . ) .

.

.2 2 2 2

2

5355 02 5625

1125

2657 .

..

3164

11255175�

BASIC TOOL MOTION

1. Position the tool at the center of the hole to be milled.

2. Move the X axis to thread depth plus ¼ of the thread lead.

3. Move the Y axis in the positive direction to clear the minor diameter by .02 inches.

4. Arc into the workpiece, moving upward ¼ lead on the X axis.

5. Helical Interpolation on the Z and Y axes for the radial move (360°) while making a linear moveupward 1 lead on the X axis.

6. Arc out of the workpiece, moving upward ¼ lead on the X axis.

7-28 M-504A


- NOTE -

Tool motion indicated in this program segment is illustrated in Figure 7.10.

The flat on the sample workpiece, shown in Figure 7.11, was machined in a previousoperation.

This example uses climb milling to produce a right-hand thread, starting at the bottom of the holeand milling out. Incremental programming is used to simplify programming.


N6 ;



G97 S4000 M53 P3 ; Live Tool Forward, 4000 RPM, Coolant ON, Spindle Select

G0 X1.7 Z-.9 ; Cutter to Hole Center

G1 G98 X.55 F20. ; Feed X Axis to Thread Depth + ¼ Lead (Motion 1)

G19 ; Select Work Plane

G1 G98 G41 V.5155 W0. F8. ; Move to Y Axis Clearance Position (Motion 2)

G3 W.5625 V-.5155 U.025 R.5175 ; Entry Arc (Motion 3)

G3 K-.5625 U.1 ; Mill Thread (Motion 4)

G3 W-.5625 V-.5155 U.025 R.5175 ; Exit Arc (Motion 5)

G1 G40 Y0. W0. ; Move to Center of Hole and Cancel Tool Compensation (Motion 6)

G18 ; Select Work Plane

X2. F20. ; Move to Clear Workpiece



M01 ; Optional Stop

M-504A 7-29

Figure 7.10 - Tool Motion for Sample Program Segment(Viewed on the X Axis)

TI4534

7-30 M-504A

Figure 7.11 - Workpiece for Sample Program Segment

TI4533

EXTERNAL THREAD MILLING

Variable Definitions and Formulas

DO = Major Diameter

D = Minor Diameter

PD = Pitch Diameter

CL = Starting Clearance

RE = Entry Radius

RI = D ÷ 2

RO = DO ÷ 2

Entry Radius Formula:

RR CL R

RE

O I

I

�� ( )2 2

2

Basic Tool Motion

1. Position the tool as follows:

Y Axis: Clear of the Workpiece

Z Axis: at the center of the post to be milled

2. Move the X axis to the Start Point.

3. Move the Y axis in the negative direction to position the tool clear the major diameter by .02inches.

4. Arc into the workpiece, moving ¼ lead on the X axis.

5. Helical Interpolation on the Z and Y axes for the radial move (360°) while making a linear moveupward 1 lead on the X axis.

6. Arc out of the workpiece, moving ¼ lead on the X axis.

M-504A 7-31

- NOTES -

7-32 M-504A

CHAPTER 8 - G80 SERIES CYCLES

NOTICE

Live tooling attachments are available with or without through-tool coolant capability.Live tooling attachments without through-tool coolant capability can be run with orwithout coolant, as the machining process requires. Live tooling attachments withthrough-tool coolant capability MUST be run with coolant turned ON.

INTRODUCTION

The control offers six G80 series cycles. The G80 series includes a cycle for each of the followingoperations:

Face and Side Drilling

Face and Side Tapping

Face and Side Boring

CANCELING CYCLES

Cycles MUST be canceled immediately after completion. If a cycle is not canceled and axis motionis commanded, the axes will move to the new coordinate position and execute the active cycle. Pro-gram a G80 command in a data block by itself immediately after the last data block to be acted on bythe cycle.

SPINDLE ORIENT

B axis and C axis spindle orient are included with the live tooling feature.

B axis and C axis spindle orient are separate purchased options on machines not equipped with thelive tooling feature.

Refer to Chapter 11 for information on programming spindle orient.

M-504A 8-1

GENERAL DESCRIPTIONS

G83 FACE DRILLING CYCLE

The G83 cycle performs drilling operations on the face of the workpiece. The G83 cycle isextremely versatile, in that it can perform the single-pass, peck, or high speed peck drilling.Refer to page 8-3 for a description of the G83 Face Drilling Cycle.

G84 FACE TAPPING CYCLE

The G84 cycle performs tapping operations on the face of the workpiece. The G84 cycletaps to depth, reverses tool direction, and feeds out at the programmed feedrate. Refer topage 8-15 for a description of the G84 Face Tapping Cycle.

G85 FACE BORING CYCLE

The G85 cycle performs boring operations on the face of the workpiece. The G85 cyclebores to depth and feeds out at the programmed feedrate. Spindle motion is continuous. Re-fer to page 8-23 for a description of the G85 Face Boring Cycle.

G87 SIDE DRILLING CYCLE

The G87 cycle performs drilling operations on the side of the workpiece. The G87 cycle isextremely versatile, in that it can perform the single-pass, peck, or high-speed peck drilling.Refer to page 8-9 for a description of the G87 Side Drilling Cycle.

G88 SIDE TAPPING CYCLE

The G88 cycle performs tapping operations on the side of the workpiece. The G88 cycletaps to depth, reverses tool direction, and feeds out at the programmed feedrate. Refer topage 8-19 for a description of the G88 Side Tapping Cycle.

G89 SIDE BORING CYCLE

The G89 cycle performs boring operations on the side of the workpiece. The G89 cyclebores to depth and feeds out at the programmed feedrate. Spindle motion is continuous. Re-fer to page 8-27 for a description of the G89 Side Boring Cycle.

8-2 M-504A

DRILLING CYCLES

G83 FACE DRILLING CYCLE

Data Words

FORMATS

- NOTE -


The M200 (or M202) command is not required if programming spindle orient with theB axis command.

Inch Programming:

G83 Z±2.4 Q6 P8 R±2.4 (C3.2 or B3) K1.0 F3.2 (in/min) or F1.6 (in/rev) M200 (or M202) ;

Metric Programming:

G83 Z±3.3 Q6 P8 R±3.3 (C3.2 or B3) K1.0 F5.0 (mm/min) or F3.4 (mm/rev) M200 (or M202) ;

DEFINITIONS

- NOTE -

* denotes optional command

G83 COMMAND G code for the Face Drilling Cycle.

Z WORD Specifies the final depth of the drilled hole, in reference to Z0 (zero).

In the sample program segment, the final depth of the drilled hole is 3.000inches.

Q WORD * Specifies the depth of each cutting pass when peck drilling. If the Q word isnot programmed, a single-pass drilling operation will be performed. In thesample program segment, each cutting pass is .775 inches. Decimal pointprogramming is NOT allowed.

The control assumes decimal point placement as Q2.4 for English units(inches) and Q3.3 for metric units (millimeters). Leading zeros may beomitted; however, trailing zeros MUST be programmed. Refer to thefollowing examples:

Inch: Q2500 = 0.25 Inches

Metric: Q2500 = 2.5 Millimeters

M-504A 8-3

P WORD * Specifies the dwell at the bottom of the drilled hole. The dwell is specified inmilliseconds. “P0" is assumed if the P word is not programmed. Decimalpoint programming is NOT allowed.

The control assumes decimal point placement as 5.3 . Leading zeros maybe omitted; however, trailing zeros MUST be programmed. Refer to thefollowing examples:

P300 = 0.3 Second Dwell

P6500= 6.5 Second Dwell

R WORD * Specifies the incremental distance from the start point to the return point ofthe cycle. The sign is determined by the direction of motion on the Z axisfrom the start point to the return point.

If the R word is not programmed, the return point will be equal to the startpoint.

C WORD Specifies the spindle orientation for the drilled hole. When specifying spindleorientation with the C word, M23 (or M223) must be programmed in a blockby itself before the G83 command block and M24 (or M224) must beprogrammed in a block by itself immediately after the G80 command block.The appropriate spindle brake must be engaged to lock the spindle inposition. When peck drilling is desired, the C word must be programmed witha Q word. The spindle orientation can also be specified with the optional Bword.

B WORD(Optional)

Specifies the spindle orientation for the drilled hole. When specifying spindleorientation with the B word, the spindle brake will automatically engage tolock the spindle in position. The X word must be programmed for each holeto be drilled. When peck drilling is desired, the B word must be programmedwith a Q word. The spindle orientation can also be specified with the C word.

K WORD * Specifies the number of times the drilling cycle will be performed at eachlocation. K is assumed to be “1" if it is not programmed.

F WORD Specifies the feedrate for the drilling cycle. In the sample program segment,the feedrate is 8 inches per minute.

8-4 M-504A

Tool Movement in the G83 Cycle

SINGLE PASS DRILLING


If the Q word is NOT programmed, a single pass drilling operation is performed. The series of axismovements is as follows:

1. From the start point, the drill rapids on the Z axis to the return point.

2. The drill feeds to depth (Z word).

3. If the P word is programmed, the drill dwells at the bottom of the hole.

4. The drill rapids to the start point.

M-504A 8-5

Figure 8.1 - G83 Single Pass Drilling Cycle

Start Point

TI4187

Z Word R Word

ReturnPoint

+Z

+X

CL

Z0

PECK DRILLING


If the Q word is programmed and parameter 5101, bit 2 is set to “1", a peck drilling operation is per-formed. The series of axis movements is as follows:


2. From the return point, the drill feeds in “Q” amount.

3. The drill rapids to the return point.

4. The drill rapids down to the “Rapid-to-Feed” point.

5. The drill feeds in “Q + Rapid-to-Feed”.

6. Steps 3, 4, and 5 are repeated until full depth of cut is achieved.



8-6 M-504A

Figure 8.2 - G83 Peck Drilling Cycle

Start Point

TI4186

Z Word R Word

ReturnPoint

+Z

+X

CL

Z0

Q Word (In-Feed)

Rapid-to-FeedDistance*

* The Rapid-to-Feed distance is determined by parameter 5114.

HIGH SPEED PECK DRILLING


If the Q word is programmed and parameter 5101, bit 2 is set to “0", a high speed peck drilling oper-ation is performed. The series of axis movements is as follows:



3. The drill rapids up a distance equal to the retract increment.

4. The drill feeds in “Q + Retract Increment”.

5. Steps 3 and 4 are repeated until full depth of cut is achieved.



M-504A 8-7

Figure 8.3 - G83 High Speed Peck Drilling Cycle

Start Point

TI4186

Z Word R Word

ReturnPoint

+Z

+X

CL

Z0

Q Word (In-Feed)

RetractIncrement*

* The Retract increment is determined by parameter 5114.

G83 Sample Program Segment


Z0 (zero) is the face of the workpiece.

Three .625 inch diameter holes will be drilled in the face of the workpiece to a depth of 3.000 inches.

.

M23 ; Activate Contouring Mode

X1. Z.1 C0. ; Position Tool at Start Point, Orient Spindle

M54 S1000 P3 ; Live Tooling Forward, Coolant ON, 1000 RPM, Spindle Select

G98 G83 Z-3. Q7750 C0. F8. M200 ; Per Minute Feedrate, Define G83 Cycle, Drill First Hole,Spindle Brake ON

C120. Z-3. Q7750 ; Drill Second Hole

C240. Z-3. Q7750 ; Drill Third Hole

G80 ; Cancel Cycle

M24 ; Cancel Contouring Mode

M201 ; Spindle Brake OFF

M55 ; Live Tooling Stop, Coolant OFF

.

8-8 M-504A

Figure 8.4 - G83 Face Drilling Cycle: Sample Workpiece

Z0

TI4188

3.00076.20

+Z

+X

CL

120�

Typical

NOTE: All dimensions shown in Inches [Millimeters].

.625 Dia.(3 Places)

1.000 Dia.

G87 SIDE DRILLING CYCLE

Data Words

FORMATS

- NOTE -



Inch Programming:

G87 X±2.4 Q6 P8 R±2.4 (C3.2 or B3.2) K1.0 F3.2 (in/min) or F1.6 (in/rev) M200 (or M202) ;

Metric Programming:

G87 X±3.3 Q6 P8 R±3.3 (C3.2 or B3.2) K1.0 F5.0 (mm/min) or F3.4 (mm/rev) M200 (or M202) ;

DEFINITIONS

- NOTE -

All X dimensions are shown as diameter values.


G87 COMMAND G code for the Side Drilling Cycle.

X WORD Specifies the final depth of the drilled hole, in reference to X0 (zero). X isprogrammed as a diameter value.

In the sample program segment, the final depth of the drilled hole is .500inches, as measured on the diameter.

Q WORD * Specifies the depth of each cutting pass when peck drilling. If the Q word isnot programmed, a single-pass drilling operation will be performed. In thesample program segment, each cutting pass is .75 inches, as measured onthe diameter. Decimal point programming is NOT allowed.

The control assumes decimal point placement as Q2.4 for English units(inches) and Q3.3 for metric units (millimeters). Leading zeros may beomitted; however, trailing zeros MUST be programmed. Refer to thefollowing examples:

Inch: Q2500 = 0.25 Inches

Metric: Q2500 = 2.5 Millimeters

M-504A 8-9

P WORD * Specifies the dwell at the bottom of the drilled hole. The dwell is specified inmilliseconds. “P0" is assumed if the P word is not programmed. Decimalpoint programming is NOT allowed.




R WORD * Specifies the incremental distance from the start point to the return point ofthe cycle. The sign is determined by the direction of motion on the X axisfrom the start point to the return point.

The R word is always programmed as a RADIUS value. In the sampleprogram segment, the distance is .40 inches, as measured on the radius.



B WORD(Optional)


K WORD * Specifies the number of times the drilling cycle will be performed at eachlocation. K is assumed to be “1" if it is not programmed.

F WORD Specifies the feedrate for the drilling cycle. In the sample program segment,the feedrate is .005 inches per revolution.

8-10 M-504A


SINGLE PASS DRILLING


If the Q word is NOT programmed, a single pass drilling operation is performed. The series of axismovements is as follows:

1. From the start point, the drill rapids on the X axis to the return point.

2. The drill feeds to depth (X word).



M-504A 8-11

Figure 8.5 - G87 Single Pass Drilling Cycle

Start Point

TI4189

Z Word(Diameter Value)

R Word

+Z

+X

CL X0

Return Point

PECK DRILLING


If the Q word is programmed and parameter 5101, bit 2 is set to “1", a peck drilling operation is per-formed. The series of axis movements is as follows:



3. The drill rapids to the return point.

4. The drill rapids down to the “Rapid-to-Feed” point.

5. The drill feeds in “Q + Rapid-to-Feed”.

6. Steps 3, 4, and 5 are repeated until full depth of cut is achieved.



8-12 M-504A

Figure 8.6 - G87 Peck Drilling Cycle

Start Point

TI4190

X Word(Diameter Value)

R Word

+Z

+X

CL X0

Q Word(In-Feed)

Rapid-to-Feed Distance*

* The Rapid-to-Feed distance is determined by parameter 5114.

Return Point

HIGH SPEED PECK DRILLING


If the Q word is programmed and parameter 5101, bit 2 is set to “0", a high speed peck drilling oper-ation is performed. The series of axis movements is as follows:



3. The drill rapids up a distance equal to the retract increment.

4. The drill feeds in “Q + Retract Increment”.

5. Steps 3 and 4 are repeated until full depth of cut is achieved.



M-504A 8-13

Figure 8.7 - G87 High Speed Peck Drilling Cycle

Start Point

TI4190


R Word

+Z

+X

CL X0

Q Word(In-Feed)

Retract Increment*

* The Retract increment is determined by parameter 5114.

Return Point



- NOTE -

This sample program segment illustrates the use of G99 (per revolution feedrate).

X0 (zero) is the centerline of the workpiece.

Three .375 inch diameter holes will be drilled in the diameter of the workpiece to a depth of 1.000inches.

.


X2.7 Z-1.5 C0. ; Position Tool at Start Point, Orient Spindle


G99 G87 X0.5 Q7500 C0. F.005 M200 ; Per Revolution Feedrate, Define G87 Cycle, Drill First Hole,Spindle Brake ON

C120. X0.5 Q7500 ; Drill Second Hole

C240. X0.5 Q7500 ; Drill Third Hole

G80 ; Cancel Cycle




.

8-14 M-504A

Figure 8.8 - G87 Side Drilling Cycle: Sample Workpiece

TI4191

+Z

+X

CL.500

[12.7]2.500[63.5]

X0

1.500[38.1]1.500 [38.1]

Dia.

(3 Places) Z0

NOTE:All dimensions are shown in Inches [Millimeters].All measurements for X are diameter values from the spindle centerline.

120�

Typical

TAPPING CYCLES

G84 RIGHT-HAND FACE TAPPING CYCLE

Data Words

FORMATS

- NOTE -



Inch Programming:

G84 Z±2.4 P8 R±2.4 (C3.2 or B3.2) K1.0 F3.2 (in/min) or F1.6 (in/rev) M200 (or M202) ;

Metric Programming:

G84 Z±3.3 P8 R±3.3 (C3.2 or B3.2) K1.0 F5.0 (mm/min) or F3.4 (mm/rev) M200 (or M202) ;

DEFINITIONS

- NOTE -


G84 COMMAND G code for the Right-Hand Face Tapping Cycle.

Z WORD Specifies the final depth of the tapped hole, in reference to Z0 (zero).

In the sample program segment, the final depth of the tapped hole is 2.625inches.

P WORD * Specifies the dwell at the bottom of the tapped hole. The dwell is specified inmilliseconds. “P0" is assumed if the P word is not programmed. Decimalpoint programming is NOT allowed.






M-504A 8-15


B WORD(Optional)


K WORD * Specifies the number of times the tapping cycle will be performed at eachlocation. K is assumed to be “1" if it is not programmed.

F WORD Specifies the feedrate for the tapping cycle. In the sample program segment,the feedrate is .07692 inches per revolution.

8-16 M-504A



The series of axis movements is as follows:

1. From the start point, the tap rapids on the Z axis to the return point.

2. The tap feeds to depth (Z word).

3. If the P word is programmed, the live tooling stops and the tap dwells at the bottom of the hole.

4. The live tooling reverses direction and the tap feeds to the return point.

5. The tap rapids to the start point.

M-504A 8-17

Figure 8.9 - G84 Face Tapping Cycle

Start Point

TI4192

R Word

+Z

+X

CL

Return Point

Z0

Z Word




Tapped hole size is ½-13.

Three holes drilled in the face of the workpiece will be tapped to a depth of 2.625 inches.

.





G99 G84 Z-2.625 C0. F.0769 M200 ; Per Revolution Feedrate, Define G84 Cycle, Tap First Hole,Spindle Brake ON

C120. Z-2.625 ; Tap Second Hole

C240. Z-2.625 ; Tap Third Hole

G80 ; Cancel Cycle




.

8-18 M-504A

Figure 8.10 - G84 Face Tapping Cycle: Sample Workpiece

TI4193

+Z

+X

CL

Z0

½ - 13 Tap(3 Places)

1.000 [25.40] Dia.

NOTE:All dimensions are shown in Inches [Millimeters].

2.625[66.68]

120�

Typical

G88 RIGHT-HAND SIDE TAPPING CYCLE

Data Words

FORMATS

- NOTE -



Inch Programming:

G88 X±2.4 P8 R±2.4 (C3.2 or B3.2) K1.0 F3.2 (in/min) or F1.6 (in/rev) M200 (or M202) ;

Metric Programming:

G88 X±3.3 P8 R±3.3 (C3.2 or B3.2) K1.0 F5.0 (mm/min) or F3.4 (mm/rev) M200 (or M202) ;

DEFINITIONS

- NOTE -


G88 COMMAND G code for the Right-Hand Side Tapping Cycle.

X WORD Specifies the final depth of the tapped hole, in reference to X0 (zero).

In the sample program segment, the final depth of the tapped hole is .768inches.

P WORD * Specifies the dwell at the bottom of the tapped hole. The dwell is specified inmilliseconds. “P0" is assumed if the P word is not programmed. Decimalpoint programming is NOT allowed.




R WORD * Specifies the incremental distance from the start point to the return point ofthe cycle. The sign is determined by the direction of motion on the X axisfrom the start point to the return point.

The R word is always programmed as a RADIUS value. In the sampleprogram segment, the distance is .40 inches, as measured on the radius.


M-504A 8-19


B WORD(Optional)


K WORD * Specifies the number of times the tapping cycle will be performed at eachlocation. K is assumed to be “1" if it is not programmed.

F WORD Specifies the feedrate for the tapping cycle. In the sample program segment,the feedrate is .05 inches per revolution.

8-20 M-504A




1. From the start point, the tap rapids on the X axis to the return point.

2. The tap feeds to depth (X word).

3. If the P word is programmed, the live tooling stops and the tap dwells at the bottom of the hole.

4. The live tooling reverses direction and the tap feeds to the return point.

5. The tap rapids to the start point.

M-504A 8-21

Figure 8.11 - G88 Side Tapping Cycle

Start Point

TI4195


R Word

+Z

+X

CL X0

Return Point




Tapped hole size is ¼-20.

Three holes drilled in the diameter of the workpiece will be tapped to a depth of .768 inches.

.




G98 G88 X.964 C0. F12.5 M200 ; Per Minute Feedrate, Define G88 Cycle, Tap First Hole,Spindle Brake ON

C120. X.964 ; Tap Second Hole

C240. X.964 ; Tap Third Hole

G80 ; Cancel Cycle




.

8-22 M-504A

Figure 8.12 - G88 Side Tapping Cycle: Sample Workpiece

TI4196

+Z

+X

CL

.964[24.49]

2.500[63.50]

¼-20 Tap(3 Places)

X0

Z0


120�

Typical

1.500[38.10]

BORING CYCLES

G85 FACE BORING CYCLE

Data Words

FORMATS

- NOTE -



Inch Programming:

G85 Z±2.4 P8 R±2.4 (C3.2 or B3.2) K1.0 F3.2 (in/min) or F1.6 (in/rev) M200 (or M202) ;

Metric Programming:

G85 Z±3.3 P8 R±3.3 (C3.2 or B3.2) K1.0 F5.0 (mm/min) or F3.4 (mm/rev) M200 (or M202) ;

DEFINITIONS

- NOTE -


G85 COMMAND G code for the Face Boring Cycle.

Z WORD Specifies the final depth of the bored hole, in reference to Z0 (zero).

In the sample program segment, the final depth of the bored hole is 2.313inches.

P WORD * Specifies the dwell at the bottom of the bored hole. The dwell is specified inmilliseconds. “P0" is assumed if the P word is not programmed. Decimalpoint programming is NOT allowed.






M-504A 8-23


B WORD(Optional)


K WORD * Specifies the number of times the boring cycle will be performed at eachlocation. K is assumed to be “1" if it is not programmed.

F WORD Specifies the feedrate for the boring cycle. In the sample program segment,the feedrate is 1.5 inches per minute.

8-24 M-504A




1. From the start point, the boring bar rapids on the Z axis to the return point.

2. The boring bar feeds to depth (Z word).

3. If the P word is programmed, the boring bar dwells at the bottom of the hole. Tool motioncontinues.

4. The boring bar feeds to the return point.

5. The boring bar rapids to the start point.

M-504A 8-25

Figure 8.13 - G85 Face Boring Cycle

TI4197

+Z

+X

CL

Z Word

Z0

R Word

Start Point

Return Point




Three holes drilled in the face of the workpiece will be bored to a depth of 2.313 inches.

.




G98 G85 Z-2.313 C0. F1.5 M200 ; Per Minute Feedrate, Define G85 Cycle, Bore First Hole,Spindle Brake ON

C120. Z-2.313 ; Bore Second Hole

C240. Z-2.313 ; Bore Third Hole

G80 ; Cancel Cycle




.

8-26 M-504A

Figure 8.14 - G85 Face Boring Cycle: Sample Workpiece

NOTE:All dimensions are shown in Inches [Millimeters].

+Z

+X

CL

.500 Dia.(3 Places)

Z0

120�

Typical

2.313[58.75]

TI4198

1.000 Dia.

G89 SIDE BORING CYCLE

Data Words

FORMATS

- NOTE -



Inch Programming:

G89 X±2.4 P8 R±2.4 (C3.2 or B3.2) K1.0 F3.2 (in/min) or F1.6 (in/rev) M200 (or M202) ;

Metric Programming:

G89 X±3.3 P8 R±3.3 (C3.2 or B3.2) K1.0 F5.0 (mm/min) or F3.4 (mm/rev) M200 (or M202) ;

DEFINITIONS

- NOTE -


G89 COMMAND G code for the Side Boring Cycle.

X WORD Specifies the final depth of the bored hole, in reference to X0 (zero).

In the sample program segment, the final depth of the bored hole is .80inches.

P WORD * Specifies the dwell at the bottom of the bored hole. The dwell is specified inmilliseconds. “P0" is assumed if the P word is not programmed. Decimalpoint programming is NOT allowed.







M-504A 8-27

B WORD(Optional)


K WORD * Specifies the number of times the boring cycle will be performed at eachlocation. K is assumed to be “1" if it is not programmed.

F WORD Specifies the feedrate for the boring cycle. In the sample program segment,the feedrate is 1.5 inches per minute.




1. From the start point, the boring bar rapids on the X axis to the return point.

2. The boring bar feeds to depth (X word).

3. If the P word is programmed, the boring bar dwells at the bottom of the hole. Tool motioncontinues.

4. The boring bar feeds to the return point.

5. The boring bar rapids to the start point.

8-28 M-504A

Figure 8.15 - G89 Side Boring Cycle

TI4199

+Z

+X

CL X WordDiameter Value

X0

R Word

Start Point

Return Point




Three holes drilled in the diameter of the workpiece will be bored to a depth of .80 inches.

.




G98 G89 X.9 C0. F1.5 M200 ; Per Minute Feedrate, Define G89 Cycle, Bore First HoleSpindle Brake ON

C120. X.9 ; Bore Second Hole

C240. X.9 ; Bore Third Hole

G80 ; Cancel Cycle




.

M-504A 8-29

Figure 8.16 - G89 Side Boring Cycle: Sample Workpiece

TI4200

+Z

+X

CL

.900[22.86]

2.500[63.50]

.500 [12.70]Dia.

X0

Z0


120�

Typical

1.500[38.10]

(3 Places)

- NOTES -

8-30 M-504A

CHAPTER 9 - MISCELLANEOUS

CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED

Constant Surface Speed programming provides the capability of programming the speed of theworkpiece with respect to the tool tip directly in surface feet per minute in inch mode or surface metersper minute in metric mode.

Constant Surface Speed programming is a function of the spindle speed range and the pro-grammed constant surface speed (S word). Constant Surface Speed mode is selected by the G96command and is canceled by G97. The G97 command is the start-up mode and selects the directRPM mode, which allows direct RPM programming of the spindle speed.

Before programming a G96 command, a block containing a G50 command and an S word to estab-lish the maximum RPM limit for the following Constant Surface Speed operation MUST be pro-grammed. The format for the S word is S4. As the distance between the tool tip and the spindlecenterline varies during a Constant Surface Speed operation, the variable spindle speed is comparedto this maximum RPM limit. If the limit is reached, the control will continue execution of the partprogram at the spindle speed limit.

NOTICE

When establishing the Constant Surface Speed spindle RPM limit, do not programany other data words in the same block with the G50 command and the S word.

In Constant Surface Speed mode, the constant surface speed command to the spindle is also pro-grammed as an S word. The format is S4 in inch mode and S3 in metric mode. The units are surfacefeet per minute in inch mode and surface meters per minute in metric mode.

A feedrate must also be programmed. The control will then automatically adjust the spindle speedwithin its range to maintain a constant surface speed as the cutting radius of the workpiece varies.Since the feedrate is held constant while the spindle speed varies, it is recommended that the feedratebe programmed in Inches per Revolution (G99). This will prevent overloading the tool in case a fastfeedrate is active when the spindle speed is decreasing (as when facing from the center outward).

Figure 9.1 illustrates an elementary part that uses Constant Surface Speed programming. For thisexample, it is assumed that the part has already been roughed out and is ready to be finish contoured.

The part face is set to Z Zero by the G10 command in block N10. All turning passes will, therefore,be in the NEGATIVE Z direction. X Zero is at the spindle centerline.

The tool tip extends 1.25 inches from the turret reference point in the X direction and 2.25 inchesfrom the turret reference point in the Z direction. These dimensions will be compensated for by the tooloffsets selected in block N30.

M-504A 9-1

A maximum spindle speed of 4000 RPM for the operation is established in block N60.

Block N70 establishes Constant Surface Speed mode and a surface speed of 500 surface feet perminute.

The Inch per Revolution feedrate (G99) is established in block N80 along with a feedrate of .007inches per revolution.

Sample Program:


N10 G10 P0 Z#500 ;

N20 M98 P1 ;

N30 T0707 ;

N40 G97 S1000 M13 P1 ;

N50 X1.14 Z.1 ;

N60 G50 S4000 ;

N70 G96 S500 ;

N80 G1 G99 Z0. F.007 ;

N90 X0. ;

N100 X1. ;

N110 X2. Z-.5 ;

N120 Z-.7 ;

N130 X3. Z-1.2 ;

N140 Z-1.5 ;

N150 X4.1 ;

N160 M98 P1 ;

N170 M1 ;

N180 M30 ;

A spindle speed MUST be active when entering Constant Surface Speed mode or a Cycle Stopcondition will be created when the first block following the Constant Surface Speed command isencountered.

The Spindle Increase and Decrease push buttons, Feedrate Override switch, and Rapid Overrideswitch are active in Constant Surface Speed mode.

9-2 M-504A

Figure 9.1 - Constant Surface Speed Example

TI2444

.40 .50

.50

.75

1.25

1.50

2.90

ChuckFace

SpindleFace

CL

1.00

2.00

3.00

4.00

.030 (Face Off)

SUBPROGRAMS

The subprogram feature provides the main part program with the capability of calling frequently re-peated patterns from memory, and executing them a specified number of times. The subprogram iscalled from a special block in the main part program. The subprogram must be in memory, whencalled.

Subprogram Format:

O____; Subprogram Name

N____; Program Block

N____; .

N____; .

N____; .

M99; Return to calling program

Subprograms stored in memory must be identified by the letter “O” followed by program number inthe first data block. See “Program Number”, page 1-10.

The last data block of the subprogram MUST contain an M99 command. This command should bein a block by itself.

Subprograms may be stored from the Manual Data Input keyboard, through the RS-232 serial port,or through the ATA flash card port.

Refer to the operator’s manual (M-505) for information on inputting programs from the Manual DataInput keyboard, through the RS-232 serial port, or through the ATA flash card port.

M-504A 9-3

SUBPROGRAM CALL

Subprograms are activated by a special “call” block in the main part program which must have thefollowing format:

M98 Paaabbbb ;

Where:

M98 is the miscellaneous command to activate the subprogram call function.

P is the letter address used to specify the number of times the subprogram is to be per-formed and the subprogram number.

“aaa” specifies the number of times the subprogram is to be performed. The subprogrammay be performed up to 999 times. IF NO VALUE IS ENTERED, THE SUBPROGRAM ISPERFORMED ONCE.

“bbbb” specifies number of the subprogram to be executed.

Sample Program Line #1:M98 P50100 ; (Subprogram O0100 will be executed five times.)

Sample Program Line #2:M98 P100 ; (Subprogram O0100 will be executed one time.)

Sample Program Line #3:M98 P9990100 ; (Subprogram O0100 will be executed 999 times.)

- NOTE -

When the subprogram is to be executed just once, use the format shown in sampleprogram line #2. As shown, leading zeros may be omitted from the subprogramnumber when this format is used.

9-4 M-504A

SAFE INDEX SUBPROGRAMS

INTRODUCTION

CAUTION

NEVER use subprogram O1 when machining on the optional sub-spindle. Personalinjury and/or damage to the tooling and the machine tool may result.

NEVER use subprogram O2 when machining on the main spindle. Personal injuryand/or damage to the tooling and the machine tool may result.

NOTICE

The cutting tool must be moved clear of the workpiece before calling a Safe Indexsubprogram. Refer to the programming formats beginning on page 1-55.

- NOTE -

Use of the Hardinge Safe Index subprograms is strongly recommended. They aredesigned for machine safety and to help simplify programming.

The Safe Index subprograms are used to reactivate start-up modes, for example; positioningmode, deactivate Tool Nose Radius Compensation, establish in/min [mm/min] feed, and move theturret to the safe index position.


During main spindle operation the tool typically engages the workpiece with negative (-) Z movesand clears the workpiece with positive (+) Z moves. This is just the opposite of machining a workpiecein the optional sub-spindle.

Safe Index subprogram O1 has been developed specifically for use when machining on the mainspindle. This main spindle Safe Index subprogram is NOT to be used when machining on thesub-spindle.

SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION [Option]

During sub-spindle operation the tool typically engages the workpiece with positive (+) Z movesand clears the workpiece with negative (-) Z moves. This is just the opposite of machining a workpiecein the main spindle.

Safe Index subprogram O2 has been developed specifically for use when machining on thesub-spindle. This sub-spindle Safe Index subprogram is NOT to be used when machining on the mainspindle.

M-504A 9-5

SUBPROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

Main Spindle Safe Index Subprogram O1

Safe Index subprogram O1 is to be loaded permanently into the control memory for all machines.

The X safe index value should be equal to the X axis Reference position. Refer to Appendix One forinformation on the X axis Reference position.

The main spindle Z axis safe index value is set by the machine operator. It should be equal to the Zaxis distance from the turret top plate reference point to the tip of the longest tool PLUS 1 inch. Refer toFigure 9.2.

The main spindle safe index positions will be assigned to the following macro variables at the be-ginning of the part program:

X axis safe index position: Macro variable 502

Z axis safe index position: Macro variable 503

9-6 M-504A

Figure 9.2 - Z Axis Safe Index Valuefor Main Spindle Operations

TI5669

+X

+Z

Z

Safe Index = Z + 1” [25mm]

BMT 45 Turret Top Plate Hardinge Turret Top Plate

Z

Sub-Spindle Safe Index Subprogram O2

Safe Index subprogram O2 is to be loaded permanently into the control memory for machinesequipped with the optional sub-spindle.

The X safe index value should be equal to the X axis Reference position. Refer to Appendix One forinformation on the X axis Reference position.

The sub-spindle Z axis safe index value is set by the machine operator. It should be equal to the Zaxis distance from the turret top plate reference point to the tip of the longest tool PLUS 1 inch. Refer toFigure 9.3.

The sub-spindle safe index positions will be assigned to the following macro variables at the begin-ning of the part program:

X axis safe index position: Macro variable 502

Z axis safe index position: Macro variable 504

M-504A 9-7

Figure 9.3 - Z Axis Safe Index Valuefor Sub-Spindle Operations

TI5668A

+X

+Z

Z

Safe Index = Z + 1” [25mm]

BMT 45 Turret Top Plate Hardinge Turret Top Plate

Z

SUBPROGRAM STRUCTURE

NOTICE

If the machine is to be run in metric mode, the X and Z coordinates in macro variableregisters 502, 503, and 504 MUST be converted to metric values.

The sub-spindle reference position in the following subprograms is shown in inches.

Main Spindle Safe Index Subprogram O1

The command “M98 P1" is used at the start and end of every main spindle operation tocall the safe index subprogram. This ensures that the proper G codes are active and thatthe turret is in a safe position before indexing.

O1 ; SAFE INDEX PROGRAM MAIN SPINDLE

N1 G53 E16.5 ; Sub-Spindle to Reference Position (Sub-Spindle Machine Only)

N2 G0 Y0 ; Y Axis to Reference Position (Y Axis Machine Only)

N3 G00 G18 G40 G97 G98 T0 ; Positioning Mode, X/Z Axis Plane SelectionCancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation,Direct RPM, Inch [mm] Per Minute FeedCancel tool Offsets

N4 X#502 Z#503 ; Move to Safe Index Position

N5 M99 ; Return to Calling Program

%

Sub-Spindle Safe Index Subprogram O2

The command “M98 P2" is used at the start and end of every sub-spindle operation tocall the safe index subprogram. This ensures that the proper G codes are active and thatthe turret is in a safe position before indexing.

O2 ; SAFE INDEX PROGRAM SUBSPINDLE

N1 G53 E16.5 ; Sub-Spindle to Reference Position (Sub-Spindle Machine Only)

N2 G0 Y0 ; Y Axis to Reference Position (Y Axis Machine Only)

N3 G00 G18 G40 G97 G98 T0 ; Positioning Mode, X/Z Axis Plane SelectionCancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation,Direct RPM, Inch [mm] Per Minute FeedCancel tool Offsets

N4 X#502 Z#504 ; Move to Safe Index Position

N5 M99 ; Return to Calling Program

%

9-8 M-504A

HARDINGE PERMANENT MACRO PROGRAMS

Hardinge permanent macro programs are assigned 9000 series program numbers. These perma-nent macro programs cannot be edited. Macro programs are called as follows:

G65 Pxxxx y ;

Where:

G65 = Macro call command

P = Required format letter

xxxx = Macro program number

y = Macro variable(s), if required

; = End of Block character

MACRO 9112: SAFE TOOL OFFSET

NOTICE

This macro program resets ALL tool offset registers. Any tool offsets already enteredwill be lost.

- NOTE -

Macro 9112 is designed to work on machines set for DIAMETER operation ONLY.

This macro must be executed from a program. Otherwise, an indefinite loop is produced and thecontrol will hang itself up executing the cycle indefinitely. It is recommended that the following pro-gram be loaded into the control memory, to be executed as needed:

Sample Program: O8999 ;

G65 P9112 ;

M30 ;

G65 P9112 is interpreted as follows:

G65 = Macro call command

P = Required format letter

9112 = Macro program number

; = End of Block character

M-504A 9-9

To ensure safe machine operation, macro program 9112 has been developed to reset the machinecoordinate system offsets in the following manner:

1. All Tool Wear Offset registers are set to zero.

2. All R (Radius) and T (Quadrant) Tool Geometry Offset registers are set to zero.

3. All X Tool Geometry Offset registers are set to 8.5000 (English mode) or 215.900 (Metricmode).

4. All Z Tool Geometry Offset registers are set to 9.0000 (English mode) or 228.600 (Metricmode).

MACRO 9136: VARIABLE DEPTH INCREMENT AUTOMATIC DRILLING CYCLE

An explanation of Macro 9136 is presented in Chapter 6, “Machining Cycles”.

MACRO 9150: COLLET DWELL

- NOTE -

Collet Dwell macro 9150 is not required for hydraulic collet closers and will beignored.

Collet Dwell macro 9150 sets a time delay to allow the pneumatic collet closer sufficient time to fullyclose on the workpiece.

Collet Dwell macro 9150 MUST be programmed near the beginning of the part program, before anymachining blocks are programmed. If this command is not programmed, the following conditions willoccur:

1. The time delay for operation of the pneumatic collet closer will default to 30 seconds and willremain the same unless changed with the Collet Dwell macro.

2. When changing jobs or programs, unless the control is turned OFF or a new delay time isprogrammed, the time setting established by the previously active program will be active. Thismay cause one of the following conditions to occur:

A) Cycle Start will be activated before the work-holding device is fully closed.

B) Delay time will be excessive for the type of work-holding device and collet closer pressurebeing used.

WARNING

Failing to program an appropriate collet dwell could create unsafe operating condi-tions.

Timer Range: 1.0 to 30.0 seconds

Minimum Increment: .1 seconds

Default Value: 30 seconds

9-10 M-504A

Recommended Settings

To ensure maximum safety during machining cycles, the collet closer delay time MUST beprogrammed for each job. The collet closer pressure setting must be known to determine the correctdwell time. Refer to the chart and instructions which follow when programming the collet closer dwellmacro.

Collet Closer Pressure SettingEnglish [Metric]

RecommendedTime Delay

20 - 30 psi [1.38 - 2.07 bar] 4.9 seconds

30 - 40 psi [2.07 - 2.76 bar] 3.0 seconds

40 - 50 psi [2.76 - 3.45 bar] 2.0 seconds

50 - 60 psi [3.45 - 4.14 bar] 1.5 seconds

The timer can be set from 1.0 to 30.0 seconds; however, the settings listed above arerecommended.

Setting the Delay

The collet closer timer delay is set by calling Macro Program 9150 near the beginning of the partprogram, as follows:

BLOCK FORMAT: G65 P9150 Hx. ;

Data Word Definitions:

G65 = Macro call commandP = Required format letter9150 = Macro program numberH = Required data letterx = Time delay value (Decimal point must be programmed); = End of Block character

Program Collet Dwell macro 9150 near the beginning of the part program. The data word format isH1.1 with a valid range from 1.0 to 30.0, in increments of .1 seconds.

Example: O3333 ; (Program Number)G20 ; (Select Inch Mode)G65 P9150 H2. ; (Collet closer dwell is set to 2.0 seconds)...

- NOTE -

The H word in the G65 block can be replaced with a D word. The D word will beprogrammed and interpreted exactly like the H word.

M-504A 9-11

TAILSTOCK

INTRODUCTION

The tailstock has two programming modes:

M82 TORQUE CONTROL MODE

The M82 command switches the E axis drive from position control mode to torque controlmode. Torque control mode allows the tailstock to be commanded in terms of constant forceapplied against the workpiece.

Once the E axis is switched to torque control mode, any attempt to move the tailstock un-der position control mode (commanding an E axis move) will result in an alarm.

M83 POSITION CONTROL MODE

The M83 command switches the E axis drive from torque control mode to position controlmode. Position control mode allows the tailstock to be commanded in terms of coordinatepositions on a linear axis.

The M83 also resets the E axis position register and resets the spindle acceleration/de-celeration to standard values. Refer to the S word on the next page.

Position control mode is active at machine power-up. Position control mode is alsoactivated by M30, Reset, or Emergency Stop.

DATA WORD DEFINITIONS

- NOTE -

Refer to the tailstock programming examples beginning on page 9-14.

Refer to the tailstock programming notes on page 9-16.

The tailstock (E axis) is programmed to a position near the face workpiece in position control mode.Torque control mode is then used to move the center into contact with the workpiece and apply a con-stant force on the workpiece.

M82 Command Line Format: M82 F___ A___ S___ B_ ;

M82 COMMAND Switch the E axis to torque control mode.

A WORD The A word establishes an E axis position as an overtravel limit. An alarmmessage will be issued by the control if the E axis reaches or passes thisposition.

The A word must be programmed.

The decimal point must be programmed with the A word.

9-12 M-504A

B WORD The use of the brake is determined by the type of center. A live centerrequires that the brake is ON. A dead center requires that the brake is OFF.

When the tailstock brake is OFF, the spindle arrival signal is monitored.When a tool axis (X Z) changes from rapid (G00) to cutting (G01, G02, G03)the axis will not start into the move until the spindle has reached the programspeed.

The B word must be programmed.

The decimal point must be programmed with the B word.

B1. = Brake ON (live center)

B2. = Brake OFF (dead center)

F WORD Specifies the force to be applied to the workpiece in constant torque mode.The F word must be programmed.

The desired force is entered in pound-force or dekaNewtons depending onthe inch/metric mode of the CNC.

The functional range is 350 to 1500 pound-force [156 to 669 dekaNewtons].Any value above or below this range will result in an alarm message.

The force value is not automatically changed when the inch/metric mode ofthe control is changed. It will be necessary to change the programmed valueif the mode is changed.

S WORD(Optional)

When using a dead center (tailstock brake OFF), the spindleacceleration/deceleration needs to be adjusted to prevent slipping betweenthe center and the part. Acceleration/deceleration will be adjusted based onthe programmed force as follows:

Below 500 lbs (223 DaN) 800 rpm/second

500 lbs to 600 (267 DaN) 1200 rpm/second




Due to the unknown variables, such as center size and depth, the user hasthe option to set the acceleration/deceleration with the S word. This setsacceleration/deceleration in rpm per second.

The change in the acceleration/deceleration is effective with any spindlestop command (M00, M01, M05, M30). The change is also effective onEmergency Stop and Reset.

If the tailstock brake is set to ON, the spindle acceleration is not altered andany programmed S word in the M82 command line is ignored.

M-504A 9-13

TAILSTOCK PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES

Example 1: Workpiece Held in Collet/Chuck, Live Center in Tailstock

O4455 ; Program Name

N1 (TURN) ; Sequence Search Number and Message


T0101 ; Index to Tool Station and Call Offset

G0 E.5 Z.5 ; Position Z and E Axes (Position Control Mode Active on E Axis)

M82 F500. A-.3 B1. ; Activate Torque Control Mode and Advance Tailstock to Workpiece,Set Tailstock Force, Set Tailstock Overtravel Limit,Tailstock Brake ON

G97 S____ P1 M4 ; Direct RPM, Spindle RPM, Select Spindle (P1 = Main Spindle),Spindle Direction

X1.6 ; Position X Axis

G50 S____ ; Maximum RPM Limit

G96 S____ ; Surface Feet (Meters) Per Minute Speed

G1 G99 ; Linear Interpolation, Inches [Millimeters] per Revolution Feed

(MACHINE PART)

G0 X____ ; Move to Clear Workpiece


M01 ; Optional Stop

N2 (F TURN) ; Sequence Search Number and Message



G0 Z.1 ; Position Z Axis

M82 F500. A-.3 B1. ; (Repeated in case Reset is pressed between operations)

G97 S____ P1 M4 ; Direct RPM, Spindle RPM, Select Spindle (P1 = Main Spindle),Spindle Direction

X1.6 ; Position X Axis




(MACHINE PART)



M05 ; Stop Spindle

M83 ; Cancel Torque Control Mode

G0 E.75 ; Move Tailstock Away from Workpiece

M30 ; End of Program

9-14 M-504A

Example 2: Machining Between Centers

O4455 ; Program Name

N1 (TURN) ; Sequence Search Number and Message


M82 F500. A-.3 B2. ; Activate Torque Control Mode and Advance Tailstock to Workpiece,Set Tailstock Force, Set Tailstock Overtravel Limit,Tailstock Brake OFF

G97 S____ M4 P1 ; Direct RPM, Spindle RPM, Select Spindle (P1 = Main Spindle),Spindle Direction


G0 X1.6 Z.1 ; Position X and Z Axes




(MACHINE PART)



M01 ; Optional Stop

N2 (F TURN) ; Sequence Search Number and Message


M82 F500. A-.3 B2. ; (Repeated in case Reset is pressed between operations)

G97 S____ M4 P1 ; Direct RPM, Spindle RPM, Select Spindle (P1 = Main Spindle),Spindle Direction


G0 X1.6 Z.1 ; Position X and Z Axes




(MACHINE PART)



M05 ; Stop Spindle


M-504A 9-15

TAILSTOCK PROGRAMMING NOTES

1. Torque control mode (M82) is not canceled between operations.

2. The tailstock is left engaged with the workpiece after each tool until the workpiece is complete.

3. The tailstock programming mode is switched from torque control mode to position control modeby M30, M83, Reset, or Emergency Stop.

4. When using a dead center, it is recommended that the spindle is stationary when the tailstockadvances into the work piece. Also have the spindle stopped before programming the M83 toswitch from torque control mode to position control mode. This is needed to prevent skiddingbetween the part and the center.

5. When performing between-center machining, it is recommended that the force programmed onthe M82 command line be set 30% higher than the setting on the Tailstock setting screen. Referto the operator's manual (M-505) for information on entering the force value on the Tailstocksetting screen.

9-16 M-504A

SUB-SPINDLE PART CATCHER [Option]

INTRODUCTION

The sub-spindle part catcher is a multiple axis part removal system designed to remove aworkpiece from the sub-spindle and deposit the workpiece on a conveyor, which will carry theworkpiece to an unload ramp located at the left end of the machine.

M CODES

The sub-spindle part catcher is controlled through the use of the following six M codes:

M221 PART CATCHER SLIDE EXTEND

M221 commands the part catcher to slide OUT to the fixed part pick-up position.


M222 PART CATCHER SLIDE RETRACT

M222 commands the part catcher to slide IN to the headwall.

M225 PART CATCHER ARM ROTATE OUT

M225 commands the part catcher arm to swing OUT to the part retrieve position at thespindle centerline.


M226 PART CATCHER ARM ROTATE IN

M226 commands the part catcher arm to swing IN to allow the part catcher to be re-tracted.

M227 PART CATCHER GRIPPER CLOSE

M227 commands the part catcher gripper to close and grip the workpiece.

M228 PART CATCHER GRIPPER OPEN

M228 commands the part catcher gripper to open and release the workpiece.

M-504A 9-17

Figure 9.4 - Part Catcher Extended,Arm Rotated to Down Position

TP7933

Figure 9.5 - Part Catcher Extended,Arm Rotated to Up Position

TP7934

INTERLOCKS

1. M221 must be active (Part Catcher Slide Extend) before M225 (Part Catcher Arm RotateUp) can be commanded.

2. The sub-spindle must be at the reference position before M226 (Part Catcher Arm RotateDown) can be commanded.

3. M226 (Part Catcher Arm Rotate Down) must be active before M222 (Part Catcher SlideRetract) can be commanded.

CAPACITY

The part catcher has the following workpiece capacities:

Machine Model Maximum Length Maximum Diameter Maximum Weight


6 inches[152.4 millimeters]

1.62 inches[42 millimeters]

5.34 lb[2.42 Kg]

T-42 Big-Bore Lathe(20C Main Spindle)


1.62 inches[42 millimeters]

5.34 lb[2.42 Kg]


8.00 inches[203.2 millimeters]


5.34 lb[2.42 Kg]




5.34 lb[2.42 Kg]

PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE FOR UNLOADING A WORKPIECE

1. Move the sub-spindle to the reference position.

2. M221 (Part Catcher Slide Extend).

3. M225 (Part Catcher Arm Rotate Up).

4. Move the sub-spindle to position the workpiece inside the part catcher gripper.

5. M227 (Part Catcher Gripper Closed).

6. Open the sub-spindle work-holding device.

7. Move the sub-spindle to the reference position.

8. M226 (Part Catcher Arm Rotate Down).

9. M222 (Part Catcher Slide Retract).

10. M228 (Part Catcher Gripper Open).

11. The part conveyor carries the workpiece out of the machine.

9-18 M-504A

ENGLISH / METRIC MODE

One of the Setting pages is used to establish whether the control is to power-up and operate inEnglish mode or Metric mode. This section outlines the procedure for selecting the desired operatingmode.

Through the use of the G20 (Inch Mode) and G21 (Metric Mode) commands, it is possible to oper-ate in either mode regardless of which mode has been selected on the Setting page. However, the useof these two G codes will not automatically adjust the position registers to display the position valuesin the proper units (inches vs millimeters).

NOTICE

Part programs should usually be written in the same format as selected on the Set-ting page. Programs not written in the same format as established on the Settingpage MUST contain the appropriate English/Metric G code, G20/G21 respectively.When required, this G code must be programmed by itself in the first data block.

When the operating mode is changed through the Setting page, the work shift isNOT automatically changed to the appropriate units. The work shift must bechanged manually.

- NOTE -

When the operating mode is changed through the Setting page, the tool offsets areautomatically changed to the appropriate units.

Refer to the operator’s manual (M-505) for information on establishing English/Metric mode.

M-504A 9-19

SPARE M CODES

- NOTE -

Refer to the schematic supplied with the machine for complete wiring information.

M codes relating to inputs are not functional on software versions below 1.0 O2.

OUTPUTS

M301 turns ON AUXO08 (output Y30.7)





M306 turns OFF AUXO08 (output Y30.7)











INPUTS

M311 waits for a high signal on AUXI08 (input X42.7)








9-20 M-504A

- NOTES -

M-504A 9-21

- NOTES -

9-22 M-504A

CHAPTER 10 - TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT

INTRODUCTION

The basic concept of Tool Life Management is that after a specific number of parts or a specificamount of machining time, the control will automatically begin using another tool in place of the cur-rent tool being used for a particular operation.

Tools are assigned to specific groups, as designated by the programmer. The control will monitorthe measurement value assigned to each tool group and automatically switch to the next tool in thegroup when the counter for that tool group reaches the measurement value specified by theprogrammer.

TOOL LIFE MEASUREMENT UNITS

Tool life can be measured using one of the two following methods:

• Number of parts (machined by the tool)

• Amount of machining time (on the tool)

Only one of these methods may be used at a time. “Number of parts” will be the active measure-ment unit when the machine is shipped from the factory.

Refer to the operator’s manual (M-505) for information on verifying or switching the active mea-surement unit.

An alarm message will be displayed when any tool group has reached its programmed tool life andan “M30" (End of Program) is read by the control. At that point, the machine operator will replace thetooling and reset the counter relating to the affected tool group.

Refer to the operator’s manual (M-505) for information on resetting a tool group counter.

NUMBER OF PARTS

When this type of measurement is used, the control will increment the tool group counter for the ac-tive tool each time the tool group is called by the part program.

AMOUNT OF MACHINING TIME

When this type of measurement is used, the control will run the tool group counter for the currenttool whenever G01, G02, or G03 is active.

M-504A 10-1

TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT PROGRAM DESCRIPTION

When using Tool Life Management, tools and offsets are assigned to specific groups. Thesegroups are established by the programmer through the use of a Tool Life Management program,which is independent of the part program. The Tool Life Management program will define the parame-ters required for Tool Life Management.

The Tool Life Management program defines the following parameters:

• Group numbers.

• Tool life value for each group.

• Tool stations and offsets for each group.

NOTICE

When the Tool Life Management program is executed, all Tool Life Managementcounters will be reset to 0 (zero).

When using Tool Life Management, the machine operator MUST load and execute the Tool LifeManagement program BEFORE executing the part program for the first time.

Refer to Programming, beginning on page 10-3, for information on the structure of the Tool LifeManagement program and how to incorporate Tool Life Management information in the part program.

BAR FEED OPERATION

There are no special considerations for running bar jobs. When running a bar job and using ToolLife Management, the programmer will program an M30 at the end of the part program and the ma-chine operator will activate Repeat mode to cause the part program to loop.

Refer to the operator’s manual (M-505) for information on Repeat mode.

10-2 M-504A

PROGRAMMING

TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT PROGRAM

Program Format

O _ _ _ _ ;N _ _ G10 L3 ;

Define Tool Group 1 N _ _ P1 L _ _ ;N _ _ T _ _ _ _ ;N _ _ T _ _ _ _ ;N _ _ T _ _ _ _ ;

Define Tool Group 2 N _ _ P2 L _ _ ;N _ _ T _ _ _ _ ;N _ _ T _ _ _ _ ;N _ _ T _ _ _ _ ;

Define Tool Group 3 N _ _ P3 L _ _ ;..N _ _ G11 ;N _ _ M30 ;

Data Word Definitions

O _ _ _ _ = Program NumberN _ _ = Block NumberG10 = Begin Tool Data InputL3 = Memory Location for Tool Life Management Data (DO NOT ALTER)P _ _ = Tool Group NumberL _ _ _ _ = Tool Life Value Data WordT _ _ _ _ = Turret Station and Offset NumberG11 = End Tool Data InputM30 = End of Program

M-504A 10-3

P WORD - TOOL GROUP NUMBER

The P word is used to specify the group number to be assigned to each group of tooling.The numerical value for the data word must be a whole number. Decimal point programmingis not allowed.

Examples: P1 (Tool Group 1)P12 (Tool Group 12)

Refer to the operator’s manual (M-505) for information on verifying or switching the maxi-mum number of tool groups allowed.

L WORD - TOOL LIFE VALUE DATA WORD

The L word is used to specify tool life for each tool group in the Tool Life Managementprogram. The numerical value for the data word must be a whole number. Decimal pointprogramming is not allowed.

Examples: L25 (Tool life equals 25)L200 (Tool Life equals 200)

The following chart shows the minimum and maximum values that may be used with theL word when programming Tool Life Management.

Measurement Unit Minimum Value Maximum Value

Number of Parts 1 9999

Machining Time (minutes) 1 4300

Refer to the operator’s manual (M-505) for information on verifying or setting the mea-surement unit to be used.

T WORD - TURRET STATION AND OFFSET NUMBER

The standard T word format is used when defining turret stations and tool offsets in theTool Life Management program.

Refer to Chapter 4 for information on defining turret stations and tool offsets.

10-4 M-504A

Sample Tool Life Management Program

In this sample program we will assume that the measurement unit is set to “Number of Parts”.

Refer to the operator’s manual (M-505) for information on verifying or setting the measurement unitto be used.

O7500 ;N1 (Operator Message) ;N10 G10 L3 ;

Define Tool Group 1 N20 P1 L10 ;N30 T0101 ;N40 T0212 ;N50 T0313 ;

Define Tool Group 2 N60 P2 L3 ;N70 T0404 ;N80 T0515 ;

Define Tool Group 3 N90 P3 L30 ;N100 T0919 ;N110 G11 ;N120 M30 ;

DATA BLOCK DEFINITIONS

Block N1 contains an operator message.

Block N10 contains the “Begin Tool Data Input” command (G10) and the memory location(L3) where the data will be stored.

Block N20 contains the number of the first tool group (Group 1) and the measurementvalue for each group 1 tool (value = 10).

Blocks N30 through N50 contain the turret station and tool offset data for the tools as-signed to group 1.

Block N60 contains the number of the second tool group (Group 2) and the measurementvalue for each group 2 tool (value = 3).

Blocks N70 and N80 contain the turret station and tool offset data for the tools assigned togroup 2.

Block N90 contains the number of the third tool group (Group 3) and the measurementvalue for each group 3 tool (value = 30).

Block N100 contains the turret station and tool offset data for the tool assigned to group 3.

Block N110 contains the “End Tool Data Input” command (G11).

Block N120 contains the “End of Program” command (M30).

M-504A 10-5

PART PROGRAM

Tool Commands

Tool stations and offsets were assigned to tool groups in the Tool Life Management program. Referto “Tool Life Management Program”, beginning on page 10-3. The tool groups are called from the partprogram using the T word. The data word format for the T word is T4 . Decimal point programming isnot allowed.

ACTIVATE A TOOL GROUP

T_ _99 T Word Format (99 activates the specified tool group)T0199 Activate Tool Group 1T1299 Activate Tool Group 12

DEACTIVATE A TOOL GROUP

T_ _88 T Word Format (88 deactivates the specified tool group)T0188 Deactivate Tool Group 1T1288 Deactivate Tool Group 12

Sample Part Program Structure using Tool Life Management

O1278 ;

N _ _ (___________) ; Sequence Search Number and Operator Message

N _ _ G10 P0 Z___ ; Set Work Shift

N _ _ G97 M(13, 14, 33, or 34) S1000 P_ ; 1000 RPM and Direction, Coolant ON, Spindle Select

N _ _ M98 P(1 or 2) ; Call Safe Index Subprogram

N _ _ T0199 ; Activate Tool Group 1

N _ _ X _ Z _ ; Move to Activate Tool Offsets

- MACHINE PART -

N _ _ T0188 ; Deactivate Tool Group 1


N _ _ M01 ; Option Stop






- MACHINE PART -




.

.

N _ _ M30 ; End of Program

10-6 M-504A

Combining Tool Commands

Some tools may be expected to last the full life of a particular job. In this case it would be desirableto program the individual tool in the part program, rather than go to the trouble of assigning the tool to atool group and defining the tool group life high enough to run for the full life of the job.

It is possible to combine standard tool commands and Tool Life Management commands in thesame part program. Standard tool commands may be programmed in operations that precede or fol-low operations using Tool Life Management commands. The only restriction is that the active tool ortool group must be canceled before another tool or tool group can be called.

Sample Part Program Structure using Combined Tool Commands

O1278 ;


N _ _ G10 P0 Z___ ; Set Work Shift



N _ _ T0101 ; Index to Turret Station 1 and Call Offset 1


- MACHINE PART -








- MACHINE PART -




.

.

N _ _ M30 ; End of Program

PROGRAMMING NOTES

1. Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the P or L data words.

2. The same turret station and/or tool offset may be assigned to more than one tool group.

3. Turret stations may NOT be assigned to the same tool group more than once, regardless of thetool offset to be used.

M-504A 10-7

- NOTES -

10-8 M-504A

CHAPTER 11 - LIVE TOOLING

AND SPINDLE ORIENT

INTRODUCTION

NOTICE


- NOTE -

This chapter is intended for programming live tooling operations with a stationaryspindle. Refer to Chapter 12 for information on programming live tooling with spindlemotion.

Refer to Chapter 8 for information on machining cycles that can be used with livetooling.

B axis and C axis spindle orient are included with the live tooling feature.

B axis and C axis spindle orient are separate purchased options on machines notequipped with the live tooling feature.

Live tooling is a standard feature on T-42, T-51, and T-65 lathes equipped with a BMT top plate.The live tooling attachments are not included with the machine tool and must be purchasedseparately.

Programming the live tooling is accomplished by means of five special M codes and a C, A, or Bword in addition to the M codes used for standard machining.

Live tooling is designed to perform machining such as milling, drilling, and tapping on workpiece lo-cations not parallel or not in line with the spindle centerline. Live tooling attachments can be mountedat any turret station.

The live tooling attachments have a maximum spindle speed of 8000 rpm, as measured at the tooltip, and can be operated at 30 percent of the total duty cycle at 8000 rpm.

M-504A 11-1

LIVE TOOLING M CODES

NOTICE

Refer to "Determining Rotational Direction", on the next page, for specific informationregarding tool rotation.

The live tooling M codes command rotational direction and control whether coolant is ON or OFF.An S word must be programmed with the M word to indicate the live tooling spindle speed. This S wordhas a data word format of S4, with a maximum spindle speed of 8000 rpm. Axis motion may also beprogrammed in this data block.

M51 ROTATIONAL DIRECTION COMMAND

M51 causes a cross-working live tooling attachment mounted at the active position onthe turret to rotate in the forward direction.

M51 causes a standard end-working live tooling attachment mounted at the active po-sition on the turret to rotate in the reverse direction.

M51 cancels M52, M53, M54 and M55.

M52 ROTATIONAL DIRECTION COMMAND

M52 causes a cross-working live tooling attachment mounted at the active position onthe turret to rotate in the reverse direction.

M52 causes a standard end-working live tooling attachment mounted at the active po-sition on the turret to rotate in the forward direction.

M52 cancels M51, M53, M54, and M55.

M53 ROTATIONAL DIRECTION COMMAND/COOLANT ON

M53 causes a cross-working live tooling attachment mounted at the active position onthe turret to rotate in the forward direction with the coolant turned ON.

M53 causes a standard end-working live tooling attachment mounted at the active po-sition on the turret to rotate in the reverse direction with the coolant turned ON.


M54 ROTATIONAL DIRECTION COMMAND/COOLANT ON

M54 causes a cross-working live tooling attachment mounted at the active position onthe turret to rotate in the reverse direction with the coolant turned ON.

M54 causes a standard end-working live tooling attachment mounted at the active po-sition on the turret to rotate in the forward direction with the coolant turned ON.


M55 STOP RPM / COOLANT OFF

M55 causes the live tooling to stop rotating and turns the coolant OFF.


11-2 M-504A

DETERMINING ROTATIONAL DIRECTION

NOTICE

Directional commands for sub-spindle operations when using a double end-workinglive tool attachment are the opposite of the descriptions on the previous page. Referto Figure 11.1.

Live tooling spindle direction can be best described in terms of a drill bit or tap. Right-hand drill bitsand taps require a spindle forward command to machine the workpiece. Left-hand drill bits and tapsrequire a spindle reverse command to machine the workpiece.

When using a standard end-working live tool attachment, main spindle and sub-spindle operationsare programmed as described on the previous page.

When using a double end-working live tool attachment:

• Main spindle operations are programmed as described on the previous page.

• Sub-spindle operations require the opposite directional commands.

M-504A 11-3

Figure 11.1 - Double End-Working Live Tool Attachment

M51 Spindle Reverse

M52 Spindle Forward

M53 Spindle Reverse, Coolant

M54 Spindle Forward, Coolant

M51 Spindle Forward

M52 Spindle Reverse

M53 Spindle Forward, Coolant

M54 Spindle Reverse, Coolant

TI5753

Main Spindle Sub-Spindle

C AXIS SPINDLE ORIENT

The main spindle or optional sub-spindle can be oriented from 0 degrees to 99999.999 degrees.The spindle brake must be activated to hold the spindle in position after the spindle orient has beencompleted.

NOTICE

Be sure no tooling is touching the workpiece when spindle orient (A, C, or H word),M51, M52, M53, or M54 is executed.

- NOTE -

G00 mode is used for C axis orientation to ensure the orient is done at a rapid rate.If G1 mode is active, spindle feed rate is interpreted as degrees.

The A, C, or H spindle orient command should be programmed immediately before the live toolingcommands. When needed, the orient command can be programmed without a live tooling commandfollowing it.

Contouring mode must be activated on the appropriate spindle before commanding C axis spindleorient.

M23 activates contouring mode on the main spindle.

M223 activates contouring mode on the sub-spindle.

PROGRAMMING C AXIS SPINDLE ORIENT

Absolute Orientation

The C word is used to program absolute spindle orientation on the main spindle. The con-trol will orient the main spindle in relation to the spindle zero degree position. The C wordmust be programmed with a decimal point. The data word format is C±5.3 with a valid rangeof 0 to 99999.999.

The A word is used to program absolute spindle orientation on the sub-spindle. The con-trol will orient the sub-spindle in relation to the spindle zero degree position. The A wordmust be programmed with a decimal point. The data word format is A±5.3 with a valid rangeof 0 to 99999.999.

Refer to page 11-6 for information on the spindle zero degree position.

Incremental Orientation

- NOTE -

The H word is used to command incremental spindle orientation on the main spindle.Incremental spindle orientation is not available on the sub-spindle.

The H word is used to program incremental spindle orientation. The control will orient thespindle in relation to the current spindle position.

The H word must be programmed with a decimal point. The data word format is H±5.3with a valid range of 0 to 99999.999.

Refer to the sample program starting on page 11-11.

11-4 M-504A

B AXIS SPINDLE ORIENT

Each spindle equipped with B axis spindle orient (main spindle or optional sub-spindle) can be ori-ented in one degree increments from 0 degrees to 359 degrees. The spindle brake will automaticallyhold the spindle in position after the spindle orient has been completed.

NOTICE

Be sure no tooling is touching the workpiece when spindle orient (B word), M51,M52, M53, or M54 is executed.

The B word commands the control to orient the spindle in relation to the spindle 0 degree mark andshould be programmed immediately before the live tooling commands. When needed, the B wordmay be programmed without a live tooling command following it. The data word format is B3 with avalid range of 0 to 359 in increments of one degree.

- NOTE -

The control interprets 0 degrees and 360 degrees to be the same location.

SPINDLE ORIENT M CODES

M70 selects the sub-spindle for all B axis spindle orient commands.

M71 selects the main spindle for all B axis spindle orient commands.

PROGRAMMING B AXIS SPINDLE ORIENT

The B word can be programmed with or without a decimal point. The decimal point is not required.The control always indexes the spindle to the absolute angle programmed. It is not possible toincrementally orient the spindle from any angle other than 0 degrees.

M-504A 11-5

DIRECTION OF ORIENTATION

When spindle orient is commanded when the spindle is NOT in motion, the control rotates the spin-dle to the programmed angle.

When spindle orient is commanded while the spindle is in motion, the spindle will decelerate andorient to the programmed angle. Unless spindle motion (M03, M04, M13, or M14) is commanded orthe Reset key is pressed, subsequent orient commands will cause the spindle to go “shortest path” toarrive at the commanded angle.

When main spindle motion (M03, M04, M13, or M14) is commanded, the “shortest path” feature forthe main spindle will be canceled.

When sub-spindle motion (M33 or M34) is commanded, the “shortest path” feature for thesub-spindle will be canceled.

When the control Reset key is pressed, the “shortest path” feature for both spindles will be can-celed.

DETERMINING SPINDLE ORIENTATION

The spindle is oriented to 0 degrees when the spindle drive button is located 45 degrees from themachine bed and the spindle key is located 90 degrees from the machine bed, as shown in Figures11.2 and 11.3.

11-6 M-504A

Figure 11.2 - Zero Reference Position(Main Spindle Viewed from Sub-Spindle)

TI1777

Spindle Drive Button

SpindleKey

MachineBed

45�

90�

RotationM03

45�

MainSpindle

Turret Top Plate

Floor

Figure 11.3 - Zero Reference Position(Sub-Spindle Viewed from Main Spindle)

TI4648

Spindle Drive Button

SpindleKey

MachineBed

45�

90�

RotationM03

45�

Sub-Spindle

Turret Top Plate

Floor

LIVE TOOLING PROGRAMMING FORMATS

USING C AXIS SPINDLE ORIENT

Beginning of Operation:

N___ (Operator Message) ; Sequence Number and Operator Message

M98 P(1 or 2) ; Call Safe Index Subprogram

T____ M(23 or 223) ; Index to Station, Select Tool Offset, Activate Contouring Mode

X____ Z____ (C or A)____ ; Move to Activate Tool Offset, Orient Spindle

M(200 or 202) ; Spindle Brake ON

G97 M(51, 52, 53, or 54) S___ P3 ; Cutter RPM, Rotational Direction, Coolant ON, Spindle Select

G1 X____ (or) Z____ F____ ; Position Tool at Start Point

Machining the Part:

Machine the Part (Inches per Minute Feedrate)

Reorient Spindle, if Required:

X____ (or) Z____ F____ ; Move the Tool to a Clear Area

M(201 or 203) ; Spindle Brake OFF

C____ ; Orient the Spindle

End of Operation:


M(24 or 224) ; Cancel Contouring Mode

M(201 or 203) ; Spindle Brake OFF (Optional Command)



M01 ; Optional Stop

M-504A 11-7

USING B AXIS SPINDLE ORIENT

Beginning of Operation:

N___ (Operator Message) ; Sequence Number and Operator Message


T____ M(70 or 71) ; Index to Station, Select Tool Offset, Select Spindle

X____ Z____ B____ ; Move to Activate Tool Offset, Orient Spindle

G97 M(51, 52, 53, or 54) S___ P3 ; Cutter RPM, Rotational Direction, Coolant ON, Spindle Select

G1 X____ (or) Z____ F____ ; Position Tool at Start Point

Machining the Part:

Machine the Part (Inches per Minute Feedrate)

Reorient Spindle, if Required:


B____ ; Orient the Spindle

End of Operation:



M01 ; Optional Stop

11-8 M-504A

DEACTIVATING LIVE TOOLING

NOTICE

Be sure the live tooling is not touching the workpiece when the spindle is reacti-vated.

There are two methods for deactivating the live tooling:

1. Programming an M55 will deactivate live tooling and coolant. If coolant is required, be sure toreactivate coolant with an M08, M13, or M14 when standard machining is resumed.

2. Programming a spindle command with a spindle speed will reactivate the spindle andautomatically deactivate live tooling if M51, M52, M53, or M54 is not programmed in the samedata block. In this case it is not necessary to program an M55 command.

LIVE TOOLING PROGRAMMING NOTES

1. Move to enter the tool offset in G00 (rapid) mode. A G01 MUST be programmed on the nextmove for inch per minute feedrate.

2. Spindle orient is programmed in absolute degrees from the spindle 0 degree mark.

3. Activating live tooling with an M51, M52, M53, or M54 command will NOT automatically stopspindle rotation.

4. Programming an M55 will cancel live tooling commands.

5. Programming a turret index will cancel live tooling commands.

6. Refer to Chapter 9 for information on the Hardinge Safe Index subprograms.

M-504A 11-9

SAMPLE LIVE TOOLING PROGRAM

The sample workpiece is shown in Figure 11.4.

TOOL DEFINITIONS

Turret Tooling Operation Sequence

Station 1, 7/8” End Mill 3 Flats (1/8” Depth)

Station 3, #4 Center Drill 3 Holes (¼” Depth)

Station 5, #7 Drill 3 Holes (9/16” Depth)

Station 7, ¼ - 20 Tap 3 Holes (7/16” Depth)

11-10 M-504A

Figure 11.4 - Sample Live Tooling Workpiece

TI2026

1.50 Dia.

.125 Typ.

2.50

7/16 RadiusTyp.

1.60 Typ.

.80Typ.

#4 Center Drill, .25 Deep#7 Drill, 9/16 Deep¼-20 UNC Tap, 7/16 Deep

3 Places, 120� Apart

3 Places, 120� Apart

90�

NOTE: All dimensions shown in inches.

SAMPLE PROGRAM USING C AXIS SPINDLE ORIENT

% Stop Code

O1135 ; Letter “O” and Program No.

N1 (T0101 7/8 End Mill) ; “N” Sequence No. and Message

(Programmed to Tool Center Line) ; Operator Message


M98 P1 ; Call Safe Index Program O1

T0101 M23 ; Index to Turret Station #1, Offset #1, Activate Contouring Mode

X1.25 Z1. C0. ; Move to Enter Offset, Orient Spindle to 0 Degrees

M200 ; Main Spindle Brake ON

G97 S2500 M53 P3 ; 2500 RPM, Forward/Coolant ON, Select Spindle

G1 Z.5 F50. ; Tool Center to .5 from Part Face

Z-1.1625 F3. ; Mill IN at 3 ipm

X1.6 F50. ; X Axis Clear Move

Z.5 ; Z Axis to Start Point


X1.25 C120. ; X Axis to Start Point, Orient Spindle to 120 Degrees

M200 ; Spindle Brake ON



Z.5 ; Z Axis to Start Point


X1.25 C240. ; X Axis to Start Point, Orient Spindle to 240 Degrees

M200 ; Spindle Brake ON



Z.5 ; Z Axis Clear Move


M201 ; Spindle Brake OFF (Optional Command)



M01 ; Optional Stop

(Continued on next page)

M-504A 11-11

N3 (T0303 #4 Center Drill) ; “N” Sequence No. and Message



X1.6 Z.25 C240. ; Move to Enter Offset, Orient Spindle to 240 Degrees

G97 S2000 M53 P3 ; 2000 RPM, Forward/Coolant ON, Spindle Select

G1 Z-.8 F50. ; Tool to Z Start Point

G87 G99 X.75 F.002 M200 ; Define G87 Side Drilling Cycle, Spindle Brake ON

X.75 C0. ; Orient Spindle to 0 Degrees, Drill to Depth


G80 ; Cancel G87 Cycle





M01 ; Optional Stop

N5 (T0505 #7 Drill) ; “N” Sequence No. and Message






G87 G99 X.125 F.003 M200 ; Define G87 Side Drilling Cycle, Spindle Brake ON








M01 ; Optional Stop

11-12 M-504A

N7 (T0707 ¼-20 Tap) ; “N” Sequence No. and Message







G88 G99 X.375 F.05 M200 ; Define G88 Side Tapping Cycle, Spindle Brake ON

X.375 C120. ; Orient Spindle to 120 Degrees, Tap to Depth

X.375 C240. ; Orient Spindle to 240 Degrees, Tap to Depth






M01 ; Optional Stop

M30 ; End Program

M-504A 11-13

- NOTES -

11-14 M-504A

CHAPTER 12 - POLAR AND

CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION

NOTICE


- NOTE -

This chapter is intended for programming live tooling operations with spindle motion.Refer to Chapter 11 for information on programming live tooling with a stationaryspindle.

DATA WORD DESCRIPTIONS

The following data words, G codes, and M code are used when programming Polar and CylindricalInterpolation:

A Word - Absolute position command for C axis on the sub-spindle. With Polar CoordinateInterpolation, A values are linear (inch or millimeter) units. With Spindle Orient orCylindrical Interpolation, A values are in degrees. A decimal point is required with the Aword.

C Word - Absolute position command for C axis on the main spindle. With Polar CoordinateInterpolation, C values are linear (inch or millimeter) units. With Spindle Orient orCylindrical Interpolation, C values are in degrees. A decimal point is required with the Cword.

H Word - Incremental position command for C axis on the main spindle. With Polar CoordinateInterpolation, H values are linear (inch or millimeter) units. When using Spindle Orientor Cylindrical Interpolation, H values are in degrees.

G17 - Used to specify the X,C plane.

G18 - Used to specify the X,Z plane.

G19 - Used to specify the Z,C plane.

M-504A 12-1

G107 - Specifies Cylindrical Interpolation. Once cylindrical interpolation has been activated, itis only necessary for the programmer to specify the end point of a move by a linear Zvalue in inches or millimeters, an angular C value in degrees and a feedrate. Movesrequiring circular interpolation must be programmed with the appropriate G02 or G03command and an R value for the arc radius.

G112 - Specifies Polar Coordinate Interpolation.

G113 - Cancel Polar Coordinate Interpolation.

M23 - Activate Contouring mode on the main spindle. This command must be programmed ina block preceding the block calling for C axis.

M24 - Cancel Contouring mode on the main spindle.

M223 - Activate Contouring mode on the optional sub-spindle. This command must beprogrammed in a block preceding the block calling for C axis.

M224 - Cancel Contouring mode on the optional sub-spindle.

12-2 M-504A

POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION

Polar Coordinate Interpolation is used when it is desired to perform milling operations on the face ofthe workpiece that require synchronous movement of the spindle and the live tooling mounted on theturret. When Polar Coordinate Interpolation is commanded by the G112 command, the control inter-prets several pieces of data to determine the direction and speed that the axes must be moved toreach the commanded end point.

The sample programs in this section illustrate of how Polar Coordinate Interpolation is used. Referalso to the guidelines on page 12-5 and to the program format on page 12-6.

COORDINATE SYSTEMS

Figure 12.1 shows the coordinate systems used with Polar Coordinate Interpolation. The programexamples in this section illustrate the use of these coordinate systems.

Main Spindle Rotation

A negative C command will cause the main spindle to turn in the forward (M03) direction and a posi-tive C command will cause the main spindle to rotate in the reverse (M04) direction.

Sub-Spindle Rotation

A negative A command will cause the main spindle to turn in the forward (M33) direction and a posi-tive A command will cause the main spindle to rotate in the reverse (M34) direction.

M-504A 12-3

Figure 12.1 - Coordinate System for Polar Coordinate Interpolation

C

+

-

C and X Axis Moves

X

+

-

TI4778A

A and X Axis Moves

Main Spindle Viewedfrom Front of Machine

Sub-Spindle Viewedfrom Front of Machine

A

++

-

-

+Z -Z

Defining X, C, and A Axis Motion

The programmed end points are defined as coordinates on the appropriate plane. Note the signsfor X, C, and A shown in Figure 12.2.

12-4 M-504A

Figure 12.2 - Direction of X, C, and A Axis Motionduring Polar Coordinate Interpolation

TI4781

MachineBed

MachineBed

+C

+C

-C

-C

C0X0

+X

+X

-X

-X

+X

+X

-X

-X

X0A0

+A

+A

-A

-A

Main Spindle Viewed fromTailstock/Sub-Spindle


POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION GUIDELINES

1. The following G codes may be used when G112 is active: G01, G02, G03, G40, G41, G42,G65, and G98. Refer to Chapter 1 for descriptions of these G codes.

2. G00 positioning is not allowed when G112 is active.

3. When using circular interpolation, G02 or G03, the arc radius is specified using the R word.

4. M23 contouring mode must be activated before commanding C axis on the main spindle.M223 contouring mode must be activated before commanding C axis on the sub-spindle.Refer to the Polar Coordinate Interpolation programming format, on page 12-6.

5. The spindle should be oriented to 0° (zero degrees) before commanding Polar CoordinateInterpolation. Refer to the Polar Coordinate Interpolation programming format, on page 12-6.

6. If machining in the X axis only (Normal Live Tooling Command), do not program G112 toactivate Polar Coordinate Interpolation.

7. With G112 active, the tool cannot be programmed to pass over the center of the workpiece.

8. The H word is used to program incremental C axis moves on the main spindle. There is noincremental C axis command for the sub-spindle.

9. Z axis moves are made independently of Polar Coordinate Interpolation.

10. The unit of command for the C axis, when Polar Coordinate Interpolation is used, is inches ormillimeters, not degrees.

11. When using cutter compensation during Polar Coordinate Interpolation, the same basic ToolNose Radius Compensation rules apply as with normal lathe programming. However, thefollowing rules must also be observed:

A) The tool radius and the quadrant must be loaded into the tool geometry offset file. For PolarCoordinate Interpolation, the X tool offset represents the center of the cutter and the tool tiplocation (Quadrant) will be 9.

B) The Tool Nose Radius Compensation start up block (G41 or G42 line) must be programmedafter the polar interpolation command (G112 line) has been activated. This Tool NoseRadius Compensation block should contain an X and Z axis air move. For Polar CoordinateInterpolation, the X axis move must be equal to at least two times the tool radius entered inthe offset file.

C) Program the G40 (Tool Nose Radius Compensation Cancel) command before the blockcontaining the G113 (Cancel Polar Coordinate interpolation).

12. Program restart and block restart are not allowed when Polar Coordinate Interpolation is active.

13. Specify the feedrate in inches or millimeters per minute.

14. X values are diameters.

15. A and C values are radii.

M-504A 12-5

PROGRAM FORMAT FOR POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION

- NOTE -

This format should be used in conjunction with the general program format providedin Chapter 1.

The C or H word is used to command C axis motion on the main spindle.

The A word is used to command C axis motion on the sub-spindle.


N____ ( ) ; Sequence Number and Message


T____ ; Index and Call Offset

X__ Z__ M(23 or 223) ; Enter Offset and Activate Contour Mode

G97 S____ M53 (M54) P3 ; Cutter RPM and Direction, Select Spindle

C0. (or A0.) ; Orient Spindle to 0 Degrees

G1 G112 ; Activate Polar Coordinate Interpolation

C_ (or A_) F50. ; Reorient Before Tool Nose RadiusCompensation (if desired)

ACTIVATE TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION

G41 (G42) X__ C(or A)__ F50. ; Enter Tool Nose Radius Compensation Non-CuttingAir Move

Z__ ; Move to Depth of Cut

MACHINE PART

G1 X__ and/or C(or A)__ F__ ; Move to Machine Part, IPM Feed

CLEAR PART

X__ or Z__ F__ ; Move to Clear Part

G40 U1. ; Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation

G113 ; Cancel Polar Coordinate Interpolation

M(24 or 224) ; Cancel Contour Mode


END OF OPERATION


M01 ; Optional Stop

12-6 M-504A

TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION AND CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION USED WITHG112 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION

Main Spindle

Figure 12.3 shows the combinations of tool nose radius and circular interpolation codes used withPolar Coordinate Interpolation on the main spindle. Tool motion is shown as viewed from thetailstock/sub-spindle end of the machine.

The shaded area of each drawing represents the finished part contour.

M-504A 12-7

Figure 12.3 - Tool Nose Radius Compensation and Circular Interpolationused with G112 Polar Coordinate Interpolation on the Main Spindle

TI2086

Active Codes

Tool Compensation: G41Circular Interpolation: G02Spindle Motion: M03

C0 C0

C0 C0

X0

X0

Active Codes


Active Codes


Active Codes


Sub-Spindle

Figure 12.4 shows the combinations of tool nose radius and circular interpolation codes used withPolar Coordinate Interpolation on the sub-spindle. Tool motion is shown as viewed from the mainspindle.

The shaded area of each drawing represents the finished part contour.

12-8 M-504A

Figure 12.4 - Tool Nose Radius Compensation and Circular Interpolationused with G112 Polar Coordinate Interpolation on the Sub-Spindle

TI2086

C0 C0

C0 C0

X0

X0

Active Codes


Active Codes


Active Codes


Active Codes


PROGRAM EXAMPLES

- NOTE -

Refer to page 12-3 for information on the coordinate systems used with Polar Coor-dinate Interpolation.

The end points must be defined on the coordinate system before the programs can be written. Fig-ure 12.5 shows the end point positions required to write the program for Example 1, on the next page.As illustrated in this figure:

• X and C are used to define the cutter end points when machining on the main spindle

• X and A are used to define the cutter end points when machining on the sub-spindle

Although the tool cannot actually move around the part, for programming purposes, it is easier toimagine that this is what is taking place.

Tool Nose Radius Compensation is used in all of the polar coordinate examples shown in this chap-ter. When entering the tool orientation code for milling tools, use 0 or 9.

M-504A 12-9

Figure 12.5 - End Point Cutter Positions(Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active)

TI4782

Main Spindle Viewed fromTailstock/Sub-Spindle


C0X0

X.750C0.

X.750C-.375

X.750C.375

X-.750C-.375

X-.750C.375

X.750A0.

X.750A-.375

X.750A.375

X-.750A.375

X-.750A-.375

A0 X0

Example 1: Square

Figure 12.6 shows a 1.375 inch diameter piece of stock on which a .750 inch by .200 inch deepsquare is to be milled. In this example, the diameter of the milling tool is .50 inches

MAIN SPINDLE PROGRAMS

(START POINT 1) (START POINT 2)

(START CUT AT C0) (START CUT AT C-.375)

N2 (MILL ¾ SQ R.25 Q9) ; N2 (MILL ¾ SQ R.25 Q9) ;

M98 P1 ; M98 P1 ;

T0202 ; T0202 ;

X1.4 Z.2 M23 ; X1.4 Z.2 M23 ;

G97 S900 M54 P3 ; G97 S900 M54 P3 ;

C0. ; C0. ;

G1 G112 ; G1 G112 ;

G41 X.75 Z.1 F50. ; C-.375 F100. ;

Z-.2 F3. ; G41 X.75 Z.1 F50. ;

C-.375 ; Z-.2 F3. ;

X-.75 ; X-.75 ;

C.375 ; C.375 ;

X.75 ; X.75 ;

C0. ; C-.375 ;

Z.2 F20. ; Z.2 F20. ;

G40 U1. ; G40 U1. ;

G113 ; G113 ;

M24 ; M24 ;

M98 P1 ; M98 P1 ;

M01 ; M01 ;

12-10 M-504A

Figure 12.6 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation,Programming Example 1: Square

TI2018

1.375

.750

.200

StartPoint 1

StartPoint 2


SUB-SPINDLE PROGRAMS


(START CUT AT A0) (START CUT AT A.375)

N2 (MILL ¾ SQ R.25 Q9) ; N2 (MILL ¾ SQ R.25 Q9) ;

M98 P2 ; M98 P2 ;

T0202 ; T0202 ;

X1.4 Z-.2 M223 ; X1.4 Z-.2 M223 ;

G97 S900 M54 P3 ; G97 S900 M54 P3 ;

A0. ; A0. ;

G1 G112 ; G1 G112 ;

G41 X.75 Z-.1 F50. ; A.375 F100. ;

Z.2 F3. ; G41 X.75 Z-.1 F50. ;

A-.375 ; Z.2 F3. ;

X-.75 ; X-.75 ;

A.375 ; A-.375 ;

X.75 ; X.75 ;

A0. ; A.375 ;

Z-.2 F20. ; Z-.2 F20. ;

G40 U1. ; G40 U1. ;

G113 ; G113 ;

M224 ; M224 ;

M98 P2 ; M98 P2 ;

M01 ; M01 ;

M-504A 12-11

Example 2: Hexagon

Figure 12.7 shows a 1.375 inch diameter piece of stock on which a hexagon is to be machined. Thehexagon measures 1.1908 inches across the flats and the width of the flats is .6875 inches. The diam-eter of the cutter is .25 inches.


(REVERSE SPINDLE DIRECTION) (FORWARD SPINDLE DIRECTION)

N4 (MILL HEX R.125 Q9) ; N4 (MILL HEX R.125 Q9) ;

M98 P1 ; M98 P1 ;

T0404 ; T0404 ;

X1.5 Z.2 M23 ; X1.5 Z.2 M23 ;

G97 S750 M54 P3 ; G97 S750 M54 P3 ;

C0. ; C0. ;

G1 G112 ; G1 G112 ;

G42 X1.1908 Z.1 F50. ; G41 X1.1908 Z.1 F50. ;

Z-.25 F3.5 ; Z-.25 F3.5 ;

C.3437 ; C-.3437 ;

X0 C.6875 ; X0 C-.6875 ;

X-1.1908 C.3437 ; X-1.1908 C-.3437 ;

C-.3437 ; C.3437 ;

X0 C-.6875 ; X0 C.6875 ;

X1.1908 C-.3437 ; X1.1908 C.3437 ;

C0. ; C0. ;

Z.2 F20. ; Z.2 F20. ;

G40 U1. ; G40 U1. ;

G113 ; G113 ;

M24 ; M24 ;

M98 P1 ; M98 P1 ;

M01 ; M01 ;

12-12 M-504A

Figure 12.7 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation,Programming Example 2: Hexagon

TI2020

1.375

.6875

.250


1.1908


N4 (MILL HEX R.125 Q9) ; N4 (MILL HEX R.125 Q9) ;

M98 P2 ; M98 P2 ;

T0404 ; T0404 ;

X1.5 Z-.2 M223 ; X1.5 Z-.2 M223 ;

G97 S750 M54 P3 ; G97 S750 M54 P3 ;

A0. ; A0. ;

G1 G112 ; G1 G112 ;

G42 X1.1908 Z-.1 F50. ; G41 X1.1908 Z-.1 F50. ;

Z.25 F3.5 ; Z.25 F3.5 ;

A.3437 ; A-.3437 ;

X0 A.6875 ; X0 A-.6875 ;

X-1.1908 A.3437 ; X-1.1908 A-.3437 ;

A-.3437 ; A.3437 ;

X0 A-.6875 ; X0 A.6875 ;

X1.1908 A-.3437 ; X1.1908 A.3437 ;

A0. ; A0. ;

Z-.2 F20. ; Z-.2 F20. ;

G40 U1. ; G40 U1. ;

G113 ; G113 ;

M224 ; M224 ;

M98 P2 ; M98 P2 ;

M01 ; M01 ;

M-504A 12-13

Example 3: Triangle

Figure 12.8 shows a 1.375 inch piece of stock that is to have an equilateral triangle with .8438 inchsides machined on it. The diameter of the cutter is .50 inches.


(FEED INTO PART FACE) (FEED ONTO PART O.D.)

N6 (MILL TRIANGLE R.25 Q9) ; N6 (MILL TRIANGLE R.25 Q9) ;

M98 P1 ; M98 P1 ;

T0606 ; T0606 ;

X1.5 Z.2 M23 ; X1.75 Z0 M23 ;

G97 S650 M54 P3 ; G97 S650 M54 P3 ;

C0. ; C0. ;

G1 G112 ; G1 G112 ;

G41 X.9742 Z.1 F50. ; G41 X1.2 Z-.125 F50. ;

Z-.125 F2.5 ; X.9742 F2.5 ;

X-.487 C-.4219 ; X-.487 C-.4219 ;

C.4219 ; C.4219 ;

X.9742 C0. ; X.9742 C0. ;

Z.2 F20. ; Z.2 F20. ;

G40 U1. ; G40 U1. ;

G113 ; G113 ;

M24 ; M24 ;

M98 P1 ; M98 P1 ;

M01 ; M01 ;

12-14 M-504A

Figure 12.8 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation,Programming Example 3: Triangle

TI2019

1.375

.8438

.125


.4872

.2436


(FEED INTO PART FACE) (FEED ONTO PART O.D.)

N6 (MILL TRIANGLE R.25 Q9) ; N6 (MILL TRIANGLE R.25 Q9) ;

M98 P2 ; M98 P2 ;

T0606 ; T0606 ;

X1.5 Z-.2 M223 ; X1.75 Z0 M223 ;

G97 S650 M54 P3 ; G97 S650 M54 P3 ;

A0. ; A0. ;

G1 G112 ; G1 G112 ;

G41 X.9742 Z-.1 F50. ; G41 X1.2 Z.125 F50. ;

Z.125 F2.5 ; X.9742 F2.5 ;

X-.487 A-.4219 ; X-.487 A-.4219 ;

A.4219 ; A.4219 ;

X.9742 A0. ; X.9742 A0. ;

Z-.2 F20. ; Z-.2 F20. ;

G40 U1. ; G40 U1. ;

G113 ; G113 ;

M224 ; M224 ;

M98 P2 ; M98 P2 ;

M01 ; M01 ;

M-504A 12-15

Example 4: Tongue

Figure 12.9 shows a 1.125 inch piece of stock on which a tongue .625 inch is to be machined. Thecutter diameter is .75 inches.



(Start CUT AT C0) (START CUT AT C-.5825)

N2 (5/8 TONGUE R.375 Q9) ; N2 (5/8 TONGUE R.375 Q9) ;

M98 P1 ; M98 P1 ;

T0202 ; T0202 ;

X2. Z.2 M23 ; X2. Z.2 M23 ;

G97 S700 M54 P3 ; G97 S700 M54 P3 ;

C0. ; C0. ;

G1 G112 ; G1 G112 ;

G41 X.625 Z.1 F50. ; C-.5825 F100. ;

Z-.156 F3. ; G41 X-.625 Z-.156 F50. ;

C-.5825 ; Z-.156 F.3 ;

X-.625 F20. (AIR MOVE) ; C.5825 ;

C.5825 F3. ; X.625 F20. ;

X.625 F20., (AIR MOVE) ; C-.5825 ;

C0. F3. ; Z.1 F20. ;

Z.1 F20. ; G40 U1. ;

G40 U1. ; G113 ;

G113 ; M24 ;

M24 ; M98 P1 ;

M98 P1 ; M01 ;

M01 ;

12-16 M-504A

Figure 12.9 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation,Programming Example 4: Tongue

TI2017

1.125

.625

.156


StartPoint 1 Start

Point 2



(Start CUT AT C0) (START CUT AT A.5825)

N2 (5/8 TONGUE R.375 Q9) ; N2 (5/8 TONGUE R.375 Q9) ;

M98 P2 ; M98 P2 ;

T0202 ; T0202 ;

X2. Z-.2 M223 ; X2. Z-.2 M223 ;

G97 S700 M54 P3 ; G97 S700 M54 P3 ;

A0. ; A0. ;

G1 G112 ; G1 G112 ;

G41 X.625 Z-.1 F50. ; A.5825 F100. ;

Z.156 F3. ; G41 X.625 Z-.1 F50. ;

A-.5825 ; Z.156 F.3 ;

X-.625 F20. (AIR MOVE) ; A-.5825 ;

A.5825 F3. ; X-.625 F20. (AIR MOVE) ;

X.625 F20., (AIR MOVE) ; C.5825 ;

A0. F3. ; Z-.1 F20. ;

Z-.1 F20. ; G40 U1. ;

G40 U1. ; G113 ;

G113 ; M224 ;

M224 ; M98 P2 ;

M98 P2 ; M01 ;

M01 ;

M-504A 12-17

Example 5: Radius Diamond

Figure 12.10 shows a 1.375 inch diameter piece of stock on which four 1.00 inch radii are to be cutto form a diamond shaped pattern. Cutter diameter is .50 inches.


(FORWARD SPINDLE) (REVERSE SPINDLE)

N6 (MILL DIAMOND R.25 Q9) ; N6 (MILL DIAMOND R.25 Q9) ;

M98 P1 ; M98 P1 ;

T0606 ; T0606 ;

X2. Z.2 M23 ; X2. Z.2 M23 ;

G97 S800 M54 P3 ; G97 S800 M54 P3 ;

C0. ; C0. ;

G1 G112 ; G1 G112 ;

G41 X1.375 Z.1 F50. ; G42 X1.375 Z.1 F50. ;

Z-.2 F3.5 ; Z-.2 F3.5 ;

G3 X0 C-.6875 R1. ; G2 X0 C.6875 R1. ;

G3 X-1.375 C0. R1. ; G2 X-1.375 C0. R1. ;

G3 X0 C.6875 R1. ; G2 X0 C-.6875 R1. ;

G3 X1.375 C0. R1. ; G2 X1.375 C0. R1. ;

G1 Z.2 F20. ; G1 Z.2 F20. ;

G40 U1. ; G40 U1. ;

G113 ; G113 ;

M24 ; M24 ;

M98 P1 ; M98 P1 ;

M01 ; M01 ;

12-18 M-504A

Figure 12.10 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation,Programming Example 5: Radius Diamond

TI2021

1.375 .200


1.00 Radius


(FORWARD SPINDLE) (REVERSE SPINDLE)

N6 (MILL DIAMOND R.25 Q9) ; N6 (MILL DIAMOND R.25 Q9) ;

M98 P2 ; M98 P2 ;

T0606 ; T0606 ;

X2. Z-.2 M223 ; X2. Z.2 M223 ;

G97 S800 M54 P3 ; G97 S800 M54 P3 ;

A0. ; A0. ;

G1 G112 ; G1 G112 ;

G41 X1.375 Z-.1 F50. ; G42 X1.375 Z-.1 F50. ;

Z.2 F3.5 ; Z.2 F3.5 ;

G3 X0 A-.6875 R1. ; G2 X0 A.6875 R1. ;

G3 X-1.375 A0. R1. ; G2 X-1.375 A0. R1. ;

G3 X0 A.6875 R1. ; G2 X0 A-.6875 R1. ;

G3 X1.375 A0. R1. ; G2 X1.375 A0. R1. ;

G1 Z-.2 F20. ; G1 Z-.2 F20. ;

G40 U1. ; G40 U1. ;

G113 ; G113 ;

M224 ; M224 ;

M98 P2 ; M98 P2 ;

M01 ; M01 ;

M-504A 12-19

CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION

NOTICE

G19 is programmed to active the Z,C plane for machining during Cylindrical Interpo-lation. G19 remains active after Cylindrical Interpolation is canceled. G18 must beprogrammed to specify the X,Z plane for machining after Cylindrical Interpolation iscanceled. Refer to page 12-22 for information on adding the G18 command to thesafe index subprograms.

Cylindrical Interpolation (G107) is used to perform contoured milling operations on the outside di-ameter of the workpiece.

The Z and C words are used to specify the end points of the moves when using Cylindrical Interpo-lation on the main spindle.

The Z and A words are used to specify the end points of the moves when using Cylindrical Interpo-lation on the sub-spindle.

When using cylindrical interpolation, the C or A word is programmed in degrees. The C or A word isalso used to specify the radius of the part in the G107 block which activates cylindrical interpolation.The X word is used to program the depth of cut. Figure 12.11 shows the coordinate systems used withCylindrical Interpolation.

12-20 M-504A

Figure 12.11 - Coordinate System for Cylindrical Interpolation

C, X, and Z Axis Moves

C

+

-

Z

-+

TI4779A

A, X, and Z Axis Moves

Main Spindle Viewedfrom Back of Machine

Sub-Spindle Viewedfrom Back of Machine

A

-

-+

+ Z

+

-X

+

-X

PROGRAM FORMAT FOR CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION

- NOTE -

This format should be used in conjunction with the general program format providedin Chapter 1.

The C or H word is used to command C axis motion on the main spindle.

The A word is used to command C axis motion on the sub-spindle.


N____( ) ; Sequence Number and Message


T____ ; Index and Call Offset

X__ Z__ M(23 or 223) ; Enter Offset and Activate Contour Mode

G97 S____ M53 (M54) P3 ; Cutter RPM and Direction, Select Spindle

G19 C0. (or A0.) ; Work Plane Selection, Orient Spindle to 0 Degrees

G1 G107 C(A)__ (Part Radius) ; Activate Cylindrical Interpolation and Part Radius

C(A) __ F50. ; Reorient Before Tool Nose RadiusCompensation (if desired)

ACTIVATE TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION

G41 (G42) X__ Z__ F50. ; Enter Tool Nose Radius Compensation,Non-Cutting Air Move

MACHINE PART

G1 Z__ and/or C(A)__ F__ ; Move to Machine Part, IPM Feed

CLEAR PART

X__ and/or Z__ and/or C(A) __ F50. ; Move to Clear Part

G40 U1. ; Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation

G107 C0. (or A0.) ; Cancel Cylindrical Mode

G18 ; Work Plane Selection

M(24 or 224) ; Cancel Contour Mode


END OPERATION


M01 ; Optional Stop

M-504A 12-21

CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION GUIDELINES

1. The following G codes may be used when G107 is active: G01, G02, G03, G40, G41, G42,G65, and G98. Refer to Chapter 1 for descriptions of these G codes.

2. G00 positioning is not allowed when G107 is active.

3. When using Circular Interpolation, G02 or G03, the arc radius is specified using the R word.

4. M23(223) contouring mode must be activated before commanding the C axis. Refer to“Program Format for Cylindrical Interpolation”, on page 12-21.

5. The spindle should be oriented to 0° (zero degrees) before commanding CylindricalInterpolation. Refer to “Program Format for Cylindrical Interpolation”, on page 12-21. Theformula for calculating the value of the C or A word is shown in Figures 12.14 through 12.19.

6. If machining in the Z axis only (Normal Live Tooling Command), do not program G107 toactivate Cylindrical Interpolation.

7. Cylindrical interpolation is activated on the main spindle by commanding G107 and the C word.The value programmed with the C word specifies the radius of the workpiece.Cylindrical interpolation is activated on the sub-spindle by commanding G107 and the A word.The value programmed with the A word specifies the radius of the workpiece.

8. The H word is used to program incremental C axis moves on the main spindle. There is noincremental C axis command for the sub-spindle.

9. The unit of command for the C axis, when Cylindrical Interpolation is used, is degrees, notinches or millimeters.

10. When using cutter compensation with Cylindrical Interpolation, the same basic Tool NoseRadius Compensation rules apply as with normal lathe programming. However, the followingrules must also be observed:

A) The tool radius and the quadrant must be loaded into the tool geometry offset file. Forcylindrical interpolation, the Z tool offset represents the center of the cutter and the tool tiplocation (Quadrant) will be 9.

B) The Tool Nose Radius Compensation start up block (G41 or G42 line) must be programmedafter the Cylindrical Interpolation command (G107 line) has been activated. Refer to“Program Format for Cylindrical Interpolation”, on page 12-21. This Tool Nose RadiusCompensation block should contain an X and Z axis air move. For Cylindrical Interpolation,the Z axis move must be equal to at least the tool radius amount entered in the offset file.

C) Program the G40 (Tool Nose Radius Compensation Cancel) command before the blockcontaining the G107 C0 command (Cancel Cylindrical Interpolation). Refer to “ProgramFormat for Cylindrical Interpolation” on page 12-21.

11. Program restart and block restart are not allowed when Cylindrical Interpolation is active.

12. Specify the feedrate in inches or millimeters per minute.

12-22 M-504A

TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION AND CIRCULAR INTERPOLATIONUSED WITH G107 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION

Main Spindle

Figure 12.12 shows the combinations of tool nose radius and circular interpolation codes used withcylindrical interpolation at the main spindle. The part circumference is viewed laying flat with the partface (Z0) at the base.

M-504A 12-23

Figure 12.12 - Tool Nose Radius Compensation and Circular Interpolationused with G107 Cylindrical Interpolation on the Main Spindle

TI2087

C Axis C Axis

C Axis C Axis

Z0 Z0

Z0 Z0

Z0 (Part Face) Z0 (Part Face)


Tool Compensation: G41Circular Interpolation: G02




Sub-Spindle

Figure 12.13 shows the combinations of tool nose radius and circular interpolation codes used withcylindrical interpolation at the sub-spindle. The part circumference is viewed laying flat with the partface (Z0) at the base.

12-24 M-504A

Figure 12.13 - Tool Nose Radius Compensation and Circular Interpolationused with G107 Cylindrical Interpolation on the Sub-Spindle

TI4783

C Axis C Axis

C Axis C Axis

Z0 Z0

Z0 Z0







PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES

Example 6: Lettering on Part Diameter

MAIN SPINDLE PROGRAM (Refer to Figure 12.14)

M-504A 12-25

Figure 12.14 - Cylindrical Interpolation: Lettering on the Part Diameter(Main Spindle Viewed from Back of Machine)

TI1985A

1.400

.100

C-30.69(-.375)

C-15.34(-.1875)

C0

Circumference inches� � �14 43982. .

DegreeInch x

Circumference

x� � �

360 1875 360

439821534

.

..


Z0

.500

.375

1.094

.194

.200

Z-.994

Z-.750

Z-.500

.094R

N2 (Sharp Tool .025 Depth) ;

M98 P1 ;

T0202 ;

X1.6 Z-.5 M23 ;

G97 S850 M53 P3 ;

G19 C0. ;

G1 G107 C.7 ;

X1.35 F4.5 ;

C-15.34 F3. ;

Z-.7 ;

C-30.69 ;

X1.5 F20. ;

C0. ;

X1.35 F4.5 ;

C-15.34 F3. ;

Z-.5 ;

C-30.69 ;

X1.5 F20. ;

Z-.750 ;

X1.35 F4.5 ;

C0. F3. ;

Z-.85 ;

G2 Z-.85 C-15.34 R.094 ;

G1 Z-.750 ;

Z-.85 F5. ;

G2 Z-.85 C-30.69 R.094 F3. ;

G1 Z-.75 ;

X1.5 F20. ;

Z-.994 ;

X1.35 F4.5 ;

Z-1.094 F3. ;

X1.5 F20. ;

C0. ;

X1.35 F4.5 ;

Z-.994 F3. ;

Z-1.044 F5. ;

C-30.69 F3. ;

X1.5 F20. ;

G107 C0. ;

G18 ;

M24 ;

M98 P1 ;

M01 ;

SUB-SPINDLE PROGRAM (Refer to Figure 12.15)

N2 (Sharp Tool .025 Depth) ; G2 Z.85 A15.34 R.094 ;

M98 P2 ; G1 Z.750 ;

T0202 ; Z.85 F5. ;

X1.6 Z.5 M223 ; G2 Z.85 A30.69 R.094 F3. ;

G97 S850 M53 P3 ; G1 Z.75 ;

G19 A0. ; X1.5 F20. ;

G1 G107 A.7 ; Z.994 ;

X1.35 F4.5 ; X1.35 F4.5 ;

A15.34 F3. ; Z1.094 F3. ;

Z.7 ; X1.5 F20. ;

A30.69 ; A0. ;

X1.5 F20. ; X1.35 F4.5 ;

A0. ; Z.994 F3. ;

X1.35 F4.5 ; Z1.044 F5. ;

A15.34 F3. ; A30.69 F3. ;

Z.5 ; X1.5 F20. ;

A30.69 ; G107 A0. ;

X1.5 F20. ; G18 ;

Z.750 ; M224 ;

X1.35 F4.5 ; M98 P2 ;

A0. F3. ; M01 ;

Z.85 ;

12-26 M-504A

Figure 12.15 - Cylindrical Interpolation: Lettering on the Part Diameter(Sub-Spindle Viewed from Back of Machine)

TI4784

.100

A30.69(.375)

A15.34(.1875)

A0

.194

.200

Z.994

Z.750

Z.500

.094R


DegreeInch x

Circumference

x� � �

360 1875 360

439821534

.

..


1.400

Z0

.500

.375

1.094

Example 7: Rectangle Etched on Part Diameter

MAIN SPINDLE (Refer to Figure 12.16)


M98 P1 ;

T0404 ;

X1.7 Z-.7 M23 ;

G97 S1500 M53 P3 ;

G19 C0. ;

G1 G107 C.750 ;

X1.46 F3.5 ;

Z-1.3 ;

C-28.64 ;

Z-.7 ;

C0. ;

X1.6 F20. ;

G107 C0. ;

G18 ;

M24 ;

M98 P1 ;

M01 ;

M-504A 12-27

Figure 12.16 - Cylindrical Interpolation: Rectangle Etched on the Part Diameter(Main Spindle Viewed from Back of Machine)

TI1988A

C-28.64(-.375)C0

Z-1.300

Z-.700


1.500

Z0

.700

.375

1.300


DegreeInch x

Circumference

x� � �

360 375 360

471242864

.

..

( = 3.1416)

SUB-SPINDLE (Refer to Figure 12.17)


M98 P2 ;

T0404 ;

X1.7 Z.7 M223 ;

G97 S1500 M53 P3 ;

G19 A0. ;

G1 G107 A.750 ;

X1.46 F3.5 ;

Z1.3 ;

A28.64 ;

Z.7 ;

A0. ;

X1.6 F20. ;

G107 A0. ;

G18 ;

M224 ;

M98 P2 ;

M01 ;

12-28 M-504A

Figure 12.17 - Cylindrical Interpolation: Rectangle Etched on the Part Diameter(Sub-Spindle Viewed from Back of Machine)

Z0

.700

.375

1.300

1.500


DegreeInch x

Circumference

x� � �

360 375 360

471242864

.

..

( = 3.1416)

A28.64(.375)A0

Z1.300

Z.700


TI4785

Example 8: Rectangle with Corner Radius


N6 (Sharp Tool .02 Depth) ; G2 Z-1.5 C-39.87 R.125 ;

M98 P1 ; G1 Z-.875 ;

T0606 ; G2 Z-.750 C-29.90 R.125 ;

X1.6 Z-.875 M23 ; G1 C-9.96 ;

G97 S1200 M53 P3 ; G2 Z-.875 C0. R.125 ;

G19 C0. ; G1 X1.5 F20. ;

G1 G107 C.7185 ; G107 C0. ;

X1.397 F4. ; G18 ;

Z-1.5 F3. ; M24 ;

G2 Z-1.625 C-9.96 R.125 ; M98 P1 ;

G1 C-29.90 ; M01 ;

M-504A 12-29

Figure 12.18 - Cylindrical Interpolation: Rectangle with Corner Radius(Main Spindle Viewed from Back of Machine)


TI1989A


DegreeInch x

Circumference

x� � �

360 5 360

451453987

.

..

( = 3.1416)

1.437

Z0

.750

.375

1.625

C0 C-.5

Z-1.625

Z-.750

Start Point

ToolPath

.1259.96

.1259.96

TypicalCorner

1/8” Radius (4)


N6 (Sharp Tool .02 Depth) ; G3 Z1.5 A-39.87 R.125 ;

M98 P2 ; G1 Z.875 ;

T0606 ; G3 Z.750 A-29.90 R.125 ;

X1.6 Z.875 M223 ; G1 A-9.96 ;

G97 S1200 M53 P3 ; G3 Z.875 A0. R.125 ;

G19 A0. ; G1 X1.5 F20. ;

G1 G107 A.7185 ; G107 A0. ;

X1.397 F4. ; G18 ;

Z1.5 F3. ; M224 ;

G3 Z1.625 A-9.96 R.125 ; M98 P2 ;

G1 A-29.90 ; M01 ;

12-30 M-504A

Figure 12.19 - Cylindrical Interpolation: Rectangle with Corner Radius(Sub-Spindle Viewed from Back of Machine)

TI4786

A0 A.5

Z1.625

Z.750

Start Point

ToolPath

.1259.96

.1259.96

TypicalCorner


DegreeInch x

Circumference

x� � �

360 5 360

451453987

.

..

( = 3.1416)


1.437

Z0

.750

.375

1.625

1/8” Radius (4)

Example 9: Worm Gear


To calculate the total amount of C in degrees:

(Z travel ÷ pitch) x 360

N2 (1/8" END MILL, 5/16" PITCH) ;

M98 P1 ;

T0202 ;

X.95 Z-.3 M23 ;

G97 S1200 M53 P3 ;

G19 C0. ;

G1 G107 C.375 ;

X.5 F4. ;

Z-2.05 C-2016. F2. ;

X.85 F20. ;

G107 C0. ;

G18 ;

M24 ;

M98 P1 ;

M01 ;

NOTES:

1. C- command (forward spindle) for right-hand thread.

2. X, Z, and C data words may be programmed together in the same block if the root diameter is toincrease or decrease (tapered thread).

M-504A 12-31

Figure 12.20 - Cylindrical Interpolation: Worm Gear(Main Spindle)

TI2124


2.050

1.750

.750

.125.3125Pitch


To calculate the total amount of C in degrees:

(Z travel ÷ pitch) x 360

N2 (1/8" END MILL, 5/16" PITCH) ;

M98 P2 ;

T0202 ;

X.95 Z.3 M223 ;

G97 S1200 M53 P3 ;

G19 A0. ;

G1 G107 A.375 ;

X.5 F4. ;

Z2.05 A2016. F2. ;

X.85 F20. ;

G107 A0. ;

G18 ;

M224 ;

M98 P2 ;

M01 ;

NOTES:

1. A+ command (reverse spindle) for right-hand thread.

2. X, Z, and A data words may be programmed together in the same block if the root diameter is toincrease or decrease (tapered thread).

12-32 M-504A

Figure 12.21 - Cylindrical Interpolation: Worm Gear(Sub-Spindle)

TI4787


.125.3125Pitch

2.050

1.750

.750

C AXIS ALARMS

- NOTE -

For a complete listing of control error codes, refer to the Fanuc Operation Manual.

Alarm Description

021 An axis not included in selection plane was commanded in CircularInterpolation. Cylindrical Interpolation requires G19.

028 In the plane selected, two or more axes in the same direction arecommanded.

041 Overcutting will occur in Tool Nose Radius Compensation.

145 Polar Coordinate Interpolation commands G112 and G113 require that ToolNose Radius Compensation be inactive (G40 condition).

146 Illegal G code commanded while in Polar Coordinate Interpolation (G00 isnot allowed).

175 Cylindrical Interpolation G107 must have C(part radius) or A(part radius) atstart and “C0.” or “A0.” at end. Tool Nose Radius Compensation must beinactive when above commands are read (G40 condition).

176 Illegal G code has been commanded while in Cylindrical Interpolation (G00,G28, G50, G52 - G59, G76, G81 - G89 are not allowed).

197 M23(223) contour mode must be active for C axis commands.

212 Insert Chamfer and Insert Corner Radius commands are allowed only whileX,Z plane is active. Illegal command while Polar Coordinate Interpolation orCylindrical Interpolation is active.

M-504A 12-33

- NOTES -

12-34 M-504A

CHAPTER 13 - BLUEPRINT PROGRAMMING

INTRODUCTION

The Blueprint Programming feature allows the programmer to define the part contour by specifyingthe end point values along with the desired angle. The intersection points of the straight lines are inputas coordinate values or a coordinate value and an angle.

Straight lines can be directly connected to form sharp, chamfered, or rounded corners. It is onlynecessary to specify the size of the chamfer or corner radius and the CNC control performs the re-quired calculations. The respective end point coordinates can be programmed using absolute or in-cremental positioning data.

Linear Interpolation (G01) must be active while blueprint programming blocks are executed.

ANGLE DEFINITIONS

Angles are defined by referencing the part contour to a zero reference angle. Refer to Figures 13.1and 13.2. The determining factor for selecting the appropriate angle definition is the turret to performthe machining.

The data word format for angle definition (A Words) is 3.4. A comma MUST precede an A (angle)command and a decimal point MUST be programmed with the numerical value.

Minimum Input Value: .0001 degrees

Maximum Input Value: 359.9999 degrees

M-504A 13-1

Figure 13.1 - Angle Definitions for Main Spindle OperationTI4559

Positive

Negative

0° 180°

+90°

-90°

Z Axis

30°

30°

0°

0°

180°

180°

Workpiece

Workpiece

Angle Command: A30.

Angle Command: A-30.

BLUEPRINT PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES

Eight basic examples of blueprint programming are illustrated in Figures 13.3 through 13.34, be-ginning on page 13-3. The lines of programming which accompany each of these examples illustratethe programming format used for blueprint programming.

These basic examples can be combined to form a wide range of programming variations.

- NOTE -

The numerical values shown in the following examples are not coordinate values.They serve only as part of the coordinate designation to help distinguish betweenthe various “X”, “Z”, “,A”, “,C”, and “,R” values.

13-2 M-504A

Figure 13.2 - Angle Definitions for Sub-Spindle Operation

Positive

Negative

0° 180°

+90°

-90°

Z Axis

TI4560

150°

150°

0°

0°

180°

180°

Workpiece

Workpiece

Angle Command: A30.

Angle Command: A-30.

EXAMPLE 1: TWO POINTS

(Refer to Figures 13.3 through 13.6)

N____ X2 ,A____ ;orN____ Z2 ,A____ ;

This basic two point definition allows the programmer to specify a linear move by either program-ming an X and an A word or programming a Z and an A word.

The CNC control moves the tool nose reference point from the start point at the prescribed angleuntil the appropriate position register is equal to the programmed coordinate value.

OPERATION AT THE MAIN SPINDLE

OPERATION AT THE SUB-SPINDLE

M-504A 13-3

Figure 13.3 - Linear MoveBetween Two Points

TI1836

(End Point)X2, Z2

X1, Z1

(Start Point)

+X

+Z

A

Figure 13.4 - Sample Program Segment

TI1836

X.4 Z0. ;Z-.687 ;X2. ,A28. ;

X2.Z?

28°

Z-.687

+X

+Z

X.4Z0.

Figure 13.5 - Linear MoveBetween Two Points

TI4538

(End Point)X2, Z2

A

X1, Z1

(Start Point)

+X

+Z


TI4538

X2.Z?

152°

+X

+Z

Z.687

X.4Z0.

X.4 Z0. ;Z.687 ;X2. ,A152. ;

EXAMPLE 2: THREE POINTS


N____ ,A1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ;

This basic three point definition allows the programmer to specify two consecutive linear moves.

The first linear move is programmed with an A word (,A1). This A word specifies the angle of the firstlinear move in relation to the zero reference angle.

The second linear move is programmed with an X, Z, and an A word (,A2). The X and Z values spec-ify the end point of the second linear move. The A word specifies the angle of the second linear movein relation to the zero reference angle.

Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calculatesthe intersection point of the two linear moves. The tool nose reference point is moved from the startpoint at the prescribed angle until the tool nose reference point reaches the calculated intersectionpoint. The control then moves the tool nose reference point from the calculated intersection point tothe programmed endpoint, as defined by the X3 and Z3 coordinates.


13-4 M-504A

Figure 13.7 - Linear MovesBetween Three Points

TI1837

(End Point)X3, Z3

X1, Z1

(Start Point)

+X

+Z

A1

A2

X2, Z2


TI1837

X.4 Z0. ;Z-.6 ;,A20. ;X2. Z-1.8 ,A43. ;X2.

Z-1.8

20°

Z-.6

+X

+Z

X.4Z0.

43°

X? Z?


M-504A 13-5

Figure 13.9 - Linear MovesBetween Three Points

TI4540

(End Point)X3, Z3

X1, Z1

(Start Point)

+X

+Z

A1

A2

X2, Z2


TI4540

X.4 Z0. ;Z.6 ;,A160. ;X2. Z1.8 ,A137. ; X2.

Z1.8

137°

Z.6

+X

+Z

X.4Z0.

160° X? Z?

EXAMPLE 3: THREE POINTS WITH A RADIUS


This three point definition allows the programmer to specify two linear moves with a radius auto-matically inserted at the intersection of the two moves. Two methods of programming are illustrated inthis example. The first method uses programmed end points for both linear moves. The secondmethod uses an angle definition for the first linear move and programmed end points for the secondlinear move.

Method #1:

N____ X2 Z2 ,R1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ;

The first straight line move is programmed with the X2 and Z2 data words. These data words specifythe intersection point of the first and second linear moves. The radius (,R1) is programmed in the samedata block as the first linear move.

The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordinate val-ues specify the end point of the second linear move.

Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calculatesthe insertion of the programmed radius. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point,designated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designated X2 Z2, until the tool nose referencepoint reaches the point where the radius is to begin. The control moves the tool nose reference pointthrough the proper arc to create the programmed radius and performs a linear move to arrive at theprogrammed endpoint, as defined by the X3 and Z3 coordinates.

Method #2:

N____ ,A1 ,R1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ;

The first straight line move is programmed with an A word (,A1). This A word specifies the angle ofthe first straight line move in relation to the zero reference angle. The radius (,R1) is programmed inthe same data block as the first linear move.

The second linear move is programmed with the X3, Z3, and A2 data words. The X and Z coordinatevalues specify the end point of the second linear move. The A word specifies the angle.

Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calculatesthe intersection point of the two linear moves as well as the insertion of the programmed radius. Thetool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribed angle until the tool nose refer-ence point reaches the point where the radius is to begin. The control moves the tool nose referencepoint through the proper arc to create the programmed radius and performs a linear move to arrive atthe programmed endpoint, as defined by the X3, Z3, and A2.

13-6 M-504A



M-504A 13-7

Figure 13.11 - Radius Inserted BetweenTwo Linear Moves

TI1838

(End Point)X3, Z3

X1, Z1

(Start Point)

+X

+Z

A1

A2

X2, Z2

R

Figure 13.12 - Sample Program Segment(Using Method #2)

TI1838

X.4 Z0. ;Z-.5 ;,A25. ,R.1 ;X2.4 Z-1.8 ,A60. ;

X2.4Z-1.8

25°

Z-.5

+X

+Z

X.4Z0.

60°

X? Z?

.1R

Figure 13.13 - Radius Inserted BetweenTwo Linear Moves

(End Point)X3, Z3

+X

A1

A2

X2, Z2

R

TI4542

X1, Z1

(Start Point)+Z


TI4542

X.4 Z0. ;Z.5 ;,A155. ,R.1 ;X2.4 Z1.8 ,A120. ;

X2.4Z1.8

155°

Z.5

+X

+Z

X.4Z0.

120°

X? Z?

.1R

EXAMPLE 4: THREE POINTS WITH A CHAMFER

(Refer to Figure 13.15 through 13.18)

This three point definition allows the programmer to specify two linear moves with a chamfer auto-matically inserted at the intersection of the two moves. Two methods of programming are illustrated inthis example. The first method uses programmed end points for both linear moves. The secondmethod uses an angle definition for the first linear move and programmed end points along with an an-gle definition for the second linear move.

Method #1:

N____ X2 Z2 ,C1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ;

The first straight line move is programmed with the X2 and Z2 data words. These data words specifythe intersection point of the first and second linear moves. The chamfer (,C1) is programmed in thesame data block as the first linear move.

The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordinate val-ues specify the end point of the second linear move.

Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calculatesthe insertion of the programmed chamfer. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point,designated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designated X2 Z2, until the tool nose referencepoint reaches the point where the chamfer is to begin. The control moves the tool nose reference pointin the proper direction to create the programmed chamfer and then performs a linear move to arrive atthe programmed endpoint, as defined by the X3 and Z3 coordinates.

Method #2:

N____ ,A1 ,C1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ;

The first linear move is programmed with an A word (,A1). This A word specifies the angle of the firstlinear move in relation to the zero reference angle. The chamfer (,C1) is programmed in the same datablock as the first linear move.

The second linear move is programmed with the X3, Z3, and A2 data words. The X and Z coordinatevalues specify the end point of the second linear move. The A word specifies the angle.

Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calculatesthe intersection point of the two linear moves as well as the insertion of the programmed chamfer. Thetool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribed angle until the tool nose refer-ence point reaches the point where the chamfer is to begin. The control moves the tool nose referencepoint in the proper direction to create the programmed chamfer and then performs a linear move to ar-rive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X3, Z3, and A2.

13-8 M-504A



M-504A 13-9

Figure 13.15 - Chamfer Inserted BetweenTwo Linear Moves

TI1839

(End Point)X3, Z3

X1, Z1

(Start Point)

+X

+Z

A1

A2

X2, Z2

C


TI1839

X.4 Z0. ;Z-.5 ;,A18. ,C.125 ;X2.3 Z-1.9 ,A65. ;

X2.3Z-1.9

18°

Z-.5

+X

+Z

X.4Z0.

65°

X? Z?

.125

Figure 13.17 - Chamfer Inserted BetweenTwo Linear Moves

(End Point)X3, Z3

A2

A1

+X

+Z

C

X2, Z2

X1, Z1

(Start Point)

TI4544


TI4544

X.4 Z0. ;Z.5 ;,A162. ,C.125 ;X2.3 Z1.9 ,A115. ;

X2.3Z1.9

162°

Z.5

+X

+Z

X.4Z0.

115°

X? Z?

.125

EXAMPLE 5: FOUR POINTS WITH TWO RADII


This four point definition allows the programmer to specify three linear moves with a radius auto-matically inserted at each of the two intersection points. Two methods of programming are illustratedin this example. The first method uses programmed end points for all three linear moves. The secondmethod uses an angle definition for the first linear move, angle and end point data for the second linearmove, and programmed end points for the third linear move.

Method #1:

N____ X2 Z2 ,R1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,R2 ;N____ Z4 ;


The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordinate val-ues specify the end point of the second linear move. The radius (,R2) is programmed in the same datablock as the second linear move.

The third linear move is programmed with the Z4 data word. The Z coordinate value specifies theend point of the third linear move.

Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calculatesthe insertion of the programmed radii. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point, des-ignated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designated X2 Z2, until the tool nose reference pointreaches the point where the first radius is to begin. The control moves the tool nose reference pointthrough the proper arc to create the first programmed radius and then performs a linear move to arriveat the point where the second radius is to begin. The control moves the tool nose reference pointthrough the proper arc to create the second programmed radius and then performs a linear move toarrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the Z4 coordinate.

13-10 M-504A

Method #2:

N____ ,A1 ,R1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ,R2 ;N____ Z4 ;

The first linear move is programmed with an A word (,A1). This A word specifies the angle of the firstlinear move in relation to the zero reference angle. The radius (,R1) is programmed in the same datablock as the first linear move.

The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordinate val-ues specify the end point of the second linear move. The angle definition for the second linear move(,A2) supplies the CNC control with the information required to calculate the intersection point of thefirst and second linear moves. The radius (,R2) is programmed in the same data block as the secondlinear move.


Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calculatesthe intersection points of the three linear moves as well as the insertion of the programmed radii. Thetool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribed angle until the tool nose refer-ence point reaches the point where the radius is to begin. The control moves the tool nose referencepoint through the proper arc to create the first programmed radius and then performs a linear move toarrive at the point where the second radius is to begin. The control moves the tool nose reference pointthrough the proper arc to create the second programmed radius and then performs a linear move toarrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the Z4 coordinate.


M-504A 13-11

Figure 13.19 - Two Radii InsertedBetween Three Linear Moves

TI1840

Z4

(End Point)

X1, Z1 (Start Point)

+X

+Z

A1

A2

X2, Z2

R1

X3, Z3

R2


TI1840

X.4 Z0. ;Z-.5 ;,A20. ,R.2 ;X2.25 Z-1.8 ,A60. ,R.4 ;Z-2.3 ;

Z-2.3

20°

Z-.5

+X

+Z

X.4Z0.

60°

X? Z?

.2R

.4R

X2.25Z-1.8


13-12 M-504A

Figure 13.21 - Two Radii InsertedBetween Three Linear Moves

TI4546

Z4

(End Point)


+X

+Z

A1

A2

X2, Z2

R1

X3, Z3

R2


TI4546

X.4 Z0. ;Z.5 ;,A160. ,R.2 ;X2.25 Z1.8 ,A120. ,R.4 ;Z2.3 ;

Z2.3

120°

Z.5

+X

+Z

X.4Z0.

160°X? Z?

.2R

.4R

X2.25Z1.8

EXAMPLE 6: FOUR POINTS WITH TWO CHAMFERS


This four point definition allows the programmer to specify three linear moves with a chamfer auto-matically inserted at each of the two intersection points. Two methods of programming are illustratedin this example. The first method uses programmed end points for all three linear moves. The secondmethod uses an angle definition for the first linear move, angle and end point data for the second linearmove, and programmed end points for the third linear move.

Method #1:

N____ X2 Z2 ,C1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,C2 ;N____ X4 Z4 ;


The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordinate val-ues specify the end point of the second linear move. The chamfer (,C2) is programmed in the samedata block as the second linear move.

The third linear move is programmed with the X4 and Z4 data words. The X and Z coordinate valuesspecify the end point of the third linear move.

Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calculatesthe insertion of the programmed chamfers. The tool nose reference point is moved from the startpoint, designated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designated X2 Z2, until the tool nose refer-ence point reaches the point where the first chamfer is to begin. The control moves the tool nose refer-ence point in the proper direction to create the first chamfer and then performs a linear move to arriveat the point where the second chamfer is to begin. The control moves the tool nose reference point inthe proper direction to create the second chamfer and then performs a linear move to arrive at the pro-grammed endpoint, as defined by the X4 and Z4 coordinates.

M-504A 13-13

Method #2:

N____ ,A1 ,C1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ,C2 ;N____ X4 Z4 ;


The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordinate val-ues specify the end point of the second linear move. The angle definition for the second linear move(,A2) supplies the CNC control with the information required to calculate the intersection point of thefirst and second linear moves. The chamfer (,C2) is programmed in the same data block as the secondlinear move.

Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calculatesthe intersection points of the three linear moves as well as the insertion of the programmed chamfers.The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribed angle until the tool nosereference point reaches the point where the chamfer is to begin. The control moves the tool nose ref-erence point in the proper direction to create the first chamfer and then performs a linear move to ar-rive at the point where the second chamfer is to begin. The control moves the tool nose reference pointin the proper direction to create the second chamfer and then performs a linear move to arrive at theprogrammed endpoint, as defined by the X4 and Z4 coordinates.


13-14 M-504A

Figure 13.23 - Two Chamfers InsertedBetween Three Linear Moves

TI1841

X4 Z4

(End Point)

X1, Z1

(Start Point)

+X

A1

A2

X2, Z2

C1

X3, Z3

C2

+Z


TI1841

X.4 Z0. ;Z-.5 ;,A20. ,C.07 ;X2.3 Z-1.75 ,A63. ,C.156 ;X2.4 Z-2.2 ;

X2.4Z-2.2

20°

Z-.5

+X

X.4Z0.

63°

X? Z?

.07

.156

X2.3 Z-1.75

+Z


M-504A 13-15

Figure 13.25 - Two Chamfers InsertedBetween Three Linear Moves

TI4548

X4 Z4

(End Point)

X1, Z1

(Start Point)

+X

+Z

A1

A2

X2, Z2

C1

X3, Z3

C2


TI4548

X.4 Z0. ;Z.5 ;,A160. ,C.07 ;X2.3 Z1.75 ,A117. ,C.156 ;X2.4 Z2.2 ;

X2.4Z2.2

117°

Z.5

+X

+Z

X.4Z0.

160°

X? Z?

.07

.156

X2.3 Z1.75

EXAMPLE 7: FOUR POINTS WITH ONE RADIUS AND CHAMFER


This four point definition allows the programmer to specify three linear moves with a radius auto-matically inserted at the first intersection point and a chamfer automatically inserted at the second in-tersection point. Two methods of programming are illustrated in this example. The first method usesprogrammed end points for all three linear moves. The second method uses an angle definition for thefirst linear move, angle and end point data for the second linear move, and a programmed end pointfor the third linear move.

Method #1:

N____ X2 Z2 ,R1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,C1 ;N____ Z4 ;


The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordinate val-ues specify the end point of the second linear move. The chamfer (,C1) is programmed in the samedata block as the second linear move.


Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calculatesthe insertion of the programmed radius and chamfer. The tool nose reference point is moved from thestart point, designated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designated X2 Z2, until the tool nosereference point reaches the point where the radius is to begin. The control moves the tool nose refer-ence point through the proper arc to create the radius and then performs a linear move to arrive at thepoint where the chamfer is to begin. The control moves the tool nose reference point in the proper di-rection to create the chamfer and then performs a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint,as defined by the Z4 coordinate.

13-16 M-504A

Method #2:

N____ ,A1 ,R1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ,C1 ;N____ Z4 ;

The first linear move is programmed with an A word (,A1). This A word specifies the angle of the firstlinear move in relation to the zero reference angle. The radius (,R1) is programmed in the same datablock as the first linear move.

The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordinate val-ues specify the end point of the second linear move. The angle definition for the second linear move(,A2) supplies the CNC control with the information required to calculate the intersection point of thefirst and second linear moves. The chamfer (,C1) is programmed in the same data block as the secondlinear move.


Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calculatesthe intersection points of the three linear moves as well as the insertion of the programmed radius andchamfer. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribed angle until thetool nose reference point reaches the point where the radius is to begin. The control moves the toolnose reference point through the proper arc to create the radius and then performs a linear move to ar-rive at the point where the chamfer is to begin. The control moves the tool nose reference point in theproper direction to create the chamfer and then performs a linear move to arrive at the programmedendpoint, as defined by the Z4 coordinate.


M-504A 13-17

Figure 13.27 - Radius and Chamfer InsertedBetween Three Linear Moves

TI1842

Z4

(EndPoint)


+X

A1

A2

X2, Z2

R

X3, Z3

C

+Z


TI1842

X.4 Z0. ;Z-.5 ;,A22. ,R.25 ;X2.5 Z-2.03 ,A60. ,C.2 ;Z-2.5 ;

Z-2.5

22° Z-.5

+X

X.4Z0.

60°

X? Z?

.25R

.2

X2.5 Z-2.03

+Z


13-18 M-504A

Figure 13.29 - Radius and Chamfer InsertedBetween Three Linear Moves


TI4550

Z4

(EndPoint)

X1, Z1

(Start Point)

+X

+Z

A1

A2

X2, Z2

R

X3, Z3

C

TI4550

X.4 Z0. ;Z.5 ;,A158. ,R.25 ;X2.5 Z2.03 ,A120. ,C.2 ;Z2.5 ;

Z2.5

120°

Z.5

+X

+Z

X.4Z0.

158°X? Z?

.25R

.2

X2.5 Z2.03

EXAMPLE 8: FOUR POINTS WITH ONE CHAMFER AND RADIUS


This four point definition allows the programmer to specify three linear moves with a chamfer auto-matically inserted at the first intersection point and a radius automatically inserted at the second inter-section point. Two methods of programming are illustrated in this example. The first method usesprogrammed end points for all three linear moves. The second method uses an angle definition for thefirst linear move, angle and end point data for the second linear move, and a programmed end pointfor the third linear move.

Method #1:

N____ X2 Z2 ,C1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,R1 ;N____ Z4 ;


The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordinate val-ues specify the end point of the second linear move. The radius (,R1) is programmed in the same datablock as the second linear move.


Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calculatesthe insertion of the programmed chamfer and radius. The tool nose reference point is moved from thestart point, designated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designated X2 Z2, until the tool nosereference point reaches the point where the chamfer is to begin. The control moves the tool nose ref-erence point in the proper direction to create the chamfer and then performs a linear move to arrive atthe point where the radius is to begin. The control moves the tool nose reference point through theproper arc to create the radius and then performs a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint,as defined by the Z4 coordinate.

M-504A 13-19

Method #2:

N____ ,A1 ,C1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ,R1 ;N____ Z4 ;


The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordinate val-ues specify the end point of the second linear move. The angle definition for the second linear move(,A2) supplies the CNC control with the information required to calculate the intersection point of thefirst and second linear moves. The radius (,R1) is programmed in the same data block as the secondlinear move.


Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calculatesthe intersection points of the three linear moves as well as the insertion of the programmed chamferand radius. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribed angle until thetool nose reference point reaches the point where the chamfer is to begin. The control moves the toolnose reference point in the proper direction to create the chamfer and then performs a linear move toarrive at the point where the radius is to begin. The control moves the tool nose reference pointthrough the proper arc to create the radius and then performs a linear move to arrive at the pro-grammed endpoint, as defined by the Z4 coordinate.


13-20 M-504A

Figure 13.31 - Chamfer and Radius InsertedBetween Three Linear Moves

TI1843

Z4

(EndPoint)


+X

A1

A2

X2, Z2

R

X3, Z3

C+Z


TI1843

X.4 Z0. ;Z-.5 ;,A17. ,C.09 ;X2. Z-1.5 ,A56. ,R.25 ;Z-2.1 ;

Z-2.1

17° Z-.5

+X

X.4Z0.

56°

X? Z?

.25R

.09

X2. Z-1.5

+Z


M-504A 13-21

Figure 13.33 - Chamfer and Radius InsertedBetween Three Linear Moves


TI4552

Z4

(EndPoint)

X1, Z1

(Start Point)

+X

+Z

A1

A2

X2, Z2

R

X3, Z3

C

TI4552

X.4 Z0. ;Z.5 ;,A163. ,C.09 ;X2. Z1.5 ,A124. ,R.25 ;Z2.1 ;

Z2.1

124°

Z.5

+X

+Z

X.4Z0.

163°

X? Z?

.25R

.09

X2. Z1.5

BLUEPRINT PROGRAMMING SAMPLE PROGRAM

This sample program is written for operation at the main spindle.


N1 (Finish Face and Turn R.015 Q3) ; Sequence Number and Operator Message

G97 S1000 M13 P1 ; Main Spindle Forward 1000 RPM/Coolant ON


T0101 ; Index to Station 1 and Select Tool Offset 1

X-0.031 Z0.2 ; Move Tool to Activate Tool Offset

G50 S4000 ; Constant Surface Speed 4000 RPM Limit

G96 S370 ; Establish Constant Surface Speed,370 Surface Feet per Minute

G1 G42 X-0.03 Z.1 F100. ; Move to Activate Tool Nose Radius Compensation

G99 Z0. F.004 ; Feed to Face of Workpiece

X1. ,R0.06 ; Cut to a 1 inch Diameter, Insert a .06 Radius

Z-0.25 ,C0.0625 ; Cut to Z-.25, Insert a .0625 Chamfer

X0.5 ,A230. ,R0.125 ; Cut to a .5 inch diameter at an angle of 230 degrees,Insert a .125 Radius

,A180. ,R.125 ; Cut at 180 degree angle, Insert a .125 radius

X1. Z-1.375 ,A130. ,C0.0625 ; Cut to a 1 inch Diameter, Cut to Z-1.375, Cut at an angleof 130 degrees, Insert a .0625 Chamfer

Z-1.625 ; Cut to Z-1.625

X1.09 ; Clear workpiece by three times the tool nose diameter.


M01 ; Optional Stop

13-22 M-504A

Figure 13.35 - Finished Workpiece for Sample Program

TI1774

.0625Chamfer

.06Radius

.125Radius

.125Radius

.0625Chamfer

1.0001.000

1.625

.500

.250.250

50° 50°

BLUEPRINT PROGRAMMING NOTES

1. A comma must precede an A (angle), C (chamfer), or R (radius) command.

2. When a chamfer in inserted, the chamfer will be equal on both sides of the lines intersected.

3. When a radius in inserted, the radius must be tangentially blended between the two moves. If anon-tangential radius is required, program the radius using a G02/G03 code.

4. When programming either an insert chamfer or radius, the intersection point must beprogrammed.

5. The value of the chamfer or radius is always positive and it is to be programmed at the end ofthe first linear move.

6. When defining angles, the decimal point MUST be programmed.

7. G01 (Linear Interpolation) must be active while blueprint programming blocks are executed.

M-504A 13-23

- NOTES -

13-24 M-504A

CHAPTER 14 - SUB-SPINDLE [Option]

INTRODUCTION

The sub-spindle allows the workpiece to be machined at both ends without stopping the machine toend-for-end the workpiece. This reduces cycle time by reducing or eliminating handling of theworkpiece by the machine operator.

Drilling, boring, turning, and facing operations can be performed on a workpiece that is chucked inthe sub-spindle. Depending on the machining sequence that is selected, the first end of the workpieceis machined in either the main spindle or sub-spindle. The workpiece is then transferred to the otherspindle to complete machining of the second end.

The maximum sub-spindle speed is shown in the following table.

Machine Model Maximum RPM

T-42 Lathe (16C Main Spindle) 6,000

T-42 Big Bore Lathe (20C Main Spindle) 6,000



TRAVEL SPECIFICATIONS

The sub-spindle travel is established at the factory. Refer to page A1-8 for the sub-spindle travelspecifications.

M-504A 14-1

PROGRAMMING AXIS MOTION

FEEDRATE

Sub-spindle feedrate is commanded by the F data word, with a maximum programmable feedrateof 150 in/min [3,810 mm/min].

Refer to Chapter 1 for additional information on the F data word.

E AXIS MOTION

- NOTE -

When E axis motion is programmed by itself, the sub-spindle moves at the pro-grammed feedrate. When E axis motion is programmed with X and/or Z axis motion,the sub-spindle moves at a compensated feedrate to cause the sub-spindle to com-plete the move at the same time as the other axes.

The E data word is used to command direction and distance when moving the sub-spindle. Theface of the sub-spindle is the sub-spindle reference point.

The E data word commands an absolute move referenced against the Z0 (zero) position of the ma-chine coordinate position. Positive E coordinates are to the right of Z0 and negative E coordinates areto the left of Z0.

The Z0 position will be equal to the face of the main spindle unless modified through the Z axis workshift offset. Refer to Chapter 4 for information on the Z axis work shift offset.

The E axis work shift will be used to set the distance from the sub-spindle collet face to Z0. Settingan E axis work shift will allow the programmer to program the sub-spindle position in relation to Z0.The E axis work shift is typically used for workpiece transfer between the main spindle and sub-spin-dle. Refer to the operator's manual (M-505) for information on setting the E axis work shift.

E Axis Position Verification

NOTICE

“G53 E#5025” MUST be commanded before E axis motion is commanded wheneverthe E axis drive has been turned OFF through the use of the M76 command andturned back ON through the use of the M77 or M78 command.

The “G53 E#5025” data block commands the control to verify the position of the E axis. Refer to theprogramming examples used in this chapter.

X/U AXIS MOTION

Programming incremental and absolute axis motion on the X axis during sub-spindle operation isthe same as programming incremental and absolute axis motion on the X axis during main spindleoperation.

14-2 M-504A

Z/W AXIS MOTION

NOTICE

Z Axis motion required to clear the workpiece during sub-spindle operation is in theopposite direction of that required to clear the workpiece during main spindle opera-tion.

The control assumes all numerical data to be positive (+) unless a minus (-) sign isprogrammed. When required, be sure the minus (-) sign is programmed.

Main Spindle

When the workpiece is in the main spindle, all Z axis tool motion away from the face of theworkpiece is to the right of the workpiece.

All incremental moves in this direction are positive (+) W moves.

Assuming a work shift offset has set the face of the workpiece to Z0, all absolute coordinates on theZ axis to the right of the workpiece are positive (+).

Therefore, to clear the workpiece on the Z axis, program either a positive (+) W or positive (+) Zmove along with whatever X axis move that may be required. Refer to Figure 14.2.

Sub-Spindle

NOTICE

Refer to the sub-spindle / tool holder clearance requirement outlined on the nextpage before programming machining operations on the sub-spindle.

When the workpiece is in the sub-spindle, all Z axis tool motion away from the face of the workpieceis to the left of the workpiece.

All incremental moves in this direction are negative (-) W moves.

Assuming a work shift offset has set the face of the workpiece to Z0, all absolute coordinates on theZ axis to the left of the workpiece are negative (-).

Therefore, to clear the workpiece on the Z axis, program either a negative (-) W or negative (-) Zmove along with whatever X axis move that may be required. Refer to Figure 14.2.

M-504A 14-3

SUB-SPINDLE / TOOL HOLDER CLEARANCE REQUIREMENT

- NOTE -

This clearance requirement exists on machines equipped with a Hardinge turret topplate and an optional sub-spindle.

When drilling, boring, or tapping at the sub-spindle, the minimum clearance required between theround shank tool holder and the face of the sub-spindle is 1.25 inches [ 32 millimeters]. Refer to Figure14.1.

14-4 M-504A

Figure 14.1 - Minimum Tool Holder Clearancefor Round Shank Tool Holders

1.25 [32.0]TI5755B

Inches [Millimeters]

TurretTop Plate

OptionalSub-Spindle

SUB-SPINDLE G CODES

Most of the G codes are programmed in the same manner, regardless of whether the workpiece isin the main spindle or the sub-spindle. However, there are G codes that deserve extra attention to besure the proper G code is used. The following G codes are discussed simply to eliminate possiblequestions.

G02 / G03 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION

Circular Interpolation for sub-spindle programming is interpreted in the same manner as CircularInterpolation for main spindle programming. Refer to Figure 14.2.

G02 is a clockwise arc as viewed from above the tool and looking down toward the bed of the ma-chine.

G03 is a counterclockwise arc as viewed from above the tool and looking down toward the bed ofthe machine.

Refer to Chapter 3 for information on Circular Interpolation.

G41 / G42 TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION

Tool Nose Radius Compensation for sub-spindle programming is interpreted in the same manneras Tool Nose Radius Compensation for main spindle programming. Refer to Figure 14.2.

G41 activates Tool Nose Radius Compensation with the workpiece to the right of the tool.

G42 activates Tool Nose Radius Compensation with the workpiece to the left of the tool.

Refer to Chapter 2 for information on Tool Nose Radius Compensation.

M-504A 14-5

Figure 14.2 - Programming Circular Interpolationand Tool Nose Radius Compensation

TI5770

Tool Quadrant Q3 Tool Quadrant Q4

G42 G41

G03 G02

Main Spindle Z0 Sub-Spindle Z0

-Z Inside Part +Z Inside Part-Z Move toClear Part

+Z Move toClear Part

SUB-SPINDLE M CODES

The following M codes are used only in conjunction with sub-spindle operation.

M07 SUB-SPINDLE PHASE SYNCHRONIZATION WITH MAIN SPINDLE

NOTICE

Be sure the machine tool is equipped with “matched” collets when the use of theM07 command is required.

- NOTE -

M32 MUST be programmed in the block immediately preceding the M07 block.

M07 commands the rotational direction, velocity, and orientation of the work-holding device of thesub-spindle to match the main spindle. This allows the transfer of non-symmetrical parts between themain spindle and the sub-spindle. M07 is programmed in a block by itself. Refer to Figures 14.3 and14.4.


M32 SUB-SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION WITH MAIN SPINDLE

M32 commands the rotational direction and velocity of the sub-spindle to match the main spindle .This mode is only used for part transfer between the main spindle and the sub-spindle.


14-6 M-504A

Figure 14.3 - Sub-SpindleForward Rotation

TI5761

Spindle Command:M33 Sub-Spindle Forward

Figure 14.4 - Sub-SpindleReverse Rotation

TI5762

Spindle Command:M34 Sub-Spindle Reverse

M33 SUB-SPINDLE FORWARD

M33 commands the sub-spindle to rotate in the forward direction at the programmed spindle speed(S word). Inch per Minute or Inch per Revolution programming is allowed. The sub-spindle is rotatingin the forward direction when rotating clockwise, as viewed from the sub-spindle end of the machine.M33 remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M30, M34, M35, or by pressing the Reset or Emer-gency Stop push button. Refer to Figure 14.3. Refer to M03, in Chapter 1, for the main spindle forwardcommand.

M34 SUB-SPINDLE REVERSE

M34 commands the sub-spindle to rotate in the reverse direction at the programmed spindle speed(S word). Inch per Minute or Inch per Revolution programming is allowed. The sub-spindle is rotatingin the reverse direction when rotating counterclockwise, as viewed from the sub-spindle end of themachine. M34 remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M30, M33, M35, or by pressing the Resetor Emergency Stop push button. Refer to Figure 14.4. Refer to M04, in Chapter 1, for the main spindlereverse command.

M35 SUB-SPINDLE STOP

M35 commands the sub-spindle to stop. M35 remains active until canceled by M07, M32, M33, orM34. M35 is active at machine start-up and can also be activated by M00, M01, M30, Reset, andEmergency Stop. Refer to M05, in Chapter 1, for the main spindle stop command.

M46 SUB-SPINDLE AIR BLAST ON [Option]

M46 activates the sub-spindle air blast.

M47 SUB-SPINDLE AIR BLAST OFF [Option]

M47 deactivates the sub-spindle air blast.

M56 SUB-SPINDLE COLLET / CHUCK OPEN

M56 commands the sub-spindle collet closer to open, releasing the workpiece. M56 remains activeuntil canceled by M57. Refer to M21 for the corresponding command for the main spindle.

M57 SUB-SPINDLE COLLET / CHUCK CLOSE

M57 commands the sub-spindle collet closer to close, gripping the workpiece. M57 remains activeuntil canceled by M56. Refer to M22 for the corresponding command for the main spindle.

M62 ACTIVATE C AXIS SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION

The M62 command activates C axis spindle synchronization between the main spindle and thesub-spindle. Refer to the sample programs beginning on page 14-11.

M63 CANCEL C AXIS SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION

The M63 command cancels C axis spindle synchronization between the main spindle and thesub-spindle. Refer to the sample programs beginning on page 14-11.

M-504A 14-7

M68 EXTERNAL CHUCKING MODE

M68 commands the control to use the sub-spindle collet closer with external gripping stylework-holding devices. External chucking is activated through Manual Data Input mode.

Refer to the operator’s manual (M-505) for information on switching chucking modes.

M69 INTERNAL CHUCKING MODE

M69 commands the control to use the sub-spindle collet closer with internal gripping stylework-holding devices. Internal chucking is activated through Manual Data Input mode.

Refer to the operator’s manual (M-505) for information on switching chucking modes.

M76 SUB-SPINDLE DRIVE OFF

The M76 command turns OFF the axis drive for the sub-spindle.

M77 SUB-SPINDLE DRIVE LOW TORQUE

The M77 command switches the axis drive for the sub-spindle to low torque mode.

M78 SUB-SPINDLE DRIVE NORMAL TORQUE

The M78 command switches the axis drive for the sub-spindle to normal torque mode.

M215 THRU-SPINDLE COOLANT ON

The M215 command causes the thru-spindle coolant at the sub-spindle to turn ON. M215 remainsactive until canceled by M216, M30, control Reset, or control OFF.

M216 THRU-SPINDLE COOLANT OFF

The M216 command causes the thru-spindle coolant at the sub-spindle to turn OFF. M216 remainsactive until canceled by M215.

14-8 M-504A

SUB-SPINDLE WORK SHIFT

NOTICE

The work shift file contains an E, X, Y, and Z axis register. The X and Y axis regis-ters should be set to zero at all times. The value entered into the Z axis work shiftregister MUST be a NEGATIVE number. The Z axis work shift MUST be modifiedwhenever the workpiece is transferred between the main spindle and the sub-spin-dle.

The Z axis work shift sets the face of the workpiece to Z0 (zero) and is programmedas a NEGATIVE number regardless of whether the workpiece is in the main spindleor sub-spindle. Refer to Figure 14.5 for a comparison of main spindle and sub-spin-dle work shifts.

Program a G10 line at the beginning of each tool operation to be sure the proper work shift is activefor that particular operation.

Refer to Chapter 4 for additional information on work shift.

M-504A 14-9

Figure 14.5 - Main Spindle and Sub-SpindleWork Shift Offset Comparison

TI5771

Main Spindle Z0

3.125

Sub-Spindle Z0

10.625

Main Spindle Z Axis Work Shift Entry: G10 P0 Z-3.125 ;

Sub-Spindle Z Axis Work Shift Entry: G10 P0 Z-10.625 ;

TOOL OFFSETS

Tool offsets are established and activated for sub-spindle operations in the same manner as theyare for main spindle operations. Refer to Chapter 4 for additional information on tool offsets.

TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSETS

A point of concern when programming for sub-spindle operations is the tool nose orientation num-ber. (Refer to Figure 14.2) Be sure the proper orientation codes are entered in the tool offset registers.Refer to Chapter 4 for information on entering tool geometry offsets into the control.

TOOL WEAR OFFSETS

Refer to Chapter 4 for information on entering tool wear offsets into the control.

X Axis Tool Wear Offsets

When the X axis tool wear offset is increased in value, the tool tip will be positioned further from thespindle centerline for a given X axis coordinate. As a result, the workpiece diameter will increase.

When the X axis tool wear offset is decreased in value, the tool tip will be positioned closer to thespindle centerline for a given X axis coordinate. As a result, the workpiece diameter will decrease.

Z Axis Tool Wear Offsets

When the Z axis tool wear offset is increased in value, the tool tip will be positioned further from theface of the main spindle (closer to the face of the sub-spindle) for a given Z axis coordinate. As a result,the workpiece length will increase for main spindle operations and decrease for sub-spindleoperations.

When the Z axis tool wear offset is decreased in value, the tool tip will be positioned closer to theface of the main spindle (further from the face of the sub-spindle) for a given Z axis coordinate. As a re-sult, the workpiece length will decrease for main spindle operations and increase for sub-spindleoperations.

14-10 M-504A

SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION SAMPLE PROGRAMS

SAMPLE PROGRAM USING STANDARD COLLETS OR PULL BACK SYSTEMS

N10 (T1010-DRILL CROSS HOLE) Sequence Number and Operator Message

G10 P0 Z#500 M66 Set Main Spindle Work Shift, Spindle Feedback fromLive Tool Spindle

M56 Sub-Spindle Collet/Chuck Open


T1010 M23 Index to Tool Station, Select Offset,Activate Main Spindle Contouring Mode

M51 S3000 G97 P3 Live Tool Rotation Command, 3000RPM, Direct RPM,Select Spindle (P3 = Live Tool)

X1.2 Z-3.5 Y0 C0 E-.5 Position Tool, Orient Main Spindle to 0 Degrees,Position Sub-Spindle over Workpiece

M223 Activate Sub-Spindle Contouring Mode

G0A0 Orient Sub-Spindle to 0 Degrees

M77 Sub-Spindle Axis Drive to Low Torque Mode

M57 Sub-Spindle Collet/Chuck Close

M62 Activate C Axis Spindle Synchronization

G87 X.5 F3.5 Execute G87 Side Drilling Cycle

X.5 C90. Orient Spindles to 90 Degrees, Execute G87 Side Drilling Cycle



G80 Cancel G87 Side Drilling Cycle

M63 Cancel C Axis Spindle Synchronization

M24 Cancel Main Spindle Contouring Mode

M224 Cancel Sub-Spindle Contouring Mode

M55 Live Tool Stop Command


M76 Sub-Spindle Axis Drive OFF

M78 Sub-Spindle Axis Drive to Normal Torque Mode

G53 E#5025 E Axis Position Verification

G0 G53 E16.5 Rapid Sub-Spindle to Reference Position


M1 Optional Stop

NOTICE

Refer to page 14-2 for information regarding E Axis position verification.

Verify subprogram O1 to be sure there are no E axis commands if the part will re-main engaged for subsequent operations while gripped with both spindles.

M-504A 14-11

SAMPLE PROGRAM USING DEAD LENGTH COLLETS OR CHUCKS

N10 (T1010-DRILL CROSS HOLE) Sequence Number and Operator Message

G10 P0 Z#500 M66 Set Main Spindle Work Shift, Spindle Feedback fromLive Tool Spindle



T1010 M23 Index to Tool Station, Select Offset,Activate Main Spindle Contouring Mode

M51 S3000 G97 P3 Live Tool Rotation Command, 3000RPM, Direct RPM,Select Spindle (P3 = Live Tool)

X1.2 Z-3.5 Y0 C0 E-.5 Position Tool, Orient Main Spindle to 0 Degrees,Position Sub-Spindle over Workpiece

M223 Activate Sub-Spindle Contouring Mode

G0 A0 Orient Sub-Spindle to 0 Degrees

M57 Sub-Spindle Collet/Chuck Close

M62 Activate C Axis Spindle Synchronization

G87 X.5 F3.5 Execute G87 Side Drilling Cycle




G80 Cancel G87 Side Drilling Cycle

M63 Cancel C Axis Spindle Synchronization

M24 Cancel Main Spindle Contouring Mode

M224 Cancel Sub-Spindle Contouring Mode

M55 Live Tool Stop Command


G4 U0.5 ; Dwell .5 Seconds

G0 G53 E16.5 Rapid Sub-Spindle to Reference Position


M1 Optional Stop

NOTICE

Verify subprogram O1 to be sure there are no E axis commands if the part will re-main engaged for subsequent operations while gripped with both spindles.

14-12 M-504A

WORKPIECE TRANSFER

The sample program segments in this section illustrate the recommended formats and sequencefor programming workpiece transfer between the main spindle and the sub-spindle. There are threebasic types of workpiece transfers:

1. Bar Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle (Figures 14.8 through 14.10)

2. Slug Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle (Figures 14.11 through 14.13)

3. Slug Job Transfer from Sub-Spindle to Main Spindle (Figures 14.14 through 14.16)

Examples of each type of part transfer will be shown in the following sections.

M-504A 14-13

TRANSFERRING FROM MAIN SPINDLE TO SUB-SPINDLE

Bar Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle

NOTICE

Refer to the spindle clearance requirements outlined below before programming abar job transfer.

SPINDLE CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS


1. T-42 lathe: The tip of the cut-off tool MUST extend 3.94 inches [100 millimeters] from the edgeof the turret top plate.

T-51 and T-65 lathes: The tip of the cut-off tool MUST extend 4.33 inches [110 millimeters]from the edge of the turret top plate.

2. The face of the sub-spindle must be at least 1.80 inches [45.7 millimeters] from the face of themain spindle.

14-14 M-504A

Figure 14.6 - T-42 Lathe:Spindle Clearance Requirements

TI5799

3.94[100]

1.80 [45.7]

Sub-Spindle

TurretTop Plate

Inches [Millimeters]

Main Spindle

Square ShankCut-Off Tool

Holder Required

Figure 14.7 - T-51 and T-65 Lathes:Spindle Clearance Requirements

TurretTop Plate

TI5839Inches [Millimeters]

1.80 [45.7]


4.33[110]

Square ShankCut-Off Tool

Holder Required

The following sample program segments illustrate the recommended format and sequence for pro-gramming bar job transfers from the main spindle to the sub-spindle. Refer to Figures 14.8 through14.10.

DEAD LENGTH COLLET NOT INSTALLED IN SUB-SPINDLE COLLET

N12 (CUT OFF & TRANSFER) ; Sequence Number and Operator Message


G97 S2000 M14 P1 ; Main Spindle 1000 RPM Reverse, Coolant ON, Select Spindle



X1. Z-2.5 M32 ; Rapid to Start,Sub-Spindle Synchronization with Main Spindle (Figure 14.8)

M7 ; Sub-Spindle Phase Synchronization with Main Spindle [Optional]

G50 S4500 ; Establish Maximum RPM Limit

G96 S700 ; Constant Surface Speed, 700 Surface Feet per Minute

M56 ; Sub-Spindle Collet Open

G0 E-1. ; Rapid Sub-Spindle to 1" over Part (Figure 14.9)

M76 ; Sub-Spindle Drive OFF

G4 U.2 ; Dwell .2 Seconds

M57 ; Sub-Spindle Collet Close


M78 ; Sub-Spindle Drive Normal Torque

G1 G99 X-.02 F0.0025 ; Feed Tool to X-.02 Diameter (Cut-off)

G53 E#5025 ; E Axis Position Verification


G0 G53 E16.5 ; Rapid Sub-Spindle to Reference Position

X1.1 ; Tool Rapid to Clear Workpiece (Figure 14.10)


M1 : Optional Stop

M-504A 14-15

14-16 M-504A

Figure 14.8 - Tool Positioned for Cut-Off Operation

TI5763

Figure 14.9 - Cut-Off Operation

TI5764

Figure 14.10 - Sub-Spindle Moved to Reference Position

TI5765

DEAD LENGTH COLLET INSTALLED IN SUB-SPINDLE COLLET

N12 (CUT OFF & TRANSFER) ; Sequence Number and Operator Message


G97 S1000 M14 P1 ; Main Spindle 1000 RPM Reverse, Coolant ON, Select Spindle



X1. Z2.5 M32 ; Position X and Z Axes,Sub-Spindle Synchronization with Main Spindle (Figure 14.8)


G50 S4500 ; Establish Maximum RPM Limit




M77 ; Sub-Spindle Drive to Low Torque Mode

G1 G98 E-1.05 F10. ; Feed Stock Stop against Workpiece

G4 U.2 ; Dwell .2 seconds


G4 U.2 ; Dwell .2 seconds



G1 G99 X-.02 F0.0025 ; Feed Tool to X-.02 Diameter (Cut-off)



G0 G53 E16.5. ; Rapid Sub-Spindle to Reference Position

X1.1 ; Tool Rapid to Clear Workpiece (Figure 14.10)


M1 : Optional Stop

This format activates Sub-Spindle Drive Low Torque mode before the sub-spindle collet is closed.

After the part has been transferred, program M76 and M78 to return the sub-spindle to NormalTorque mode BEFORE the rapid move to the E axis reference position.

M-504A 14-17

Slug Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle

The following sample program segment illustrates the recommended format and sequence for pro-gramming slug job transfers from the main spindle to the sub-spindle. Refer to Figures 14.11 through14.13.

N84 (TRANSFER TO SUB) ; Sequence Number and Operator Message


G97 S2500 M14 P1 ; Main Spindle 2500 RPM Reverse, Select Spindle


M32 ; Sub-Spindle Synchronization with Main Spindle








M21 ; Main Spindle Collet Open




G0 G53 E16.5. ; Rapid Sub-Spindle to Reference Position (Figure 14.13)

M1 ; Optional Stop

14-18 M-504A

M-504A 14-19

Figure 14.11 - Workpiece Held in Main Spindle

TI5766

Figure 14.12 - Workpiece Held in Both Spindles

TI5767

Figure 14.13 - Workpiece Held in Sub-Spindle(Sub-Spindle Moved to Reference Position)

TI5768

TRANSFERRING FROM SUB-SPINDLE TO MAIN SPINDLE

The following sample program segments illustrate the proper format and sequence for program-ming transfers from the sub-spindle to the main spindle. Unlike main spindle to sub-spindle transfers,the only type of transfer which is used when transferring from the sub-spindle to the main spindle isslug job transfer. Refer to Figures 14.14 through 14.16.

N84 (TRANSFER TO MAIN) ; Sequence Number and Operator Message


G10 P0 E#501 ; Set Sub-Spindle Work Shift for Part Transfer

G97 S2500 M14 P1 ; Main Spindle 2500 RPM Reverse, Select Spindle

M98 P1 ; Call Safe Start Subprogram O1

M32 ; Sub-Spindle Synchronization with Main Spindle


M21 ; Main Spindle Collet Open

M36 ; Main Spindle Air Blast ON

G0 E-1. ; Rapid Part 1" into Main Spindle (Figure 14.15)



M22 ; Main Spindle Collet Close


M37 ; Main Spindle Air Blast OFF





G0 G53 E16.5. ; Rapid Sub-Spindle to Reference Position (Figure 14.16)

M1 ; Optional Stop

14-20 M-504A

M-504A 14-21

Figure 14.14 - Workpiece Held in Sub-Spindle(Sub-Spindle at Reference Position)

TI5768

Figure 14.15 - Workpiece Held in Both Spindles

TI5767

Figure 14.16 - Workpiece Held in Main Spindle(Sub-Spindle Moved to Reference Position)

TI5766

SUB-SPINDLE SAMPLE PROGRAM

The following sample program is written for a T-42 lathe. The workpiece will be machined from barstock which is 1-7/16 inches in diameter. The workpiece will be machined on the main spindle first;then transferred to the sub-spindle to complete the machining operation. Refer to Figure 14.17.

BASIC SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

Tool Station and Offset

Main Spindle Work Shift Z-2.75 -

Feed Bar Stock T1010

Rough Facing and Turning Operation T0101

Finish Facing and Turning Operation T0202

Workpiece Cut-off and Transfer T0404

Sub-Spindle Work Shift Z-15.000 -

Finish Facing and Turning Operation T0808

Center Drill T0909

Drop Part

14-22 M-504A

Figure 14.17 - Sample Program Work Shift Values

TI5769

-2.750 1.500

-15.000Sub-Spindle Work Shift

Main SpindleWork Shift

16.50Sub-Spindle Reference Position

Main Spindle Face Sub-Spindle Face

SAMPLE PROGRAM

% Stop Code

O1112 ; Program Number

N10 (Feed Stock) ; Sequence Number and Operator Message


G97 S100 M14 P1 ; Main Spindle Reverse 100 RPM, Coolant ON, Select Spindle



X0. Z0.1 ; Rapid Tool to Start Point

G1 Z-2. F100. ; Position Stock Stop

M21 ; Main Spindle Open


Z0.02 F20. ; Move to Z.02


M22 ; Main Spindle Close



M1 ; Optional Stop

N1 (Rough Face and Turn O.D.) Sequence Number and Operator Message





X1.5 Z0.005 ; Rapid Tool to Start Point



G1 G99 X-0.06 F0.005 ; Rough Face the Workpiece

G98 X1.45 Z0.05 F100. ; Move to Clear the Workpiece

G90 G99 X1.3 Z-1.19 F0.008 ; G90 Turning Cycle - Single Pass

G1 G98 X1.025 F75. ; Position for Rough Turn

G99 Z0.005 F0.007 ; Feed to Face of Workpiece

X1.135 Z-0.05 ; Rough Turn the 45 Degree Angle

,A0. ; Rough Turn the O.D.

X1.26 Z-1.195 ,A20. ; Rough Turn the 20 Degree Angle

X1.45 ; Feed to Clear the Workpiece


M1 ; Optional Stop

M-504A 14-23

N2 (Finish R.015 Q3) Sequence Number and Operator Message





X0. Z0.2 ; Rapid Tool to Start Point



G1 G42 X-0.03 Z0.1 F100. ; Move to Activate Tool Nose Radius Compensation

G99 Z0. F0.003 ; Feed to Face of Workpiece

X1.125 ,C0.05 ; Face and Chamfer Workpiece

,A0 ; Finish Turn the O.D.

X1.25 Z-1.2 ,A20. ; Finish Turn the 20 Degree Angle



M1 ; Optional Stop

N4 (.125 Cut-off and Transfer) Sequence Number and Operator Message


G97 S1000 M14 P1 ; Main Spindle Reverse 1000 RPM, Coolant ON



X1.5 Z-2.135 M32 ; Rapid Tool to Start Point,Sub-Spindle Synchronization with Main Spindle





G0 E-.5 ; Position Sub-Spindle to Grip Workpiece



M57 ; Sub-Spindle Collet Closed



G1 G99 X-.02 F.002 ; Cut off Workpiece



G0 G53 E16.5. ; Sub-Spindle Rapid Traverse to Reference Position

G0 X1.5 ; Rapid Tool Clear of Bar Stock


M1 ; Optional Stop

14-24 M-504A

N08 (Finish R.015 Q4) Sequence Number and Operator Message


G97 S1000 M33 P2 ; Sub-Spindle Forward 1000 RPM, Coolant ON



X1.51 Z-0.1 M8 ; Rapid Tool to Start Point, Coolant ON



G1 G42 X1.5 Z0. F100. ; Move to Activate Tool Nose Radius Compensation

G99 X-0.03 F0.004 ; Finish Face the Workpiece

G41 ; Tool Nose Radius Compensation Axis Reversal

X1.2 ; Feed to Arc Start

G2 X1.4 Z0.1 R0.1 F0.002 ; Cut Radius

G1 Z0.85 F0.004 ; Finish Turn the O.D.



M1 ; Optional Stop

N09 (#4 Center Drill) Sequence Number and Operator Message


G97 S1000 M33 P2 ; Sub-Spindle Forward 1000 RPM



X0. Z-0.1 S1600 M8 ; Rapid Tool to Start Point, Spindle and Coolant ON

G1 G99 Z0.28 F.009 ; Drill to Depth

Z-.25 ; Feed to Clear the Workpiece


M1 ; Optional Stop

N026 (Drop Workpiece) Sequence Number and Operator Message


M35 ; Sub-Spindle Stop


M26 ; Extend Part Catcher

M56 ; Sub-Spindle Open


M25 ; Retract Part Catcher

M1 ; Optional Stop


% Stop Code

M-504A 14-25

SUB-SPINDLE PROGRAMMING NOTES

1. Cycle Start is inhibited when the main spindle and sub-spindle work-holding devices are bothopen.

2. When operating the spindles in sync mode, DO NOT reverse spindle directions.

3. When it is necessary to program M07 (Sub-Spindle Phase Synchronization with Main Spindle),M32 MUST be programmed in the block immediately preceding the M07 block.

4. For safety, the Work Shift Offset is programmed after each Operation Sequence number.

5. Be sure to call the correct Safe Index subprogram for the spindle being used. Refer to “SafeIndex Subprograms”, page 9-5.

6. Enter a 0 (zero) at the beginning of each sub-spindle operation sequence number to distinguishsub-spindle operation sequence numbers from main spindle sequence numbers.

7. When the operator is running a bar job, the Repeat Mode push button will be activated. Whenan M30 command is read by the control, the program rewinds back to the beginning. If RepeatMode is active when the program rewinds, the program will begin executing again.

8. When using a bar feed and a new piece of bar stock is loaded in the bar feed, the face of the barstock should be flush with the face of the collet in the main spindle since the part programbegins with a feed stock operation.

14-26 M-504A

- NOTES -

M-504A 14-27

- NOTES -

14-28 M-504A

CHAPTER 15 - BASIC Y AXIS PROGRAMMING

INTRODUCTION

The purpose of this chapter is to illustrate basic Y axis machining concepts. Y axis machining re-quires the use of live tooling attachments.

Live tooling is a standard feature on T-42, T-51, and T-65 lathes equipped with a BMT top plate.The live tooling attachments are not included with the machine tool and must be purchasedseparately.

The Y axis option allows programming of the live tools in a plane that is perpendicular to the bed ofthe machine. Refer to Appendix One for Y axis travel specifications.

Y0 (zero) is designated as part centerline. This feature will allow machining of flats, pockets, anddrilling of holes off the spindle centerline. The spindle may be oriented with the C axis as outlined inChapter 11. In addition, all canned cycles for drilling and rigid tapping are available.

NOTICE


M-504A 15-1

Y AXIS PROGRAMMING FORMATS


- NOTE -




M98 P1 Call Safe Index Subprogram #1

T____ M23 Index to Tool Station and Call OffsetC Axis Commands to Main Spindle

(G17 or G19) X___ Z___ Y___ C___ Set Plane, Position Axis, Orient Main Spindle

M(51, 52, 53, or 54) S___ G97 P3 Live Tool Direction, Spindle RPM, Direct RPM,Select Spindle (P3 = Live Tool Spindle)

G1 G99 X___ Z___ Y___ F___ Machine Part

G0 X___ Z___ Y___ Clear Part by 3 Times the Tool Tip Diameter

C___ Orient Main Spindle as Required


G0 G18 X___ Z___ Y___ Set X-Z Plane, Clear Part by 3 Times the Tool Tip Diameter

M55 Stop Live Tool Spindle

M24 Cancel C Axis


M01 Optional Stop

15-2 M-504A


- NOTE -



G10 P0 Z#501 Set Sub-Spindle Work Shift


T____ M223 Index to Tool Station and Call OffsetC Axis Commands to Sub-Spindle

(G17 or G19) X___ Z___ Y___ A___ Set Plane, Position Axis, Orient Sub-Spindle

M(51, 52, 53, or 54) S___ G97 P3 Live Tool Direction, Spindle RPM, Direct RPM,Select Spindle (P3 = Live Tool Spindle)


G0 X___ Z___ Y___ Clear Part by 3 Times the Tool Tip Diameter

A___ Orient Sub-Spindle as Required


G0 G18 X___ Z___ Y___ Set X-Z Plane, Clear Part by 3 Times the Tool Tip Diameter

M55 Stop Live Tool Spindle

M224 Cancel C Axis


M01 Optional Stop

M-504A 15-3

MACHINING ON THE DIAMETER OF THE WORKPIECE

SAMPLE PROGRAM 1 - DRILLING OFFSET HOLES

Figure 15.1 and its accompanying program illustrate an elementary part in the main spindle that isto be cross drilled parallel with the X axis. The drilled holes will be offset from the spindle centerline by.375 inches.

Sample Program


N2 (Operator Message) ; Sequence Number and Operator Message


M98 P1 ; Safe Index Subprogram O1

T0202 ; Index and Call Tool Offset

G0 X1.825 Z-.875 Y.375 B0. ; Rapid Move to Start Point, Orient Spindle to 0 Degrees

G97 S2500 M53 P3 ; Live Tool 2500 RPM Forward, Coolant ON, Select Spindle

G87 G98 X.941 F7.5 ; Initiate X Axis Drilling Cycle, Drill First Hole

Z-1.625 ; Drill Second Hole

Y-.375 ; Drill Third Hole

Z-.875 ; Drill Fourth Hole

G80 ; Cancel Drilling Cycle



M01 ; Optional Stop


15-4 M-504A

M-504A 15-5

Figure 15.1 - Drilling Offset Holes on the Workpiece Diameter

TI4834

1.625

1.625

.875

.375

.375

+X+Y

Viewed from the Backof the Machine


Z0

SAMPLE PROGRAM 2 - MILLING A SLOT

Figure 15.2 and its accompanying program illustrates an elementary part in the main spindle that isto be cross milled as shown.

G Codes

G00 - Positioning Mode

G01 - Linear Interpolation

G02 - Circular Interpolation, Clockwise Arc

G03 - Circular Interpolation, Counterclockwise Arc

G18 - X,Z Work Plane

G19 - Z,C Work Plane

G40 - Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation

G41 - Tool Nose Radius Compensation, Workpiece Right of Tool

G42 - Tool Nose Radius Compensation, Workpiece Left of Tool

Sample Program






G0 G19 X2.1 Z-.65 Y0. B0. ; Rapid Move to Start Point, ZC Work Plane Selection,Orient Spindle to 0 Degrees


G42 Z-.4 ; Activate Tool Nose Radius Compensation

G1 G98 X1.8 F10. ; Feed Tool to Depth

G2 Y.41725 Z-.81725 R.41725 ; Cutting Move

G1 Z-1.23275 ; Cutting Move

G2 Y-.41725 R.41725 ; Cutting Move

G1 Z-.81725 ; Cutting Move

G2 Y0. Z-.4 R.41725 ; Cutting Move

G1 G40 Z-.625 ; Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation

G0 G18 X2.1 ; Rapid Move to Clear Workpiece, XZ Work Plane Selection



M01 ; Optional Stop


15-6 M-504A

M-504A 15-7

Figure 15.2 - Milling a Slot on the Workpiece Diameter

TI4835

2.000

1.650

.8345

.400

+X

+Y

Viewed from the Backof the Machine


+Y

-Y

1

2

3

5

4

Coordinate Locations:

1: Y0. Z-.4

2: Y.41725 Z-.81725

3: Z-1.23275

4: Y-.41725

5: Z-.81725

ToolPath

Z0

MACHINING THE END OF THE WORKPIECE

Y axis machining on the end of the workpiece requires the use of end-working live tooling attach-ments.

SAMPLE PROGRAM 3 - DRILLING OFFSET HOLES

Figure 15.3 and its accompanying program illustrates an elementary part in the main spindle that isto be face drilled as shown.

Sample Program






G0 X1. Y.5 Z.1 B0. ; Rapid Move to Start Point, Orient Spindle to 0 Degrees

G97 S2500 M54 P3 ; Live Tool 2500 RPM Forward, Coolant ON

G83 G99 Z-.25 F.003 ; Initiate Z Axis Drilling Cycle, Drill First Hole

X2. ; Drill Second Hole

Y1. ; Drill Third Hole

X1. ; Drill Fourth Hole

G80 ; Cancel Drilling Cycle



M01 ; Optional Stop


15-8 M-504A

M-504A 15-9

Figure 15.3 - Drilling Offset Holes on the Face of the Workpiece

TI4836

1.000

.500

.500

1.000

+Y +X

Viewed from the Tailstock orSub-Spindle End of the Machine


X0

Y0

SAMPLE PROGRAM 4 - MILLING A POCKET

Figure 15.4 and its accompanying program illustrates an elementary part in the main spindle that isto be face milled as shown.

G Codes

G00 - Positioning Mode

G01 - Linear Interpolation

G02 - Circular Interpolation, Clockwise Arc

G03 - Circular Interpolation, Counterclockwise Arc

G17 - X,C Work Plane

G18 - X,Z Work Plane

G40 - Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation

G41 - Tool Nose Radius Compensation, Workpiece Right of Tool

G42 - Tool Nose Radius Compensation, Workpiece Left of Tool

Sample Program






G0 G17 X1.5 Y-1. Z.1 B0. ; Rapid Move to Start Point, XC Work Plane Selection,Orient Spindle to 0 Degrees


G1 G99 Z-.15 F.005 ; Feed Tool to Depth

G41 Y-.52635 ; Activate Tool Nose Radius Compensation

G3 J-.52635 ; Move Tool 360°

G1 G40 Y-1. ; Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation

G0 G18 Z.1 ; Rapid Move to Clear Workpiece, XZ Work Plane Selection



M01 ; Optional Stop


15-10 M-504A

M-504A 15-11

Figure 15.4 - Milling a Pocket on the Face of the Workpiece

TI4837

.750

+Y

ToolPath

Start andEnd Point

+X

1.000

X0

Y0

- NOTES -

15-12 M-504A

APPENDIX ONE

M-504A A1-1

Figure A1.1 - Turret Travel Specifications: X and Z Axes(T-42 Lathe Equipped with BMT 45 Turret Top Plate)

TI5670A

0.5000 [12.700]-Z Software Limit

+Z Software Limit16.5050 [419.227] 16C Spindle15.5550 [395.097] 20C Spindle

8.5000 [215.900]Z Axis Reference Position

Z0

+Z

+X

16.5000 [419.100]X Axis

Reference Position

16.5360 [420.014]+X Software Limit

3.7960 [96.418]-X Software Limit

5.00[127.0] Turret

Top Plate

MainSpindle

Ma

inS

pin

dle

He

ad

wa

ll

CL

NOTES:

1. Turret shown without tool station covers.

2. All dimensions are shown in inches [millimeters].

3. All X axis travel specifications are diameter values measured from the spindle centerline.

4. All Z axis travel specifications are measured from the face of the main spindle.

5. Full programmable travel on the X axis is 12.740 [323.60], measured on the diameter.

6. Full programmable travel on the Z axis is: 16.005 [406.53] 16C Spindle15.055 [382.40] 20C Spindle

X and Z Axis Reference Position

A1-2 M-504A

Figure A1.2 - Turret Travel Specifications: X and Z Axes(T-42 Lathe Equipped with Hardinge Turret Top Plate)

TI5718A


+Z Software Limit14.8650 [377.571] 16C Spindle13.9150 [353.441] 16C Spindle

8.5000 [215.900] Z Axis Reference Position

Z0

+Z

+X

14.8600 [377.444]X Axis

Reference Position

14.8960 [378.358]+X Software Limit


5.00[127.0] Turret

Top Plate

MainSpindle

Ma

inS

pin

dle

He

ad

wa

ll

CL

NOTES:


2. All X axis travel specifications are diameter values measured from the spindlecenterline.



5. Full programmable travel on the Z axis is: 14.365 [364.87] 16C Spindle13.415 [340.74] 20C Spindle

M-504A A1-3

Figure A1.3 - Turret Travel Specifications: X and Z Axes(T-51 and T-65 Lathes Equipped with BMT 55 Turret Top Plate)


25.5000 [647.700] +Z Software Limit

12.5000 [317.500]Z Axis Reference Position

Z0

+Z

+X

20.0000 [508.000]X Axis

Reference Position 20.0200 [508.508]+X Software Limit


5.00[127.0]

TurretTop Plate

MainSpindle

Ma

inS

pin

dle

He

ad

wa

ll

CL

X and Z Axis Reference Position

NOTES:

1. Turret shown without tool station covers.


3. All X axis travel specifications are diameter values measured from the spindle centerline.



6. Full programmable travel on the Z axis is 25.000 [635.00].TI5802

A1-4 M-504A

Figure A1.4 - Turret Travel Specifications: X and Z Axes(T-51 and T-65 Lathes Equipped with Hardinge Turret Top Plate)


23.8600 [606.044] +Z Software Limit

12.5000 [317.500] Z Axis Reference Position

Z0

+Z

+X

17.7500 [450.850]X Axis

Reference Position17.7700 [451.358]+X Software Limit2.2500 [57.150]

-X Software Limit

5.00[127.0]

TurretTop Plate

MainSpindle

Ma

inS

pin

dle

He

ad

wa

ll

CL

NOTES:


2. All X axis travel specifications are diameter values measured from the spindlecenterline.



5. Full programmable travel on the Z axis is 23.360 [593.344].TI5832

M-504A A1-5

Figure A1.5 - Turret Travel Specifications: Y Axis Option(T-42 Lathe Equipped with a BMT 45 Turret Top Plate,

Viewed from the Tailstock/Sub-Spindle End of the Machine)

TI5721

4.822[122.48]

13.500[342.90]

SpindleCenterline

1.898[48.21]

6.370[161.80]

1.001[25.43]

2.251[57.18]

NOTE: All dimensions are shown in inches [millimeters].

+X

-X

+Y

-Y15.354

[390.00]

Way

cove

r

A1-6 M-504A

Figure A1.6 - Turret Travel Specifications: Y Axis Option(T-51 and T-65 Lathes Equipped with a BMT 55 Turret Top Plate,

Viewed from the Tailstock/Sub-Spindle End of the Machine)

5.938[150.83]

14.812[376.22]

SpindleCenterline

2.250[57.15]

7.76[197.10]

1.000[25.40]

2.500[63.50]


+X

-X

+Y

-Y

15.748[400.00]

Way

cove

r

TI5830

M-504A A1-7

Figure A1.7 - Tailstock Travel Specifications(T-42 Lathe)


TI5722A

19.3050 [490.347] 16C Spindle18.3550 [466.217] 20C Spindle

CL

Main Spindle

Dependent onTailstock CenterUsed


+X

+Z

Z0

3.3000 [83.82]-E Software Limit

Tailstock

+E Software Limit

E Axis Reference Position

Figure A1.8 - Tailstock Travel Specifications(T-51 and T-65 Lathes)

29.3700 [746.000] E Axis Reference Position

Dependent onTailstock CenterUsed Tailstock

Main Spindle

+X

+Z


CL

4.1200 [104.650]-E Software Limit

29.4000 [746.760] +E Software Limit

TI5853A

A1-8 M-504A

Figure A1.9 - Sub-Spindle Travel Specifications(T-42 Lathe)

Z0

NOTE: All dimensions are shown in inches [millimeters].TI5723A

0.5000 [12.700] -E Software Limit

CL

Main Spindle

+X

+Z

+E Software Limit16.5050 [419.227] 16C Spindle15.5550 [395.097] 20C Spindle

E Axis Reference Position16.5000 [419.100] 16C Spindle15.5500 [394.970] 20C Spindle

Sub-Spindle

Figure A1.10 - Sub-Spindle Travel Specifications(T-51 and T-65 Lathes)

TI5831

25.7500 [654.050] +E Software Limit

25.6250 [650.875] E Axis Reference Position

0.6250 [15.875] -E Software Limit

Sub-SpindleMain Spindle

CL


Z0+X

+Z

M-504A A1-9

Figure A1.11 - Work Envelope:T-42 Lathe Equipped with Tailstock and BMT 45 Turret Top Plate

TI5737

NOTES:


2. All measurements for X are radius values.

3. The turret is shown at the +X and +Z software limits.

4. The tailstock is shown at the Reference position.

CL


(Reference)

6.370[161.80]

(X Axis Travel)

1.898 [48.21]

0.500 [12.70]


(Z Axis Travel)

Main Spindle Tailstock

3.300 [83.82]Dependent onTailstock CenterUsed

A1-10 M-504A

Figure A1.12 - Work Envelope:T-42 Lathe Equipped with Tailstock and Hardinge Turret Top Plate

NOTES:




4. The tailstock is shown at the Reference position.

TI5748

CL

6.370[161.80]

(X Axis Travel)

1.078 [27.38]

0.500 [12.70]


(Z Axis Travel)

Main Spindle Tailstock



(Reference)

M-504A A1-11

Figure A1.13 - Work Envelope:T-42 Lathe Equipped with Sub-Spindle and BMT 45 Turret Top Plate

TI5736A

CL


(Reference)

6.370[161.80]

(X Axis Travel)

1.898 [48.21]

0.500 [12.70]

NOTES:




4. The sub-spindle is shown at the Reference position.


(Z Axis Travel)


PotentialInterference

A1-12 M-504A

Figure A1.14 - Work Envelope:T-42 Lathe Equipped with Sub-Spindle and Hardinge Turret Top Plate

NOTES:




4. The sub-spindle is shown at the Reference position. TI5749B

CL


(Reference)

6.370[161.80]

(X Axis Travel)

1.078 [27.38]

0.500 [12.70]


(Z Axis Travel)


1.635 [41.53] 16C2.585 [65.66] 20C


M-504A A1-13

Figure A1.15 - Work Envelope:T-51 and T-65 Lathes Equipped with Tailstock and BMT 55 Turret Top Plate

25.000 [635.00](Z Axis Travel)

0.500 [12.70]

7.760[197.104]

(X Axis Travel)

2.250 [57.15]

29.370 [746.00](Reference)

3.870 [98.30]

Dependent onTailstock CenterUsed

NOTES:




4. The tailstock is shown at the Reference position.TI5854A

CL

A1-14 M-504A

Figure A1.16 - Work Envelope:T-51 and T-65 Lathes Equipped with Tailstock and Hardinge Turret Top Plate

23.360 [593.34](Z Axis Travel)

0.500 [12.70]

7.760[197.104]

(X Axis Travel)

1.125 [28.58]

29.370 [746.00](Reference)


NOTES:




4. The tailstock is shown at the Reference position.TI5855A

CL

M-504A A1-15

Figure A1.17 - Work Envelope:T-51 and T-65 Lathes Equipped with Sub-Spindle and BMT 55 Turret Top Plate

CL

25.625 [650.88](Reference)

7.760[197.104]

(X Axis Travel)

2.250 [57.15]

0.125 [8.78]

Main SpindleSub-Spindle


25.000 [635.00](Z Axis Travel)

TI5833

NOTES:





0.500 [12.70]

A1-16 M-504A

Figure A1.18 - Work Envelope:T-51 and T-65 Lathes Equipped with Sub-Spindle and Hardinge Turret Top Plate

23.360 [593.34](Z Axis Travel)

CL

25.625 [650.88](Reference)

7.760[197.104]

(X Axis Travel)

1.125 [28.58]

0.500 [12.70]

Main SpindleSub-Spindle


TI5834

NOTES:





1.765 [44.83]

M-504A A1-17

1112

13

14

15

16

1

23

4

5

67

8

9

10

Figure A1.19 - Turret Top Plate Distance to Waycover:T-42 Lathe Equipped with a BMT 45 Turret Top Plate

27.00 [685.8] Diameter(Turret at Y0 or above)


25.00 [635.0] Diameter(Turret at Maximum -Y Travel)

5.82 [147.8]Radial Distance to Waycover


TI5703

A1-18 M-504A

1011

12

1

23

4

56

7

8 9

Figure A1.20 - Turret Top Plate Distance to Waycover:T-42 Lathe Equipped with a Hardinge Turret Top Plate

27.00 [685.8] Diameter



TI5704

M-504A A1-19

Figure A1.21 - Turret Top Plate Distance to Waycover:T-51 and T-65 Lathes Equipped with a BMT 55 Turret Top Plate


29.62 [752.3] Diameter(Turret at Y0 or above)

27.62 [701.5] Diameter(Turret at Maximum -Y Travel)



TI5835

A1-20 M-504A

Figure A1.22 - Turret Top Plate Distance to Waycover:T-51 and T-65 Lathes Equipped with a Hardinge Turret Top Plate


29.62 [752.3] Diameter

5.81 [147.6]Radial Distanceto Waycover

TI5836

M-504A A1-21

Ø7.05

Ø7.20

Ø8.27

Ø7.48

Ø7.05

Ø6.74

1.22 Ø8.02

2.45

Ø25.00

Ø6.74

Ø7.52

[179.0]

[635.0]

[62.2]

[182.9]

[210.0]

[171.2]

[179.0]

[190.0]

[191.0]

[171.2]

[203.7][31.0]

Figure A1.23 - Sample Tooling Layout:T-42 Lathe Equipped with a BMT 45 Turret Top Plate with Static and Live Tooling

TI5725NOTE: All dimensions are shown in inches [millimeters].

A1-22 M-504A

Ø8.788

[Ø223.21]

Ø9.276

[Ø235.61]

Ø9.276

[Ø235.61]

Ø9.276

[Ø235.61]

Ø9.276

[Ø235.61]

Ø9.276

[Ø235.61]

1.250

[31.75]

1.250

[31.75]

Ø8.576

[Ø217.84]

Ø9.128

[Ø231.86]

Ø8.920

[Ø226.56]

Centerline at

Centerline at

0.874

[22.19]

Ø9.199

[Ø233.65]

1.250 [31.75]

2.000 [50.8]

Figure A1.24 - Sample Tooling Layout:T-42 Lathe Equipped with a Hardinge Turret Top Plate

NOTE: All dimensions are shown in inches [millimeters]. TI5750

M-504A A1-23

Ø10.274

[Ø260.95]

Ø9.734

[Ø247.26]

Ø9.410

[Ø239.00]

Ø10.705

[Ø271.92]

Ø10.170

[Ø258.33]

Ø11.643

[Ø295.74]

Ø10.170

[Ø258.33]

Ø27.620

[Ø701.55]

Ø29.620

[Ø752.35]

1.500

[38.10]

Ø10.717

[Ø272.20]

Ø10.466

[Ø265.83]

Figure A1.25 - Sample Tooling Layout:T-51 and T-65 Lathes Equipped with a BMT 55 Turret Top Plate with Static and Live Tooling


TI5846

A1-24 M-504A

Ø10.280

[Ø261.12]

Ø10.281

[Ø261.14]

Ø9.344

[Ø237.33]

Ø10.267

[Ø260.79]

Ø10.272

[Ø260.90]

Ø9.314

[Ø236.59]Ø10.270

[Ø260.87]

Ø9.314

[Ø236.59]

Ø10.269

[Ø260.83]

Ø10.269

[Ø260.83]

Ø9.312

[Ø236.53]Ø10.267

[Ø260.79]

Ø10.271

[Ø260.87]

1.125

[28.57]

Ø10.271

[Ø260.87]

1.500

[38.10]

Centerline at 1.500 [38.10]Centerline at 2.813 [71.44]

Figure A1.26 - Sample Tooling Layout:T-51 and T-65 Lathes Equipped with a Hardinge Turret Top Plate

NOTE: All dimensions are shown in inches [millimeters].TI5845

M-504A A1-25

0

5 [3.7]

10 [7.5]

15 [11.2]

20 [14.9]

0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000

Motor Speed (RPM)

0

30 [40.7]

60 [81.3]

90 [122.0]

120 [162.7]

Power

hp [Kw]

Torque

lb-ft [Nm]

Maximum Power 15.5 [11.6]

Maximum Torque 108 [146.4]

Base

Speed

750

Figure A1.27 - Main Spindle Power and Torque Curves(T-42 and T-42 Big-Bore Lathes)

TI5744B

A1-26 M-504A

0

5 [3.7]

10 [7.5]

15 [11.2]

20 [14.9]

0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000

Motor Speed (RPM)

0

60 [81.3]

120 [162.7]

180 [244.0]

240 [325.4]

Power

hp [Kw]

Torque

lb-ft [Nm]



Base

Speed

420

25 [18.7] 300 [406.7]

Figure A1.28 - Main Spindle Power and Torque Curves(T-51 Lathe)

TI5824A

M-504A A1-27

00

Motor Speed (RPM)

0

Power

hp [Kw]

Maximum Power 35 [26.1]


Ba

se

Sp

ee

d5

90

5 [3.7]

10 [7.5]

15 [11.2]

20 [14.9]

25 [18.7]

30 [22.4]

35 [26.1]

900 1800 2700 3600 4500

50 [67.8]

100 [135.6]

150 [203.4]

200 [271.1]

250 [339.0]

300 [406.7]

350 [474.5]

Torque

lb-ft [Nm]

40 [29.8] 400 [542.3]

Figure A1.29 - Main Spindle Power and Torque Curves(T-65 Lathe)

TI5826A

A1-28 M-504A

0

5 [3.7]

10 [7.5]

15 [11.2]

20 [14.9]

0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000

Motor Speed (RPM)

0

30 [40.7]

60 [81.3]

90 [122.0]

120 [162.7]

Power

hp [Kw]

Torque

lb-ft [Nm]



Base

Speed

750

Figure A1.30 - Sub-Spindle Power and Torque Curves(All Models)

TI5744BNOTE: Maximum 5000 RPM on T-51 and T-65 lathes.

M-504A A1-29

0

2

4

6

8

0 2000 4000 6000 8000

15

00

70

00

Output(kW)

Motor Speed (RPM)

5.5kW

3.7kW3.7kW

2.5kW

30 Minute, S360% Operating Zone

ContinuousOperating Zone

Figure A1.31 - Live Tooling Power Curves(T-42 Lathe, BMT 45 Turret Top Plate)

TI5746A

0

10

20

30

40

0 2000 60002000 80004000

15

00 Continuous

Operating Zone


Torque(N•m)

Motor Speed (RPM)

Figure A1.32 - Live Tooling Torque Curves(T-42 Lathe, BMT 45 Turret Top Plate)

TI5747A

A1-30 M-504A

Motor Speed (RPM)

Output(kW)

4

2

0

6

8

10

0 2000 4000 6000 8000

15

00

7.5kW

5.5kW


ContinuousOperating Zone

Figure A1.33 - Live Tooling Power Curves(T-51 and T-65 Lathes, BMT 55 Turret Top Plate)

TI5828

Torque(N•m)

Motor Speed (RPM)

0 2000 4000 6000 8000

15

00 Continuous

Operating Zone


0

10

20

30

40

50

60

Figure A1.34 - Live Tooling Torque Curves(T-51 and T-65 Lathes, BMT 55 Turret Top Plate)

TI5829

- NOTES -

M-504A A1-31

- NOTES -

A1-32 M-504A

APPENDIX TWO

G CODES

G Code Group Definition

G00 1 Rapid Traverse Positioning Mode

G01 1 Linear Interpolation

G02 1 Clockwise Circular Interpolation

G03 1 Counterclockwise Circular Interpolation

G04 0 Dwell

G10 0 Offset Value Setting

G17 16 X,C Work Plane Selection

G18 16 X,Z Work Plane Selection

G19 16 Z,C Work Plane Selection

G20 6 Inch Data Input

G21 6 Metric Data Input

G22 9 Stored Stroke Limits ON

G23 9 Stored Stroke Limits OFF

G28 0 Return to Reference Position

G31 0 Skip Function

G32 1 Threadcutting Routine (Constant Lead)

G34 1 Threadcutting Routine (Variable Lead)

G40 7 Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation

G41 7 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (Part Right)

G42 7 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (Part Left)

G50 0 Maximum RPM Limit for Constant Surface Speed

G65 0 User Macro Call

G70 0 Automatic Finishing Cycle

G71 0 Automatic Rough Turning Cycle

G72 0 Automatic Rough Facing Cycle

M-504A A2-1

G Code Group Definition

G73 0 Automatic Rough Pattern Repeat Cycle

G74 0 Automatic Drilling Cycle

G76 0 Automatic Threading Cycle

G80 10 Cancel G80 Series Cycle

G83 10 Z Axis Drilling Cycle

G84 10 Z Axis Tapping Cycle

G85 10 Z Axis Boring Cycle

G87 10 X Axis Drilling Cycle

G88 10 X Axis Tapping Cycle

G89 10 X Axis Boring Cycle

G90 1 Canned Turning Cycle

G92 1 Canned Threading Cycle

G94 1 Canned Facing Cycle

G96 2 Constant Surface Speed

G97 2 Direct RPM Programming

G98 5 Inches/mm per Minute Feedrate

G99 5 Inches/mm per Revolution Feedrate

G107 0 Activate Cylindrical Interpolation

G112 21 Activate Polar Interpolation

G113 21 Cancel Polar Interpolation

A2-2 M-504A

M CODES

M Code Definition Standard / Option

M00 Program Stop Standard

M01 Option Stop Standard

M03 Main Spindle Forward Rotation Standard

M04 Main Spindle Reverse Rotation Standard

M05 Main Spindle Stop / Coolant OFF Standard

M07 Spindle Phase Synchronization Option

M08 Coolant ON Standard

M09 Coolant OFF Standard

M10 High Pressure Coolant ON Option

M11 High Pressure Coolant OFF Option

M12 Turret Coolant OFF Option

M13 Main Spindle Forward Rotation / Coolant ON Standard

M14 Main Spindle Reverse Rotation / Coolant ON Standard

M15 Thru-Spindle Coolant ON, Main Spindle Option

M16 Thru-Spindle Coolant OFF, Main Spindle Option

M20 Speed Arrival Check ON Standard

M21 Main Spindle Collet / Chuck Open Standard

M22 Main Spindle Collet / Chuck Close Standard

M23 Main Spindle Contouring Mode ON Standard

M24 Main Spindle Contouring Mode OFF Standard

M25 Main Spindle Part Catcher Retract Option

M26 Main Spindle Part Catcher Extend Option

M27 Main Spindle Internal Chucking Mode Standard

M28 Main Spindle External Chucking Mode Standard

M29 Rigid Tapping Mode Standard

M30 Program End, Optional Auto Door Open Standard

M32 Spindle Synchronization Option

M-504A A2-3


M33 Sub-Spindle Forward Rotation Option

M34 Sub-Spindle Reverse Rotation Option

M35 Sub-Spindle Stop Option

M36 Main Spindle Air Blast ON Option

M37 Main Spindle Air Blast OFF Option

M38 Auto Door Open Option

M42 No Corner Rounding - Exact Stop Standard

M43 Corner Rounding Standard

M44 Enable Turret Bi-Directional Index Standard

M45 Disable Turret Bi-Directional Index Standard

M46 Sub-Spindle Air Blast ON Option

M47 Sub-Spindle Air Blast OFF Option

M48 Enable Feedrate and Spindle Override Standard

M49 Disable Feedrate and Spindle Override Standard

M51 Live Tooling Rotation Option

M52 Live Tooling Rotation Option

M53 Live Tooling Rotation / Coolant ON Option

M54 Live Tooling Rotation / Coolant ON Option

M55 Live Tooling Stop / Coolant OFF Option

M56 Sub-Spindle Collet / Chuck Open Option

M57 Sub-Spindle Collet / Chuck Close Option

M58 Feed Bar Stock Option

M59 Cancel Feed Bar Stock Option

M60 Speed Arrival Check OFF Standard

M61 Bar Change Option

M62 Activate C Axis Spindle Synchronization Option

M63 Cancel C Axis Spindle Synchronization Option

M64 Spindle Feedback from Main Spindle Standard

A2-4 M-504A


M65 Spindle Feedback from Sub-Spindle Option

M66 Spindle Feedback from Live Tool Spindle Option

M68 Sub-Spindle External Chucking Mode Option

M69 Sub-Spindle Internal Chucking Mode Option

M70 Spindle Orient Commands to Sub-Spindle Option

M71 Spindle Orient Commands to Main Spindle Option

M72 Chamfering OFF Standard

M73 Chamfering ON Standard

M76 Sub-Spindle Axis Drive OFF (E Axis) Option

M77 Sub-Spindle Axis Drive Low Torque (E Axis) Option

M78 Sub-Spindle Axis Drive Normal Torque (E Axis) Option

M80 Check Part Missing Option

M81 Check Part Present Option

M82 E Axis Torque Control Mode ON (Tailstock) Standard

M83 E Axis Position Control Mode ON (Tailstock) Standard

M87 Tailstock Brake ON Standard

M88 Tailstock Brake OFF Standard

M90 Part Probe ON Option

M97 Increment Part Counter Standard

M98 Sub-Program Call Standard

M99 Return from Sub-Program Standard

M200 Main Spindle Brake ON Standard

M201 Main Spindle Brake OFF Standard

M202 Sub-Spindle Brake ON Option

M203 Sub-Spindle Brake OFF Option

M206 Disable Main Spindle Draw Bar Check Standard

M207 Enable Main Spindle Draw Bar Check Standard

M208 Disable Sub-Spindle Draw Bar Check Option

M-504A A2-5


M209 Enable Sub-Spindle Draw Bar Check Option

M215 Thru-Spindle Coolant ON, Sub-Spindle Option

M216 Thru-Spindle Coolant OFF, Sub-Spindle Option

M221 Part Catcher Slide Extend Option

M222 Part Catcher Slide Retract Option

M223 Sub-Spindle Contouring Mode ON Option

M224 Sub-Spindle Contouring Mode OFF Option

M225 Sub-Spindle Part Catcher Arm Rotate Out Option

M226 Sub-Spindle Part Catcher Arm Rotate In Option

M227 Sub-Spindle Part Catcher Gripper Close Option

M228 Sub-Spindle Part Catcher Gripper Open Option

M258 Chip Conveyor ON Option

M259 Chip Conveyor OFF Option

M301 Turns ON AUXO08 (output Y30.7) Standard





M306 Turns OFF AUXO08 (output Y30.7) Standard





M311 Wait for a high signal on AUXI08 (input X42.7) Standard





A2-6 M-504A











M-504A A2-7

- NOTES -

A2-8 M-504A

DOCUMENT REVISION RECORD

DateDocumentRevision

LevelDescription

October 29, 2010 - Initial Release.

November 12, 2010 -

Removed M08 coolant command, pages 1-54 & 1-55.

Corrected BMT 45 tooling chart, page 4-4.

Modified tailstock programming formats, pages 9-11 & 9-12.

Updated Table of Contents entries for chapter 9.

November 17, 2020 -Corrected entrapment warning, page iii.

Added Hardinge top plate X & Z travel limits to tables on pages 1-2 & 1-4.

November 30, 2010 - Removed M77 command. Updated programming examples.

December 8, 2010 - Added P98 to sample program segment, page 14-16.

December 13, 2010 -Changed + Z axis software limit.

Added Collet Dwell macro 9150 to Chapter 9.

December 20, 2010 -Added E axis work shift information to Chapters 4 & 14.

Updated workpiece transfer program examples in Chapter 14.

February 25, 2011 -

Added automatic swing-down tool probe option.

Added tool limitation for automatic swing-down tool probe option.

Updated sub-spindle part catcher information.

Changed sub-spindle part catcher capacity specifications.

Updated tailstock programming.

Corrected data word formats and minimum / maximum values.

April 15, 2011 -

Updated T-42 lathe spindle motor power and torque curves.

Updated T-42 lathe live tool motor power and torque curves.

Updated turret illustrations showing sub-spindle tool plate.

Removed spindle nose layout.

May 12, 2011 -Changed + Z axis software limits.

Added travel specifications for machine with 20C Big-Bore spindle.

February 1, 2012 A Added T-51 and T-65 lathes.

April 30, 2012 A Added turret top plate alignment caution.

July 30, 2012 A Added M90 command.

August 9, 2012 ARemoved sub-spindle thermal compensation commands.

Added M77 command. Updated programming example.

September 23, 2013 A Added spare M codes.

January 10, 2014 A Updated General Warnings and Cautions.

June 20, 2014 A Corrected M codes in Chapter 14.

July 2, 2014 A Updated spare M codes.

M-504A R-1

DateDocumentRevision

LevelDescription

March 20, 2015 A Updated spindle synchronization in Chapter 14.

R-2 M-504A

- NOTES -

M-504A R-3

Hardinge Inc.Elmira, New York 14902-1507 USA

Phone: 607-734-2281 FAX: 607-734-8819

www.hardinge.com

PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL - hardingeservice.comhardingeservice.com/usr/T-Series CQ-DQ-EQ/M A... · G71...

Documents

Transcript of PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL - hardingeservice.comhardingeservice.com/usr/T-Series CQ-DQ-EQ/M A... · G71...